molded-case circuit breakers & earth …electric-thailand.com/pdf/nf.pdfmolded-case circuit...
TRANSCRIPT
MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS &EARTH-LEAKAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation's Fukuyama Works, which produces these products, is certified as meeting the ISO 14001 environmental management system standard.
Global, High-Performance, Reliable,Best
Solutio
n,In
telli
gen
t
02B
INDEX This material has been prepared for those who use the products for
manufacturing assemblies, for holding electric works, for holding
maintenance and for the others acquainted with electric expertise
including those who operate the products (final users).
Introduction 1........................................................................................................................................
Features 3..............................................................................................................................................
The Great Variable Accessories for Perfect Solution 9......................................................................
1. Series Configuration and List of Product Models 11......................................................................
Molded-Case Circuit BreakersEarth-Leakage Circuit BreakersMotor-Protection BreakersUL Listed ProductsMiniature Circuit BreakersELRs and ZCTsCircuit Protectors
..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
13212526273133
2. Detailed Specifications 13.................................................................................................................
3. Special Purpose Breakers 34............................................................................................................
Mag Only (Instantaneous tripping circuit breakers)DC-Use MCCBs and DSN-type Switches400Hz-Use MCCBsLow-Instantaneous MCCBsGenerator-Protection MCCBsMeasuring Display Unit (MDU) Breakers
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
343435353536
1. Connection Types2. Connection Accessories3. Connection of Line and Load
..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................
383838
4. Connection Method 38......................................................................................................................
6
5
4
3
2
1
7
8
9
Internal Accessories1. Accessories2. Switch Operation and Rating3. Maximum Number of Internally Mounted Accessories4. Shunt Trip (SHT)5. Undervoltage Trip (UVT)6. Test Button Module (TBM)7. Lead-wire Specifications8. Internal Terminal Type (INT)9. Vertical Lead-wire Terminal Block (SLT)10. Pre-Alarm Module (PAL)11. Trip Indicator (TI)12. 3ø4W Neutral-pole protection Relay (NR)External Accessories1. V-type Operating Handle2. F-type Operating Handle3. S-type Operating Handle4. R-type Operating Handle5. Terminal Cover6. Electrical Operation Device7. Mechanical Interlocks (MI)8. Handle Lock Devices and Card Holder9. IEC 35mm Rail Mounting Adapters
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
3939394045454646464748494950505153545657656666
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Motor BreakersEarth-Leakage Circuit BreakersUL489 Listed Molded-Case Circuit BreakersMiniature Circuit BreakersDIN SeriesCircuit Protectors
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................
67107133141144149
Molded-Case Circuit BreakersEarth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
151151
CautionThe manual covers the product specifications for selecting an appropriate low-voltage breaker. There is the “HANDLING AND MAINTENANCE” describing how to handle the products. To use the products, separately request the “HANDLING AND MAINTENANCE”, for correct operation.
5. Accessories 39...................................................................................................................................
6. Characteristics and Dimensions 67..................................................................................................
7. Ordering Information
(http://www.fukuyama.melco.co.jp/lvs)
151...................................................................................................................
8. Melshort 2 152....................................................................................................................................
9. Low-voltage switchgears Technical information service via the internet
(A more rational and easier breakers selections)
153..............................
Mitsubishi Presents
Mitsubishi Presents the WS Series, Satisfying the High Demands of the Global Standard New from Mitsubishi Electric, the company Which has used its impressive controller device line-up in realizing high precision FA support, the WS (World Super) Series of next generation molded case circuit breakers and earth-leakage circuit breakers. This series complies with IEC and UL/CSA, JIS standards, achieving a stellar level of globalization to satisfy genuine international needs. A product line-up designed with the environment in mind, together with the pursuit of easy usage and high performance to forge the way to a bright new future for breakers.
Long service life and high reliability,made possible by new equipment breakthroughs.
Compliance with the global standards.
The quest for truly superb breaker function, realizingperformance at a full class higher.
Product design for greater easy usage,through wide variations.
New system configuration,on the strength of intelligent breakers.
High-Performance
Reliable
Global
Best Solution
Intelligent
Satisfying the High Demands
1
the WS Series, of the Global Standard
2
1
3
ASTA
CCC
TPC
TUV
LR GL BV NKDNV ABS
SABS
EN
GB
CSA
JIS
IEC
UL
NEW21 Century Global Standard
Complete change in Mitsubishi breaker design colorsComplete color change to ivory from WS Series. Use of shift to white breakers and more stylish design to boost attention on the international market.
Complying with the various world standardsBesides obvious conforming standards of IEC, UL, CSA and JIS, third-party certification and ship classification standards will also be obtained in each country, to respond to the world market.(Refer to the left entries for more details.)
Raise each rating to address the international market.(1)NF30-SP NF32-SW(2)NF60-HP NF63-HW(3)NF100-SP NF125-SW
(Notes) responds with standard item. will manufacture according to instructions.
WS Series International Standard Conformance List
Standards
WSSeries
IEC JIS EN
International Japan Europe
UL CSA LR GL DNV ABS BV NK
USA Canada
Safety Certification Marine Approvals
UK Germany Norway USA France Japan
4
Targets one-class higher performance, in realizing superb breaking performance
The WS Series presents a new technology.
[PA Auto-Puffer]Polymer Ablation type Auto-Puffer [Adopted on SGW,
HGW, RGW, UGW ]PA auto-Puffer is the technology to increase the interrupting performance by blowing out the gas to the arc by right angle. The gas pressure which is generated from high-polymer materials is accumulated in the accumulating space, and the gas is blown to the arc to extinguish. Especially this technology improves the high voltage breaking performance.
[JPT]Jet Pressure Trip Mechanism [Adopted on SGW,
HGW, RGW, UGW ]Ablation gas jet through the hole installed on the unit case directly activates the trip mechanism. This acts faster than the relay (magnet), and contributes to improved current-limiting performance and breaking reliability.
• Interchangeable Relay-unit Thermal type Electronic type • AC/DC common use • Thermal adjustable range is expanded.
• Isolation suitability • Class ll insulation • Extending operating cycles
• Increased lcu • High voltage • Ics=100% lcu • Co-ordination type “2”
• IP20 Mold-cover Finger protection
• Front compression terminal Box terminal
Rear PM
• Cassette-type accessories • Wide range of Rated
Voltage
• Electric operators High speed type Isolation suitability
• IP20 PM with Safety Device • Handle Lock Device • R/V handle • IP40 Terminal cover
Relay Mechanism
Terminal
Internal Accessories External Accessories
Breaking Performance
Shunt-less
JPT
Advanced ISTAC PA Auto-Puffer
Ablation Gas accumulating Gas flow Arc extinguishing
Arc Extinguishing Concept
Tripping actuator to push the trip-bar before the trip by relay unit.
Trip Bar
When short circuit fault occurs, the contacts are opened and arc is generated between the contacts.At that time the pressure in the unit case become very high.
Unit Case
High pressure gas blows through the hole to rotate the tripping actuator
Hole
Tripping Actuator
Accumulating space
Gas flow
Ablation
Unit case
Extinguishing unit
Fixed conductor
movable conductor
Arc
VJC insulation (high polymer materials)
1
Targets one-class higher performance, in realizing superb breaking performance
current
Attractive forceRepulsive force
Movable contact
current A
current B
current C
Movable contactPressure
Movable contact VJC
Fixed contact VJCArc
Upper, fixed-contact conductor
Lower, fixed-contact conductor
Magnetic core
Holder
Movable contact
Movable contactrevolving shaft
Spring
85
100
125
200 200 200 200 200 200
125 125 125 125 125
36
75 7570
6550
20
2530
36 36 3630
8Series
During revolution the movable contact is constantly in contact with the holder, maintaining current flow.
Breaking Capacity lcu/lcs
200
150
100
50
0
(kA)
230VAC380VAC 400VAC 415VAC 440VAC 500VAC 690VAC
U(UGW)R(RGW)
S(SGW)H(HGW)
Endurance(C-O cycles)
(times)50,000
40,000
30,000
20,000
10,000
0
Electrical Mechanical
NF125-SGW/HGW NF160-SGW/HGW NF250-SGW/HGW
Max. let-through peak current (kA) (400VAC)
Max
. pea
k cu
rrent
(kA
)
Short-Circuit Current, sym.r.m.s.(kA)
Prospective short-circuit current asym. peak
NF250-HGW
NF250-UGW
200
1008060
40
20
1086
4
2
11 2 4 6 8 10 20 40 60 80 100 200
I2t let-through characteristics (400VAC)
MAX
. I2 t (
A2 .sec
)
Short-Circuit Current, sym.r.m.s.(kA)
108
6
4
2
10.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0.10.08
0.06
0.041 2 4 6 8 10 20 40 60 80 100 200
NF250-HGW
NF250-UGW
(✕ 106)
[Advanced ISTAC] Advanced Impulsive Slot-Type Accelerator [Adopted on SGW, HGW, RGW, UGW ]
Further evolution in Mitsubishi original ISTAC breaking technology*. Optimization of the current path and the added magnetic core enhance driving electromagnetic forces. By the high-speed opening and the arc driving, the rising rate of arc voltage is increased and the peak current “lp” is decreased.
*The triple forces which are the repulsive force, the attractive force, and the pressure accelerate the separating speed of the movable conductor.
(1) Electromagnetic attractive force between Current A and Current C(2) Electromagnetic repulsive force between Current B and Current C(3) Ablation gas pressure
These three forces generated high-speed drive
[Shunt-less]Shunt-less Current Flow Technology [Adopted on SGW,
HGW, RGW, UGW ]Double plates conductors hold the movable conductor without flexible wires. This shunt-less structure achieves the extending operating cycles.
5
Product design which pursues greater use ease by wide variations
T
lr li l
li(DC)=1.3Xli(AC)li(X250A AC)4 10
160200
2506 8
lr lr(A)li
MODEL
RT 250ln 250 A
50/60HzMADE IN JAPAN
LN326N433-13P3E
lr
li
l
lp
ls
Ts
TL
T
Thermal Adjustable Relay
Electronic Relay
LN326N429-11MADE IN JAPAN
MODEL
RE250AC only
Ir
125
160200
250 12
60 80
100 2
3
4 5 67
8
10 0.6
12
T
I
IpTL Is
TsIi
Ir
3 4 7
7.5
8.5
9.54P3E 4P4E8 9
10
6
8 10
12
142.5
3.5
(A) L(s) (XIr)T Is (s)Ts(X250A)Ii
(XIr)Ip pNITEST
ln 250 A50/60Hz OVERPAL70%
Interchangeable Relay Unit [Adopted on SGW, HGW] To enhance flexibility, the Mitsubishi WS Series is equipped with interchangeable relay units (available in thermal or electronic types). The move has been made to AC/DC common use (only thermal adjustable type), while the expanded adjustment range enables reduction in the number of 250AF,160AF, 125AF relays from 10 to 7 types. A magnetic adjustable function has been added to the thermal type, while 4P neutral protection has also been enhanced.(Note: Only authorized members available to replace)
Thermal type unit
Electronic type unit
NF250-SGW/HGWNF160-SGW/HGW
NF125-SGW/HGWHiLo
HiLo
Rating ln(A) 25 40 63 100 125 160 250
Type
Overload Protection (Thermal)
Short-Circuit Protection (Magnetic)
Tripping threshold lr (A)
Neutral protection(note 1) 4P3E4P4E
16-25 25-40 40-63 63-100 80-125 125-160 160-250No Protection
1 ✕ lr
Tripping threshold liFixed
10✕ ln (AC), 13✕ ln (DC)Adjustable
4 to 10✕ ln (AC), 5.2 to 13✕ ln(DC)Note: (1) The type 4P3E is standard. If the type 4P4E is required, specify the type 4P4E separately and explicitly.
Rating
Type
ln(A) (40°C) 32 63 100 125 160 250NF250-SGW/HGWNF160-SGW/HGW
NF125-SGW/HGW
Overload Protection
Short-Circuit Protection
Pre-Alarm (for Indication)
Indicator (LED)
Tripping threshold lr (A)
LTDTripping time TL(s)
Neutral protection (Slectable)
16-32 32-63 63-100 75-125 80-160 125-25012-60-80-100 step adjustable (at 2 ✕ lr)
0-1 ✕ lr (Step adjustable)
STD
PAL
INST
Pickup current lsTripping time Ts(s)Tripping threshold li
2-2.5-3-3.5-4-5-6-7-8-10 ✕ lr step adjustable0.06-0.1-0.2-0.3 step adjustable (at 1.5 ✕ ls)
4 to 14 ✕ ln continuous adjustable
Pickup current lpOperating time Tp
0.7-0.75-0.8-0.85-0.9-0.95-1.0 ✕ lr step adjustableTL/2
70%-LED (green)PAL-LED (orange)
Over-LED (red)
Lights at 0.7 ✕ lrFlashs at lp and Lights at over Tp
Lights at 1.15 ✕ lr
6
1
7
External AccessoriesHight speed Motor DeviceSupplied for the 125 through 250AF is a motor device easier to use, which simplifies installation. ✽ Adoption of a spring charge mechanism for high-speed operation
(0.05~0.1seconds) ✽ Swift and simple installation, by tightening only two screws.
External HandleAdoption of a safer and easy to operate handle. ✽ Complying with protection degree IP65. ✽ Isolation function achieved through combination with the breaker unit. ✽ Structured to allow relay adjustments after installation as well. ✽ Equipped with cylinder key (option) to prevent deliberate operation.
IP-20PM with Safety Device[Adopted on SGW, HGW]Specialized for 3-and4-poles use (2 pole incompatible). ✽ Complies with protection degree IP20. ✽ Safety device supplied as option. ✽ May be connected with up to nine leads (for PLT). ✽ May be modified from front connection to rear connection.(Note: Modification by end users not authorized) IP20: Finger protection.
Product design which pursues greater use ease by wide variations
Internal Accessories Adopted for the internal accessories is a easily installed cassette type. Common use of different voltages realizes major reductions in types. The UVT for ELCB is also possible. Time delay type variations have also been expanded, addressing a wide range of applications.
✽ Cassette-type AccessoriesCassette-type accessories ensure flexbility when upgrading circuits.Ordering is easy, and installation is one touch simple and safe too thanks to the insulated cassette design.
Fits all breaker seriesThe alarm switch (AL), auxiliary switch (AX), shunt trip (SHT), and undervoltage trip (UVT) all comes as cassette-type accessories to suit all breaker series.
(IP-20PM)
3 Way Lead Wire (Selectable)
Vertical Lead-wire Terminal Block (SHT)
Lead-wire to Line side Flying Lead-wire
1.Push the trip button (PTT) to the breaker
2.Loosen the front cover screws
3.Open the front cover
4.Install the accessories
5.Close the front cover and tighten the screws.
Power Supply Module
V-Handle R-Handle
Prebius madels WS Series (New)
UVTvoltuge
SHTvoltuge
AC (V)
DC (V)
AC (V)
DC (V)
(24), (48), 100-120, 200-240, 380-450, (440-550)
(12), (24), (36), (48), 100, (110), (125), (220)
100-110, (100-120), 200-220, (220-240), (380-415), 400-440, (440-480), (500-550)
(24), (48), 100, (110)
24-48, 100-240, 380-550
12, 24-36, 36-48, 100-125, 220-250
24/48, 100-110/120-130, 200-220/230-250, 380-415/440-480, 500-550/690
24/48, 100/110, 110/125
8
New system configuration through the use of an intelligent breaker
CC-LinkInterface unitBIF-C
Data Measuring & Transmission
MELSECNET/10 or Other upper bus
CC-Link0kA
Working through a sequence CC-Link interface unit makes it possible to collect electrical circuit measuring data.
MITSUBISHI MDU (Measuring Display Unit) Breaker • AE1600-SS US3 Relay with CC-Link • NF400-SEPM with CC-Link
ONAE1600-SS
NF400-SEPM
LOAD LOAD
Setting InfomationRated current max :InmaxRated current max :(xinmax)Uninterrupted curr :Iu(xin)PAL pick-up :IP(xin)STD pick-up :Isd(xin)LTD Time :TLSTD time :TSInst Pickup :Ii(xin)
1050465
654321567856080
AVkWhkVarh%(PF)HzA(Hamonics)
1600808070
6001000.5
1600
A%%%%sec%%
AVkWh%(PF)
321450
12345690
AlarmPAL
OVERTrip(L)Trip(S)Trip(I)
Trip curent
AlarmPAL
OVERTrip(L)
Trip(S/I)
Product design which pursues greater use ease by wide variationsIP-20 Terminal Connection With the SGW, HGW, connection safety has been further elevated. ✽ Standard IP-20 protection degree secured.
Variable ConnectionsCompatible with various connection methods.Solderless terminals extending outside the breaker unit on the conventional type have been upgraded to a built-in internal type.Maximum connecting Cable of 185mm2
(SGW/HGW).(Note: Certain models have externally attached terminals)
Handle LocksWith the WS Series, ON/OFF locking is possible through the padlock to the breaker unit.Up to three padlocks may be attached. ✽ Customers are requested to supply their own padlocks
Terminal CoverMajor improvements have been made in front connection terminal safety. ✽ With terminal covers, IP40 protection
degree is ensured.(Type “SGW, HGW, RGW, UGW”)
IEC Rail Mounting for 32, 63AFThe 32,63AF includes installation hooks to IEC rails option equipment, greatly simplifying installation work.
OFF Lock with 3 Padlock(Type “SGW, HGW, RGW, UGW”)
AE-SS MDU MCCB MDU Eco Monitor
ON Lock OFF Lock
1
The Great Variable Accessories for Perfect Solution
250AF (Type“SGW, HGW, RGW, UGW”) Product Skelton
24
23
22
7
7
45
1110
1110
16
17
18
19
20
21
9
MCCB
Relay unit (Thermal type) (RT)*
Relay unit (Electronic type) (RE)*
Relay unit (Magnetic only type) (RM)*
Relay unit (Switch-disconnector type)*
Super current-limiting unit*
Solderless (BOX) terminals
Front connection nuts
Rear connections
Insulating barrier (BA-F)
Small terminal cover (TC-S)
Large terminal cover (TC-L)
Rear terminal cover (BTC)
Plug-in base (PM)
Connections for Plug-in
Mechanical interlock device (MI)
OFF Lock with 3 Padlock (HLF3)
Handle lock device (LC/HLF/HLN/HLS)
Variable-depth operating handle (V type)
Rotary operating handle (R type)
Electrical operation device (MD)
Alarm/Auxillary switch device (AL/AX)
Under voltage trip device (UVT)
Shunt trip device (SHT)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Note *: All the accessories are field mounting typeexcept No.2, 3, 4, 5 and 6.
12 13
8
6
9
15
3
98
1312
2
14
1
10
1
Series ConfigurationMolded-case circuit breakers
Earth-leakage circuit breakers
NF-CEconomy type
NF-SStandard type
NF-HHigh-performance
type
NF-UCurrent limiting-type
ultra breaker
NV-CEconomy type
NV-SStandard type
NV-HHigh-performance
type
NV-UUltra current-limiting
type
MBMotor breaker
Motor-protection breakers
NEMA-type for consumer unit DIN-series for general consumer unit
Miniature circuit breakers
BH BH-P BH-S BH-PS BH-D6 BH-DN BV-D BV-DN KB-D
For equipment
Circuit protectors
CP30-BA CP-B CP-S
11
1. Series Configuration and List of Product Models
1
50 100 150 225 250 400 600
UL489 ListedMolded-case circuit breaker
NF50-SWUNF100-CWU
NF-SFW NF225-CWUNF-SJW
NF-SKW NF-SLWNF100-SWU NF-HJW
Earth-leakage protector UL489 Listed Molded-case circuit breaker
NV50-SWU NV100-SWU NV225-CWU
SeriesFrame AUL listed products
NF-ULUL489 Listed
Molded-case circuit breaker
NV-ULEarth-leakage protector
UL489 ListedMolded-case circuit breaker
Miniature Circuit Breaker
UL
list
edp
rod
uct
s
AF
BH
60 100
BH
BH-P
BH-S —
BH-PS —
DIN SeriesAF
MCB
RCCB
Isolatingswitch
BH-DNBH-D6
BV-D
RCBO BV-DN
KB-D
63 and less
Circuit ProtectorsAF
CP
CP30-BA
CP-B
CP-S
30 and less
Details will be availableupon request.( )
Details will be availableupon request.( )
32 (30) 63 125 (100) 250 400 630 800 1000 1600
NF-CEconomy type
NF30-CS NF63-CW NF125-CW NF250-CW NF400-CP NF630-CP NF800-CEP
NF-SStandard type
NF-HHigh-performance type
NF32-SW
NF63-SWNF125-SW NF250-SW NF400-SP NF630-SP NF800-SDP
NF1000-SS NF1250-SS NF1600-SSNF125-SGW NF250-SGW NF400-SEP NF630-SEP NF800-SEP
NF63-HWNF125-HW NF250-HW NF400-HEP NF630-HEP NF800-HEP
NF1000-SSD NF1250-SSD NF1600-SSDNF125-HGW NF250-HGW
160
NF160-SW
NF160-SGW
NF160-HW
NF160-HGW NF400-REP NF630-REP NF800-REP
NF-UUltra current-limiting type
NF125-RGW NF250-RGWNF400-UEP NF630-UEP NF800-UEP NF1250-UR
NF125-UGW NF250-UGW
NV-CEconomy type
NV30-CS NV125-CW NV250-CW NV400-CP NV630-CPNV63-CW
NV-SStandard type
NV-HHigh-performance type
NV32-SW
NV63-SWNV125-SW NV250-SW NV400-SP NV630-SP
NV800-SEPNV100-SEP NV250-SEW NV400-SEP
NV630-SEP
NV63-HWNV125-HW NV250-HW NV400-HEP
NV800-HEPNV630-HEP
NV100-HEP NV250-HEW NV400-REP
NV-UUltra current-limiting type
NV125-RW NV250-RW
MBMotor breaker MB100-SW MB225-SW
MB30-SW
MB30-CS MB50-CW
MB50-SW
SeriesFrame A
List of Product Models
Mo
lded
-cas
e ci
rcu
it b
reak
erE
arth
-lea
kag
e ci
rcu
it b
reak
erMo
tor-p
rote
ctio
nbr
aker
1250
12
SeriesFrame Size
Photo
Type name
Rated current In (Amp.)
Rated ambient temperature (°C)Number of polesRated insulation voltage Ui (V)
Ratedshort-circuitbreakingcapacities (kA)
IEC60947-2(Icu/Ics)
AC(50/60Hz)
690V525V500V440V415V400V380V
DC
230V250V300V
Utilization categoryReverse connection (terminals unmarked)Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV)Pollution degree
Number of operating cycles
without current
with current
440V-In/2440V-In690V-In/2690V-In
Overall dimensions (mm)
abcca
Installationandconnections
FixedFront
Screw terminal
Synchronous Closing (UVT-S)Non-Synchronous Closing (UVT-N)
Solderless (box) terminal (SL)
Rear (B)Busbar terminal
Plug-inRear (PM)Rear/front IP20 (PM-IP)
IEC 35mm rail
Mounting hook (option)Adapter (option)
Cassette-typeaccessories(option) ✽ 5
Alarm switch (AL)Auxiliary switch (AX)Shunt trip (SHT)
Undervoltage trip (UVT)
Accessorie’s connection(option)
with Lead-wire terminal block (SLT)with Internal terminal type (INT)with Flying leads
Built-inaccessories(option)
Pre-alarm (contact output) ✽ 3 (PAL)Overcurrent trip alarm ✽ 3 (OAL)
EnclosureDustproof
(S) ( I )
Handle lock (HL)
(HL-S)
Externalaccessories(option)
Marine approval
Electrical operation device (MD) Mechanical interlock
Handle lock device
(MI)
Lock cover (LC)
Waterproof (W)
Externaloperatinghandle
Door mounting (V)(S)
Mounted on breaker(R)(F)
Insulatingbarrier
Between phase (BA-F)To ground (BA-G)
Terminalcover
Large (TC-L)Small (TC-S)
for rear connection (BTC)for plug-in (PTC)
L/RG/LBV
DNVABS
Automatic tripping device
Trip button
Notes ✽ 1: Use two poles in the case of three-pole or four-pole products.In addition, wiring as shown to the right allows the three poles to be used for up to 400V DC and the four poles to be used for up to 500V DC.
✽ 2: Use two poles in the case of three-pole or four-pole products.In addition, wiring as shown to the right allows the three poles to be used for up to 500V DC and the four poles to be used for up to 600V DC.
✽ 3: Both PAL and OAL is not available. Only one specified.✽ 4: Specify if for DC use.✽ 5: Cassette-type accessories are not suitable for NF30-CS.
a cac
b
Suitability for isolation
Mass of front-face type (kg)
Transparent (TTC)
Cylinder key lock
Available soon
Available soon
C series30
NF30-CS
3 5 1015 20 30
302 3
45 67.5
500–––
–1.5/1.5
–
1.5/1.52.5/2 (240V)
––
–
A–42
10,0006,000 (415V)
––
965267
––
–––●
–––
–
––
–
––
–●–
––––––
–
–––
Hydraulic-magnetic
–
0.25 0.35
–
●
●
●●
●
●
●
●
●●
●
●
●
●
6,000 (415V)
S series C series C seriesS series32
NF32-SW
3 4 6 10 1620 25 32
402 3
2.5/1 ✽ 4 –
600––
2.5/12.5/12.5/15/25/2
7.5/4
–
A
62
10,0006,0006,000
––
1306890
––
–
–
–
–
––
–
–
Hydraulic-magneticEquipped
50 75
–
–
0.4 0.55
●
●
●
●●
●
●●●●
●
●
●●
●●●●
●
●●●●●
●●●●●●●
●
●
●
–
63
NF63-CW
3 4 6 10 16 2025 32 40 50 63
402 3
2.5/1 ✽ 4 –
50 75
600––
2.5/12.5/12.5/15/25/2
7.5/4
–
A
62
10,0006,0006,000
––
1306890
––
–
–
–
–
––
–
–
Hydraulic-magneticEquipped
–
–
0.45 0.6
–
●
●
●
●●
●
●●●●
●
●
●●
●●●●
●
●●●●●
●●●●●●●
●
●
●
63
NF63-SW
3 4 6 10 16 2025 32 40 50 63
402 3 4
600––
7.5/47.5/47.5/47.5/47.5/415/8
–
A
62
15,00015,0008,000
––
1306890
––
–
–
–
–
––
–
–
Hydraulic-magneticEquipped
7.5/4 ✽ 4 –
50 75 100
0.45 0.6 0.7
––––
–––––
–
●
●
●
●●
●
●●●●
●
●
●●●●
●
●●●●●
●●
●
●●
●
●●●●●
●
–
●●●●●
●●●
●
●
●●●●
●
●●
●
●
●
●
●
●●
●●●●●
●
●●●●
H series63
NF63-HW
10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
40
6902.5/1
–7.5/410/510/510/510/525/13
–
A
62
15,00015,0008,000
–-–
1306890
––
–
–
–
–
––
–
–
Hydraulic-magneticEquipped
7.5/4 ✽ 4 –
50 75 100
0.45 0.6 0.7
––––
–––––
–
432
–
125
NF125-CW
50 63 80100 125
402 3
7.5/4 ✽ 1
60 90
600––
7.5/410/510/510/510/530/15
–
A
83
10,0006,0006,000
––
1306890
–
––
–
––
Thermal-magneticEquipped
0.65 0.9
––
–
●
●
●●
●●
●●●●●●●
●
●●
●●●●
●●●●●●●
●●●●●●●
●●
●
●
●
3-pole 4-pole
Line
Load Load
Line
2. Detailed SpecificationsMolded-Case Circuit Breakers
13
2
●●●●●
●
●
●●●●●●
●
●●
●●
●
●
●●●
●
●
●
●●
●●●●●●●
●●●●
S series
NF125-SW
16 20 32 40 50 63 80 100 125
40
6908/418/518/925/1330/1530/1530/1550/25
–
A
83
25,00020,00010,0001,0001,000
1306890
–
––
–
––
Thermal-magneticEquipped
125
15/8 ✽ 1
60
0.7
90 120
0.95 1.3
––
–––
–––––
–
432
–
●●●●
●●●●
●●
●●
●●●●●●●●
●●●
●
●
●●
●
●
●●●●
●●●
●
●
●●
●
●
●●
●●
●
●●
●●
●●●
●●●●●
●●
●●
●●●
●●●●●●
NF125-SGWRT
16–25 25–40 40–63 63–100 80–125
40
–
6908/8
22/2230/3036/3636/3636/3636/3685/85
A
83
50,00040,00030,0001,0001,000
16586110
–
–
––
–
––
– –
–
–
Thermal-magneticEquipped
NF125-SGWRE
16–32 32–63 63–100 75–125
403 4
6908/8
22/2230/3036/3636/3636/3636/3685/85
––
A
83
50,00040,00030,0001,0001,000
16586110
–
–
––
–
–
–
Electronic
Equipped
105 140
2.0 2.6
105 140
2.0 2.6
––
––
432
20/20 ✽ 2
●●●●●
●●●
●
●
●●●●●●
●
●●
●●
●
●
●
●
●
●●
●●●●●●●
●●●●
NF125-HW
16 20 32 40 50 63 80 100
40
69010/522/1130/1550/2550/2550/2550/25100/50
–
A
83
25,00020,00010,0001,0001,000
1306890
–
––
–
––
Thermal-magneticEquipped
40/20 ✽ 1
0.8 0.95
90 120
1.3
––
–––
–––––
–
432
–
●●●●
●●●●
●●
●●
●●●●●●●●
●●●
●
●
●●
●
●
●●●●
●●●
●
●
●●
●
●
● ●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●●●
●●●●●
●●
●●
●●●
●●●●●
H series
–
Electronic
125
NF125-HGWRT
16–25 25–40 40–63 63–100 80–125
40
69020/2035/3550/5065/6570/7075/7575/75
100/100
A
83
50,00040,00030,0001,0001,000
16586110
–
–
––
–
––
●
–
Thermal-magneticEquipped
NF125-HGWRE
16–32 32–63 63–100 75–125
403 4
69020/2035/3550/5065/6570/7075/7575/75
100/100
––
A
83
50,00040,00030,0001,0001,000
16586110
–
–
––
–
●
–
Equipped
105 140
2.0 2.6
105 140
2.0 2.6
–––
–––
432
40/40 ✽ 2
U series
NF125-RGWRT
16–25 25–4040–63 63–100
402 3
69025/25
–125/125125/125125/125125/125125/125125/125
–
A
83
50,00040,00030,0001,0001,000
240105
3.1
86110
–
–––
–
––
–
–
–
Equipped
NF125-UGWRT
16–25 25–4040–63 63–100
40
69030/30
–200/200200/200200/200200/200200/200200/200
A
83
50,00040,00030,0001,0001,000
24086110
–
–––
–
––
–
–
–
Thermal-magnetic
Thermal-magnetic
Equipped
125
–– –
105 140
3.1 3.9
–
–
––
–––
–––––
432
●●
●●●●●
●●●●●
●
●●
●
●●
●●
●
●
●●●●●
●●●●
●●●
●
●●
●
●
●●●●●
●
●
●●●●●
●●●●
●●●
●●
●●
●
●
14
SeriesFrame Size
Photo
Type name
Rated current In (Amp.)
Rated ambient temperature (°C)Number of polesRated insulation voltage Ui (V)
Ratedshort-circuitbreakingcapacities (kA)
IEC60947-2(Icu/Ics)
AC(50/60Hz)
690V525V500V440V415V400V380V
DC
230V250V300V
Utilization categoryReverse connection (terminals unmarked)Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV)Pollution degree
Number of operating cycles
without current
with current
440V-In/2440V-In690V-In/2690V-In
Overall dimensions (mm)
abcca
Installationandconnections
FixedFront
Screw terminal
Synchronous Closing (UVT-S)Non-Synchronous Closing (UVT-N)
Solderless (box) terminal (SL)
Rear (B)Busbar terminal
Plug-inRear (PM)Rear/front IP20 (PM-IP)
IEC 35mm rail
Mounting hook (option)Adapter (option)
Cassette-typeaccessories(option)
Alarm switch (AL)Auxiliary switch (AX)Shunt trip (SHT)
Undervoltage trip (UVT)
Accessorie’s connection(option)
with Lead-wire terminal block (SLT)with Internal terminal type (INT)with Flying leads
Built-inaccessories(option)
Pre-alarm (contact output) ✽ 3 (PAL)Overcurrent trip alarm ✽ 3 (OAL)
EnclosureDustproof
(S) ( I )
Handle lock (HL)
(HL-S)
Externalaccessories(option)
Marine approval
Electrical operation device (MD) Mechanical interlock
Handle lock device
(MI)
Lock cover (LC)
Waterproof (W)
Externaloperatinghandle
Door mounting (V)(S)
Mounted on breaker(R)(F)
Insulatingbarrier
Between phase (BA-F)To ground (BA-G)
Terminalcover
Large (TC-L)Small (TC-S)
for rear connection (BTC)for plug-in (PTC)
L/RG/LBV
DNVABS
Automatic tripping device
Trip button
Notes ✽ 1: Use two poles in the case of three-pole or four-pole products.In addition, wiring as shown to the right allows the three poles to be used for up to 400V DC and the four poles to be used for up to 500V DC.
✽ 2: Use two poles in the case of three-pole or four-pole products.In addition, wiring as shown to the right allows the three poles to be used for up to 500V DC and the four poles to be used for up to 600V DC.
✽ 3: Both PAL and OAL is not available. Only one specified.
a cac
b
Suitability for isolation
Mass of front-face type (kg)
Transparent (TTC)
Cylinder key lock
Available soon
Available soon
●
●●●●●
●●●●
●●
●●
●●●●●
●●●
●●
●●
●●●●●
● ● ●
●●●
●●
● ● ●●●
●●●
–
●
●
●●
●●
●●●
●
●
●
●
●●
●
●
●●●
●●●●
●
●
●●
●
●
●●●
●●●●●●
● ●
●●
●●
●
S series
Electronic
NF160-SW
125 150 160
40
690––
15/825/1330/1530/1530/1550/25
–
A
62
12,0004,0004,000
––
1656892
–
–––
–
–
––
Thermal-magneticEquipped
160
NF160-SGWRT
125–160
40
6908/8
22/2230/3036/3636/3636/3636/3685/85
–
A
83
40,00030,00020,0001,0001,000
16586
110
–
–
––
–
––
●
–
Thermal-magneticEquipped
NF160-SGW RE
80–160
403 4
6908/8
22/2230/3036/3636/3636/3636/3685/85
––
A
83
40,00030,00020,0001,0001,000
16586
110
–
–
––
–
●
–
Equipped
15/8 ✽ 1
105 140 105 140 105 140
2.0 2.6 2.0 2.6
–––
–––
–––
––––
–––––
–––––
432
1.91.51.3
432
20/20 ✽ 2
–
H series
NF160-HW
125 150 160
40
6905/3–
30/850/1350/1350/1350/13
100/25
–
A
62
12,0004,0004,0001,0001,000
1656892
–
–––
–
–
––
–
Thermal-magneticEquipped
160
NF160-HGWRT
125–160
40
69020/2035/3550/5065/6570/7075/7575/75
100/100–
A
83
40,00030,00020,0001,0001,000
16586
110
–
–
––
–
––
●
–
Thermal-magneticEquipped
NF160-HGWRE
80–160
40
69020/2035/3550/5065/6570/7075/7575/75
100/100
––
A
83
40,00030,00020,0001,0001,000
16586
110
–
–
––
–
●
–
Electronic
Equipped
3 4
105 140
2.0 2.6
2 3 4
1.3 1.5 1.9
2 3 4
40/20 ✽ 140/40 ✽ 2
105 140 105 140
2.0 2.6
––
–––
–––
–––––
–––––
–––––
– ●●
●●
●
●
●●
●●●●●●●
●●●●●
●
●
●●●●
●●
●●
●
●
●●●
●
●●●●●
●●
●
●
●●●●●
●●●●●●
●●●
●
●
●●
●
●
●
●
●
●●
●●
●●●
●●●●
●●●●
●●●
●
●
●●
●
●
3-pole 4-pole
Line
Load Load
Line
2. Detailed SpecificationsMolded-Case Circuit Breakers
15
2
C series S series H series U series
3 4 3 4
NF250-SW
125 150 175200 225 250
40
690––
15/825/1330/1530/1530/1550/25
–
A
62
12,0004,0004,000
–-–
1656892
–
–––
–
–
––
Thermal-magneticEquipped
105 140
2.0 2.6
105 140
2.0 2.6
250
NF250-SGWRT
125–160 160–250
40
6908/8
22/2230/3036/3636/3636/3636/3685/85
–
A
83
25,00015,00010,0001,0001,000
16586110
–
–
––
–
––
●
–
Thermal-magneticEquipped
NF250-SGWRE
125–250
40
6908/8
22/2230/3036/3636/3636/3636/3685/85
––
A
83
25,00015,00010,0001,0001,000
16586110
–
–
––
–
●
–
Electronic
Equipped
NF250-HW
125 150 175200 225 250
40
6905/3–
30/850/1350/1350/1350/13
100/25
–
A
62
12,0004,0004,0001,0001,000
1656892
–
–––
–
–
––
Thermal-magneticEquipped
NF250-HGWRT
125–160 160–250
40
69020/2035/3550/5065/6570/7075/7575/75
100/100–
A
83
25,00015,00010,0001,0001,000
16586
110
–
–
––
–
––
–
–
Thermal-magneticEquipped
250
NF250-HGWRE
125–250
40
–
69020/2035/3550/5065/6570/7075/7575/75
100/100
–
A
83
25,00015,00010,0001,0001,000
16586
110
–
–
––
–
–
–
Electronic
Equipped
105
3.1
2 3
250
NF250-RGWRT
125–160 160–225
40
69025/25
125/125125/125125/125125/125125/125125/125125/125
–
A
83
25,00015,00010,0001,0001,000
24086
110
–
–––
–
––
–
–
–
●Thermal-magnetic
Thermal-magnetic
Equipped
NF250-UGWRT
125–160 160–225
40
69030/30
–200/200200/200200/200200/200200/200200/200
–
A
83
25,00015,00010,0001,0001,000
24086
110
–
–––
–
––
–
–
–
Equipped
2 3 42 3 4
1.3 1.5 1.9
15/8 ✽ 120/20 ✽ 2 40/40 ✽ 2
40/20 ✽ 1–
105 140 105 140
2.0 2.6
105 140 105 140
2.0 2.6
105 140
3.1 3.9
–––
–––
–––
–––
–––
–––
–
–––
–––
–––
–
–
–––––
–––––
432
1.91.51.3
432 432
–
●
●
●●
●●
●●●●
●
●
●●●●●
●●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●●
●
●
●●●
●●●●
●●●●●
●●●
●●●●●
●
●
●●
●
●
●●●
●●●●●●
●●●●●
●●●
●●●●●
●●●
●● ●
●
●●
●●●
●●●●●
●●●●●
● ●
● ● –
●
●
●●
●●
●●●●
●
●
●●●●
●●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●●
●
●
●●●
●●●●
●●
●●●
●
●●●
●
●●
●●
●
●
●●
●
●
●●●
●●●●●●
●●●●●●
●●●
●●●●●
●
●
●●
●●
●●●
●●●●
●●●●●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●●
●
●●●
●●●●
●●●●●
● ●
●
●
●●●●●
●●●
●●●
●
●●●●●
●●●●●
●●●●●
●●●●●
●
●
● ● ● ●
–
250
NF250-CW
125 150 175 200225 250
402 3
10/5 ✽ 1
105
600––
10/515/818/918/918/9
35/18
–
A
62
8,0004,0004,000
––
1656892
–
–––
–
–
––
Thermal-magneticEquipped
1.3 1.5
●
●
●●
●●
●●●●
●
●
●●●●●●●●
●●
●
●●●●●
●●●●●●●
●
–
16
SeriesFrame Size
Photo
Type name
Rated current In (Amp.)
Rated ambient temperature (°C)Number of polesRated insulation voltage Ui (V)
Ratedshort-circuitbreakingcapacities (kA)
IEC60947-2(Icu/Ics)
AC(50/60Hz)
690V500V440V415V400V380V
DC230V250V
Utilization category
Reverse connection (terminals unmarked)Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV)Pollution degree
Overall dimensions (mm)
abcca
Installationandconnections
FixedFront
Screw terminal
Synchronous Closing (UVT-S)Non-Synchronous Closing (UVT-N)
Solderless (box) terminal (SL)
Rear (B)Busbar terminal
Plug-inRear (PM)Rear/front IP20 (PM-IP)
Cassette-typeaccessories(option)
Alarm switch (AL)Auxiliary switch (AX)Shunt trip (SHT)
Undervoltage trip (UVT)
Accessorie’s connection(option)
with Lead-wire terminal block (SLT)with Internal terminal type (INT)with Flying leads
Built-inaccessories(option)
Pre-alarm (contact output) ✽ 3 (PAL)Overcurrent trip alarm ✽ 3 (OAL)
(TI)
EnclosureDustproof
(S) ( I )
Handle lock (HL)
(HL-S)Externalaccessories(option)
Marine approval
Mechanical interlock
Handle lock device
(MI)
Lock cover (LC)
Waterproof (W)
Externaloperatinghandle
Door mounting (V)(S)
Mounted on breaker(R)
Electrical operation device
Motor-operated type (MD)
Spring-charge type (MDS)
(F)Insulatingbarrier
Between phase (BA-F)To ground (BA-G)
Terminalcover
Large (TC-L)Small (TC-S)
for rear connection (BTC)for plug-in (PTC)
L/RG/LBV
DNVABS
Automatic tripping device
Trip button
Notes ✽ 1: In case of solderless terminal, interrupting capacity reduces: ( / ).✽ 2: Solid state relay output is option . Please specify if other output is
necessary. (Standard type is thus SLT equipped.)✽ 3: Both PAL and OAL is not available. Only one specified.✽ 4: Specify if for DC use.
C series S series
a cac
b
Suitability for isolation
Mass of front-face type (kg)
Transparent (TTC)
Trip indicator
400
2 3
Rated short-time withstand current Icw (kA)
NF400-CP
H series400
250 300 350 400
40
600–
15/8
36/1836/1825/13
40/2050/25
20/10 ✽ 4 –
A–
83
140257103134
–
–
–
––––
–
–
–
Thermal-magneticEquipped
A–
83
140257103155
–
–
–
––––
–
–
Thermal-magneticEquipped
NF400-SP
250 300 350 400
40
40/40 ✽ 4 –
69010/10(5/5) ✽ 1
30/30(25/25) ✽ 142/42(36/36) ✽ 145/45(36/36) ✽ 145/45(36/36) ✽ 150/50(42/42) ✽ 185/85(65/65) ✽ 1
400
NF400-SEP
200~400adjustable
3 4
–
B5
NF400-HEP
400
2 3 4
185
––
–
4.9 5.7 7.5
––––––
83
140257103155
–
–
–
● ✽ 2–●–
–
–
Electronic
Equipped
40
69010/10(5/5) ✽ 1
30/30(25/25) ✽ 142/42(36/36) ✽ 145/45(36/36) ✽ 145/45(36/36) ✽ 150/50(42/42) ✽ 185/85(65/65) ✽ 1
185
6 7.8
––
–
200~400adjustable
3 4
–
B5
83
140257103155
––
–
–
● ✽ 2–●–
–
––
Electronic
Equipped
–––––
–––––
40
69010/1050/5065/6570/7070/7070/70
100/100
185
6 7.8
––
––
NF400-REP
200~400adjustable
3
–
B5
83
140257103155
––
–
–
● ✽ 2–●–
–
––
–
Electronic
Equipped
40
69015/1070/35125/63125/63125/63125/63150/75
6
––
●
●
●●●●
●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●●●●●●
●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●●●●
●●●●●●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●●●●●●
●●●
●●
●●●●
●
●
●
●●●●
●●●●●●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●●●●●●
●●●
●●
●
●
●
●●●
●●●●●●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●●●●●
●
●●●●●
●●●–●
●●
●
●
●●●
●●●●●●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●●●●●
●●●
●
●
●–
4.7 5.5
17
2. Detailed SpecificationsMolded-Case Circuit Breakers
2
–
C series S series630
NF630-CP
500 600 630
40
600–
18/936/1836/1836/1840/2050/25
A
83
275103
275103
275103
155
–
–
–
––––
–
–
–
Thermal-magneticEquipped
630H series
630
3 4
210
432
U series400
3 4
140 280297 322
NF400-UEP
200–400adjustable
–
B5
●
83
200252
––
–
–
● ✽ 2–●–
––
–
●–
–
Electronic
Equipped
–
40
69035/35
170/170200/200200/200200/200200/200200/200
––
–
16.7 26.1
210 280322
–
B7.6
83
200252
––
–
–
● ✽ 2–●–
––
–
●–
Electronic
Equipped
–
35/35170/170200/200200/200200/200200/200200/200
––
–
25.7 31.9
2 3
20/10 ✽ 4 –
8.0 9.4
NF630-SP
500 600 630
40
69010/1030/3042/4245/4545/4550/5085/85
A
155
–
–
–
––––
–
–
–
Thermal-magneticEquipped
40/40 ✽ 4 –
210 280
12.59.68.5
––
––––––
NF630-SEP
300~630adjustable
40
69010/1030/3042/4245/4545/4550/5085/85
B– – 7.6
155
–
–
–
● ✽ 2–●–
–
–
–
Electronic
Equipped
–
210 280
10.5 13.6
––
–––––
83
83
275103
3 4
NF630-HEP
300~630adjustable
40
69015/1550/5065/6570/7070/7070/70
100/100
B7.6
155
––
–
–
● ✽ 2–●–––
–
–
–
Electronic
Equipped
–
210 280
10.5 13.6
––––––
83
630U series
3 4
NF630-UEP
300~630adjustable
40
690
630
275103
NF630-REP
300~630adjustable
403
69020/1570/35125/63125/63125/63125/63150/75
B7.6
15510.5
––
–
–
● ✽ 2–●–––
–
–
–
Electronic
Equipped
–
–
83
210
––––––
–
●
●
●
●●●
●
●
●
●●●●
●●●●●●
●
●●●
●
●●●●
●●
●●
●
●●
●●●●●●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●●●
●●●
●–
–––
–
●
●
●
●●
●●●●●●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●
●●●●●●
●
●●●
●
●●●●
●●
●
●●
●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●
●●●●●●
●
●●●
●
●●●●
●●
●
●●
●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●●●●●●
●
●●●
●
●●●●
●●
●
●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●●●●●●
●
●●●
●
●●●●
●●
●
●●●
●
●●●
●
● ● –
18
SeriesFrame Size
Photo
Type name
Rated current In (Amp.)
Rated ambient temperature (°C)Number of polesRated insulation voltage Ui (V)
Ratedshort-circuitbreakingcapacities (kA)
IEC60947-2(Icu/Ics)
AC(50/60Hz)
690V500V440V415V400V380V
DC230V250V
Utilization category
Reverse connection (terminals unmarked)Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV)Pollution degree
Overall dimensions (mm)
abcca
Installationandconnections
FixedFront
Screw terminal
Synchronous Closing (UVT-S)Non-Synchronous Closing (UVT-N)
Rear (B)Busbar terminal
Plug-inRear (PM)Rear/front IP20 (PM-IP)
Cassette-typeaccessories(option) ✽ 5
Alarm switch (AL)Auxiliary switch (AX)Shunt trip (SHT)
Undervoltage trip (UVT)
Accessorie’s connection(option)
with Lead-wire terminal block (SLT)with Internal terminal type (INT)with Flying leads
Built-inaccessories(option)
Pre-alarm (contact output) ✽ 3 (PAL)Overcurrent trip alarm ✽ 3 (OAL)
(TI)
EnclosureDustproof
(S) ( I )
Handle lock (HL)
(HL-S)Externalaccessories(option)
Marine approval
Mechanical interlock
Handle lock device
(MI)
Lock cover (LC)
Waterproof (W)
Externaloperatinghandle
Door mounting (V)(S)
Mounted on breaker(R)
Electrical operation device
Motor-operated type (MD)
Spring-charge type (MDS)
(F)Insulatingbarrier
Between phase (BA-F)To ground (BA-G)
Terminalcover
Large (TC-L)Small (TC-S)
for rear connection (BTC)for plug-in (PTC)
L/RG/LBV
DNVABS
Automatic tripping device
Trip button
Notes ✽ 1: In case of solderless terminal, interrupting capacity reduces: ( / ).✽ 2: Solid state relay output is option . Please specify if other output is
necessary. (Standard type is thus SLT equipped.)✽ 3: Both PAL and OAL is not available. Only one specified.✽ 4: Specify if for DC use.✽ 5: Cassette-type accessories are not suitable for NF1000-SS, NF1000-SSD,
NF1250-SS, NF1250-SSD, NF1250-UR, NF1600-SS, and NF1600-SSD.
a cac
b
Suitability for isolation
Mass of front-face type (kg)
Transparent (TTC)
Trip indicator
Rated short-time withstand current low (kA)
C series800
NF800-CEP
400~800adjustable
403
600–
18/936/1836/1836/1840/2050/25
B
83
27510315510.9
–
–
–
● ✽ 2–
–
–
–
–
Electronic
Equipped
210
–
9.6
S series800
H series800
NF800-SDP
(700) 800
402––––––––
A
83
2751031559–
–
–
––––
–
–
–
Thermal-magneticEquipped
210
40/40 ✽ 4
–
NF800-SEP
400~800adjustable
403 4
69010/1030/3042/4245/4545/4550/5085/85
B
83
275103155
–
–
–
● ✽ 2–
–
–
–
–
Electronic
Equipped
–
9.6
210 280322
–
B9.6
83
200252
––
–
–
● ✽ 2–●–
––
–
––
Electronic
Equipped
–
35/35170/170200/200200/200200/200200/200200/200
––
––––––
27.6 33.7
– –
800U series
3 4
NF800-UEP
400~800adjustable
40
690
210 280
10.9 14.2
––
–––––
NF800-HEP
400~800adjustable
403 4
69015/1550/5065/6570/7070/7070/70
100/100
B
83
275103155
––
–
–
● ✽ 2–
–––
–
–
–
Electronic
Equipped
–
9.6
210 280
10.9 14.2
–––
– ––
NF800-REP
400~800adjustable
403
69020/1570/35125/63125/63125/63125/63150/75
B
83
21027510315510.9
––
–
–
● ✽ 2–
–––
–
–
–
Electronic
Equipped
–
9.6
–
●
●
●
●●●●●
●
●
●●●●
●●●●●●
●
●
●●●
●
●●●●
●●
●●
●
●
●
●
–––––
●
●
●●●●
●●●●●●
●
●●●
●
●●●●
●●
●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●
●●●●●●
●
●
●●●
●
●●●●
●●
●
●
●
●●
●●●●●●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●●●
●
●●
●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●●●●●●
●
●
●●●
●
●●●●
●●
●
●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●●●●●●
●
●
●●●
●
●●●●
●●
●
●●●
●
Solderless (box) terminal (SL)
19
2. Detailed SpecificationsMolded-Case Circuit Breakers
2
210 280406
–
B20
–
83
140190
––
–
–
––––
–
––
–
–
Electronic
Equipped
–
25/1365/3385/43
–85/43
–125/63
––
23.5 30.7
1000S series
3 4
NF1000-SS
40
690
–––––
––
– –– –
–
500–600–700–800–900–1000 adjustable
406
40/20 ✽ 4
A–
–
83
210
14019022––
––
–
––––
–
––
–
–
Thermal-magneticEquipped
–
–––––––
––
NF1000-SSD
402–
1000
––
––
210 280406
–
B20
–
83
140190
––
–
–
––––
–
––
–
–
Electronic
Equipped
–
25/1365/3385/43
–85/43
–125/63
––
23.5 30.7
1250S series
1250U series
1600S series
3 4
NF1250-SS
40
690
–––––
600–700–800–1000–1200–1250 adjustable
240 310406
–
B20
–
83
144194
––
–
● (LT)–
––––––
–
––
–
–
–
Electronic
Equipped
–
–85/42125/65
–125/65
–170/85
––––––
–
37.2 46.7
3 4
NF1250-UR
40
690
600–700–800–1000–1200–1250 adjustable
406
40/20 ✽ 4
A–
–
83
210
14019022––
––
–
––––
–
––
–
–
Thermal-magneticEquipped
–
–––––––
––
NF1250-SSD
402–
1250
–
––
– –– –
–
210 280406
–
B20
–
83
140190
––
––
–
––––––
–
––
–
–
Electronic
Equipped
–
25/1365/3385/43
–85/43
–125/63
––––––
–
34.5 41.2
3 4
NF1600-SS
40
690
–––––
800–1000–1200–1400–1500–1600 adjustable
406
40/20 ✽ 4
A–
–
83
210
14019032––
––
–
––––––
–
––
–
●
●●●
●●●●●●
●
●
●
●●
●
●●●●
●●
●
●
●●
●●●●●●
●
●
●
●●
●
●●●●
●●
●●
●●
●
●●●
●●●●●●
●
●
●
●●
●
●●●●
●
●●
●●●●●
●
●
●
●●
●
●
●●
●
●●
●●●●●●
●
●●
●
●
●●
●
●●●●
●
●●
●
●
●●
●●●●●●
●
●
●
●●
●
●●●–
●
●●
●●●●●●
●
●
●
●●
●
●●●––
magnetic
Equipped
–
–––––––
––
NF1600-SSD
402–
1600
20
SeriesFrame size
Type name
Photo
Rated current In (Amp.)
Rated ambient temperature (°C)Number of poles
Rated operational voltage Ue (AC V)
High-speed type
Time-delay type
Earth-leakage indication system
Rated breaking capacity (kA)IEC60947-2 (Icu/Ics)
AC440VAC400VAC380VAC230V
440V-In/2440V-In
Number of operating cycles
Overall dimensions (mm)
abcca
Mass of front-face type (kg)
Installation andconnections
Fixed Front
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max. operating time at 2I∆n (s)
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s)
Screw terminal
without current
with current
Synchronous closing (UVT-S)Non-synchronous closing (UVT-N)
Solderless (box) terminal (SL)Busbar terminal
Rear (B)
Plug-inRear (PM)Rear/front IP20 (PM-IP)
IEC 35mmrail
Mounting hook (option)Adapter (option)
Cassette-typeaccessories(option) ✽ 2
Alarm switch (AL)Auxiliary switch (AX)Shunt trip (SHT)
Undervoltage trip (UVT)
Accessorie’s connection (option)
Insulation switch (MG)Earth-leakage trip alarm (EAL)Test button module (TBM)
Built-inaccessories(option)
with Lead-wire terminal block (SLT)with Flying leads
Enclosure(S)
Dustproof ( I )
Handle lock (HL)
(HL-S)
Externalaccessories(option)
Electrical operation device (MD)
Handle lock device
Lock cover (LC)
Waterproof (W)
Mechanical interlock (MI)
Externaloperatinghandle
Door mounting (V)(S)
Mounted on breaker(R)(F)
Insulatingbarrier
Between phase (BA-F)To ground (BA-G)
Terminalcover
Large (TC-L)Small (TC-S)Transparent (TTC)for rear connection (BTC)for plug-in (PTC)
Automatic tripping device
Trip button
C series S series H series
a cac
b
30
NV30-CS
5 10 1520 30
303
0.04
–
–––
2.5/210,000
6,000 (230V)6,000 (230V)
67.59652670.4
––
––
●
–––
––
––––––
––––––
●●
–Hydraulic-magnetic
Equipped ✽ 5
Button
230
30
–
–
32
NV32-SW
6 10 16 2025 32
403
0.04
–
5/25/25/210/5
10,0006,0006,000
7513068900.6
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Hydraulic-magneticEquipped
Button
230–400–440Multi-voltage type
30 •100 •500Selectable
–
–
63
NV63-SW
16 20 25 32 4050 63
403
0.04
–
7.5/47.5/47.5/415/8
15,00015,0008,000
751306890
0.65
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Hydraulic-magneticEquipped
Button
230–400–440Multi-voltage type
30 •100 •500Selectable
–
–
63
NV63-HW
16 20 25 32 4050 63
403
0.04
–
10/510/510/525/1315,00015,0008,000
751306890
0.65
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Hydraulic-magneticEquipped
Button
230–400–440Multi-voltage type
30 •100 •500Selectable
–
–
125
NV125-CW
63 80 100 125
403
0.04
0.1•0.5 •1.0
10/510/5
–30/1510,0006,0006,000
9013068901.0
–
–
Thermal-magneticEquipped
Button
230–400–440Multi-voltage type
30 •100 •500Selectable
100 •300 •500Selectable
0.45 •1.0 •2.0Selectable
250
NV250-CW
125 150 175200 225 250
403
0.04
0.1•0.5 •1.0
15/818/9
–35/188,0004,0004,00010516568921.7
–––
–
–
Thermal-magneticEquipped
Button
230–400–440Multi-voltage type
30 •100 •500Selectable
100 •300 •500Selectable
0.45 •1.0 •2.0Selectable
Pre-alarm-contact output (PAL) – – – –– –Cylinder key lock –
63
NV63-CW
16 20 25 32 40 50 63
403
0.04
–
2.5/15/25/2
7.5/410,0006,0006,000
751306890
0.65
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Hydraulic-magneticEquipped
Button
230–400–440Multi-voltage type
30 •100 •500Selectable
–
–
–– – – ––
Note ✽ 1: 125A rated current is 3p only.✽ 2: Cassette-type aaccessories are not acceptable for NV30-CS.✽ 3: Standard type is thus SLT equipped.✽ 4: In case of ampere rating 16A, time-delay type is not available.✽ 5: Included in AL (type) only.
Available soon
●
●
–
●●
●
●●●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●●
●
●●●
●●●●●
●●●●●●
●●●●●●●●
●
●●●
●
●●
●
●●●
●●●●●
●●●●●●
●●●●●●●●
●
●●●
●
●●
●
●●●
●●●●●
●●●●●●
●●●●●●●●
●●●●●●
●●●
●●●●●
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
●●●●●
●●
●
●● ✽ 3● ✽ 3
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
●
●●●
●
●●
●
●●●
●●●●●
●●●●●●
●●●●●●●●
●
Rated operational voltage
230V
230 - 400 - 440V
Available voltage range
195~253V
195~484V
21
2. Detailed SpecificationsEarth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
2
S series H seriesS seriesH series125
NV125-SW
✽ 4 16 20 32 40 5063 80 100 125 ✽ 1
4043
0.04
0.1•0.5 •1.0
25/1330/15
–50/25
25,00020,00010,000
120901306890
––
–
–––
––––
Thermal-magneticEquipped
Button
230–400–440Multi-voltage type30 •100 •500Selectable
100 •300 •500Selectable
0.45 •1.0 •2.0Selectable
1.41.1
–
125
NV125-HW
✽ 4 16 20 32 40 5063 80 100
4043
0.04
0.1•0.5 •1.0
50/2550/25
–100/5025,00020,00010,000
10,0006,0006,000
10,0006,0006,000
120901306890
––
–
–––
––––
Thermal-magneticEquipped
Button
230–400–440Multi-voltage type30 •100 •500Selectable
100 •300 •500Selectable
0.45 •1.0 •2.0Selectable
1.41.1
–
250
NV250-RW
125 150 175200 225
403
0.04
0.1 •0.5 •1.0
125/125125/125
–125/12512,0004,0004,0001052406892
–
–––
–
–
–––
Thermal-magneticEquipped
Button
230–400–440Multi-voltage type30 •100 •500Selectable
100 •300 •500Selectable
0.45 •1.0 •2.0Selectable
125
NV125-RW
✽ 4 16 20 32 40 5063 80 100
403
0.04
0.1 •0.5 •1.0
125/125125/125
–125/12525,00020,00010,000
90
3.51.8
1916890
–––
–
–––
Thermal-magneticEquipped
Button
230–400–440Multi-voltage type30 •100 •500Selectable
100 •300 •500Selectable
0.45 •1.0 •2.0Selectable
250250
NV250-SW
125 150 175 200 225 250
125 150 175200 225
403 4
0.04
0.1 •0.5 •1.0
25/1330/15
–50/2512,0004,0004,000
105 1401656892
–––
–
–
Thermal-magneticEquipped
Button
230–400–440Multi-voltage type30 •100 •500Selectable
100 •300 •500Selectable
0.45 •1.0 •2.0Selectable
1.7 2.1
–––
NV250-SEW
125–225Adjustable
40
0.04
0.1 •0.5 •1.0Button
230–400–440Multi-voltage type30 •100 •500Selectable
100 •300 •500Selectable
0.45 •1.0 •2.0Selectable
3 4
25/1330/15
–50/2512,0004,0004,000
105 1401656892
–––
–––
Electronic
Equipped
1.8 2.3
–––
NV250-HW
125 150 175200 225
40
0.04
0.1 •0.5 •1.0Button
230–400–440Multi-voltage type30 •100 •500Selectable
100 •300 •500Selectable
0.45 •1.0 •2.0Selectable
3 4
50/1350/13
–100/2512,0004,0004,000
105 140
1.7 2.1
1656892
–
–––
–
–
Thermal-magneticEquipped
–––
NV250-HEW
40
0.04
0.1 •0.5 •1.0Button
230–400–440Multi-voltage type30 •100 •500Selectable
100 •300 •500Selectable
0.45 •1.0 •2.0Selectable
125–225Adjustable
3 4
50/1350/13
–100/2512,0004,0004,000
105 1401656892
–
–––
–––
– – ––– –
100
–– – – –
Electronic
Equipped
1.8 2.3
–––
100
NV100-SEP
15~20,30~50,60~100 Adjustable
3043
0.04
0.1•0.5 •1.0
25/1330/15
–50/25
120901556890
Button
230–400–440Multi-voltage type30 •100 •500Selectable
100 •300 •500Selectable
0.45 •1.0 •2.0Selectable
1.51.2
U series
●
––●
–––
● ✽ 3● ✽ 3
–––
●
●
●●
–
Electronic
Equipped
● ✽ 3–
NV100-HEP
15~20,30~50,60~100 Adjustable
3043
0.04
0.1•0.5 •1.0
50/2550/25
–100/50
120901556890
Button
230–400–440Multi-voltage type30 •100 •500Selectable
100 •300 •500Selectable
0.45 •1.0 •2.0Selectable
1.51.2
● ✽ 3● ✽ 3
–––
–
Electronic
Equipped
● ✽ 3
●●●
●●●●●●●●●●●●
●●●●
●●●
●●●●●●●●●●●●
●●●●
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
●●●
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
●●●
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
●●
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
●●
●●●
●●●●●
●
●
●●●
●
●
––●
–––
●
●
●●
–
●●
●●
●●●●●
●●
●●●●●
●●
●
●●●●●
●●
●●●●●
●●
●
●●
●●
●●
●
●● ✽ 3● ✽ 3
●●
●●●●●
●●
●●●●●
●●
●●●●●
●●
●
●● ✽ 3● ✽ 3
●●
●●●●●
●●
●● ✽ 3● ✽ 3
●●
●●
●●
●●
●
●● ✽ 3● ✽ 3
●●
●●
●●
●●
●● ✽ 3● ✽ 3
● ✽ 3 ● ✽ 3
●●
● ● ●
●●
●●
●●
●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●
●●
●●●
●●●●●
●
●
●
●
22
–
SeriesFrame size
Type name
Photo
Rated current In (Amp.)
Rated ambient temperature (°C)Number of poles
Rated operational voltage Ue (AC V)
High-speed type
Time-delay type
Earth-leakage indication systemRated breaking capacity (kA)IEC60947-2 (Icu/Ics)
AC440VAC400VAC230V
Overall dimensions (mm)
abcca
Mass of front-connection type (kg)
Installation andconnections
Fixed Front
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max. operating time at 2I∆n (s)
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s)
Screw terminal
Synchronous closing (UVT-S)Non-synchronous closing (UVT-N)
Solderless (box) terminal (SL)Busbar terminal
Rear (B)
Plug-inRear (PM)Rear/front IP20 (PM-IP)
Cassette-typeaccessories(option)
Alarm switch (AL)Auxiliary switch (AX)Shunt trip (SHT)
Undervoltage trip (UVT)
Accessorie’s connection (option)
Insulation switch (MG)Earth-leakage trip alarm (EAL)Test button module (TBM)Built-in
accessories(option)
with Lead-wire terminal block (SLT)with Flying leads
Enclosure(S)
Dustproof ( I )
Handle lock (HL)
(HL-S)
Externalaccessories(option)
Electrical operation device (MD)
Handle lock device
Lock cover (LC)
Waterproof (W)
Mechanical interlock (MI)
Externaloperatinghandle
Door mounting (V)(S)
Mounted on breaker(R)(F)
Insulatingbarrier
Between phase (BA-F)To ground (BA-G)
Terminalcover
Large (TC-L)Small (TC-S)Transparent (TTC)for rear connection (BTC)for plug-in (PTC)
Automatic tripping device
Trip button
a cac
b
400H series
400S series
NV400-SP
250 300 350 400
403
0.04
0.1•0.5 •1.0
42/42(36/36) ✽ 145/45(36/36) ✽ 185/85(65/65) ✽ 1
6.4–
–
–
–●
●
●●
–●
●Thermal-magneticEquipped
Button
230–400–440Multi-voltage type
30 •100 •500Selectable
100 •300 •500Selectable
0.45 •1.0 •2.0Selectable
140 185
6.6 8.4
Pre-alarm-contact output (PAL)Overcurrent trip alarm ✽ 3 (OAL)
––
400C series
NV400-CP
250 300 350 400
403
0.04
0.1•0.5 •1.0
25/1336/1850/25
140257103134
140257103155
6.1–
–
–
–
–●
●
●●
–●
●Thermal-magneticEquipped
Button
230–400–440Multi-voltage type
30 •100 •500Selectable
100 •300 •500Selectable
0.45 •1.0 •2.0Selectable
NV400-SEP
200~400 adjustable
40
0.04
0.1•0.5 •1.0
42/42(36/36) ✽ 145/45(36/36) ✽ 185/85(65/65) ✽ 1
–
–
–
–●
●
●●
–●
●
Electronic
Equipped
Button
230–400–440Multi-voltage type
30 •100 •500Selectable
100 •300 •500Selectable
0.45 •1.0 •2.0Selectable
● ✽ 2
257103155
Note ✽ 1: In case of solderless terminal, interrupting capacity reduces: ( / )✽ 2: Solid state relay output is option. Please specify if order output is necessary. (Standard type is thus SLT equipped.)
Rated operational voltage 230–400–440V
Available voltage range 195–484V
––
140 185
6.6 8.4
NV400-HEP
200~400 adjustable
40
0.04
0.1•0.5 •1.0
65/6570/70
100/100
––
–
–––
–●
●
●●––●
●
Electronic
Equipped
Button
230–400–440Multi-voltage type
30 •100 •500Selectable
100 •300 •500Selectable
0.45 •1.0 •2.0Selectable
● ✽ 2
●
●●●●
●●●●●●●●
●●
●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●
●●●●●●●●●
●●
●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●●●●
●●●●●●●●
●●
●●●●
●
●
●
●
●●
● ● ●
●●●
●●●●●●●●
●●
●●●●
●
●
– –
257103155
3 4 3 4
Suitability for isolation
23
2. Detailed SpecificationsEarth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
2
630C series
NV630-CP
500 600 630
403
–
0.1•0.5 •1.0
36/1836/1850/25
21027510315512.3
–
–
–
–
–●
●
●●
–●
–Thermal-magneticEquipped
Button
230–400–440Multi-voltage type
–
100 •300 •500Selectable
0.45 •1.0 •2.0Selectable
630S series
NV630-SP
500 600 630
403
–
0.1•0.5 •1.0
42/4245/4585/85
21027510315512.5
–
–
––
–
–●
●
●●
–●
–Thermal-magneticEquipped
Button
230–400–440Multi-voltage type
–
100 •300 •500Selectable
0.45 •1.0 •2.0Selectable
NV630-SEP
300~630 adjustable
40
–
0.1•0.5 •1.0
42/4245/4585/85
275103155
–
–
● ✽ 2
–
–●
●
●●
–●
–
Electronic
Equipped
Button
230–400–440Multi-voltage type
–
100 •300 •500Selectable
0.45 •1.0 •2.0Selectable
400H series
NV400-REP
200~400 adjustable
403
0.04
0.1•0.5 •1.0
125/63125/63150/75
––
–
–––
–●
●
●●––●
Electronic
Equipped
Button
230–400–440Multi-voltage type
30 •100 •500Selectable
100 •300 •500Selectable
0.45 •1.0 •2.0Selectable
● ✽ 2
257140
6.6
103155
–●
210 280
14.3 18.6
––
3 4
630H series
NV630-HEP
300~630 adjustable
403
–
0.1•0.5 •1.0
65/6570/70
100/100
275210
10315514.3
––
–
● ✽ 2
–––
–●
●
●●
–●
–
Electronic
Equipped
Button
230–400–440Multi-voltage type
–
100 •300 •500Selectable
0.45 •1.0 •2.0Selectable
800S series
NV800-SEP
400~800 adjustable
403
–
0.1•0.5 •1.0
42/4245/4585/85
275210
10315515.3
–
–
● ✽ 2
–
–●
●
●●
–●
–
Electronic
Equipped
Button
230–400–440Multi-voltage type
–
100 •300 •500Selectable
0.45 •1.0 •2.0Selectable
800H series
NV800-HEP
400~800 adjustable
403
–
0.1•0.5 •1.0
65/6570/70
100/100
275210
10315515.3
––
–
● ✽ 2
–––
–●
●
●●
–●
–
Electronic
Equipped
Button
230–400–440Multi-voltage type
–
100 •300 •500Selectable
0.45 •1.0 •2.0Selectable
●
●●●●
●●●●●●●●●
●●
●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●
●●●●●●●●
●●
●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●
●●●●●●●●
–●●
●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●●●●●●●●
●●
●●●●
●
●
–
●●
●
●●●
●●●●●●●●
–●●
●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●
●●●●●●●●
–●●
●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●●●●●●●●
–●●
●●●●
●
●
●
●
24
a cac
b
Frame A 50 100 225Type name MB50-CW MB50-SW MB100-SW MB225-SW
3 3 3 3
500 500 500 500
lEC60947-2JIS C 8201-2(lcu/lcs)Ra
ted sh
ort-
circu
it bre
aking
ca
pacit
ies (k
A)
Ove
rall
dim
ensi
ons
(mm
)
Con
nect
ion
met
hod
AC
440V 2.5/1 7.5/4 25/13
30/15400V 5/2 7.5/4 30/15
25/13
230V 7.5/4 15/8 50/25 50/25
a 75 75 90 105
b 130 130 130 165
c 68 68 68 68
ca 90 90 90 92
0.55 0.55 0.95 1.5
● Crimp contact ● Crimp contact ● Crimp contact ● Crimp contact
● Round stud ● Round stud ● Flat stud ● Flat stud
● ● ● ●
A200/220V 400/440V
kW kW
25 5.5 1116
32 7.5 15
3.7 7.512 – 5.510 2.2 –8 – 3.7
7.1 1.5 –5 – 2.24 0.75 1.5
2.5 0.4 –2 – 0.75
1.4 0.2 –1.2 – 0.40.8 – –
A200/220V 400/440V
kW kW
25 5.5 1116
32 7.5 15
3.7 7.5(12) – 5.510 2.2 –(8) – 3.77.1 1.5 –(5) – 2.24 0.75 1.5
2.5 0.4 –(2) – 0.751.4 0.2 –
(1.2) – 0.4(0.8) – –
A200/220V 400/440V
kW kW
45 11 22
40 – 18.5
32 7.5 15
25 5.5 11
16 3.7 7.5
12 – 5.5
10 2.2 –
8 – 3.7
A200/220V 400/440V
kW kW
7.1 1.5 –
5 – 2.2
4 0.75 1.5
2.5 0.4 –
2 – 0.75
1.4 0.2 –
1.2 – 0.4
0.8 – –
A200/220V 400/440V
kW kW
100 – 55
90 22 45
71 18.5 37
63 15 30
45 11 22
(40) – 19
32 7.5 15
(25) 5.5 11
(16) 3.7 7.5
(12.5) – 5.5
A200/220V 400/440V
kW kW
225 55 110
200 – –
175 45 90
150 37 75
125 30 –
Remark: The products of which rated current is parenthesized will be produced when an order is placed.
Rated current In (Amp.)Rated motor capacity: kW
Reference ambient temperature 40°C (45°C for marine applications)
Number of poles
Front connection (F)
Rear connection (B)
Plug-in (PM)
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
Mass of front-connection type (kg)
MB30-SW
3
500
2.5/1
5/2
7.5/4
75
130
68
90
● Crimp contact
● Round stud
●
0.65
MB30-CS
500
1.5/1.5 (415V)
1.5/1.5 (380V)
2.5/2 (240V)
96
52
67
● For crimped terminal
–
30
3
45
0.25
67.5
0.35
2 (for single phase)
● Round stud (assembled in)
25
2. Detailed SpecificationsMotor-Protection Breakers
2
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
(TC-S)
Frame A
Type name
100 225 50 100 150 250
NF100-CWU NF225-CWU NF50-SWU NF100-SWU NF-SFW NF-SJW NF-HJW
Photo
50 60 75 100125 150 175
200 2255 10 15 20
30 40 5015 20 30 40
50 60 75 100
15 20 30 40 5060 70 80 90 100
110 125 150
(125) (150) 175200 225 250
125 150 175200 225 250
2 3 3 3 3 3
UL489
Rated voltage (V AC) 240 240 240 480Y/277 600Y/347 600Y/347 600Y/347
AC
600Y/347V – – – – 14 14 18
480V – – – – 35 35 50
480Y/277V – – – 22 35 35 50
240V 10 35 14 35 65 65 100
JIS C 8201-2IEC60947-2(Icu/Ics)
600 600 600 690 690 690 690
AC
690V – – – 8/4 8/8 8/8 15/15
500V 7.5/4 10/5 7.5/4 18/9 30/30 30/30 36/36
440V 10/5 15/8 7.5/4 25/13 36/36 36/36 50/50
415V 10/5 18/9 7.5/4 30/15 36/36 36/36 50/50
400V 10/5 18/9 7.5/4 30/15 36/36 36/36 50/50
380V 10/5 18/9 7.5/4 30/15 36/36 36/36 50/50
230V 30/15 35/18 15/8 50/25 85/85 85/85 100/100
DC 250V ✽ 3 7.5/4 10/5 – 15/8 20/20 20/20 20/20
Compatible to AC/DC ✽ 1 ● ● – ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Overall dimensions (mm)
a 60 90 75 90 105 105 10550 60105
0.7 0.95
– ●
0.75 0.95 2.0 2.0 2.00.55
●–
0.7
●–
1.5
b 150 165 150 150 185 185 185
c 68 68 68 68 86 86 86
ca 90 92 90 90 110 110 110
(F) ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● – – ● ● ● ●
(AL)
(SL)
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
(AX) ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
(SHT) ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
(UVT) ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
(SLT) ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
(MI) ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
(HL) ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
V ● ● ● ●
F ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
S ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
(IB) ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
(TC-L) ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
– – ✽ 4 – – – – –
– – Supplied standardly – – – –
Thermal-magnetic
Thermal-magnetic
Hydraulic-magnetic
Thermal-magnetic
Thermal-magnetic
Thermal-magnetic adjustable
Thermal-magnetic adjustable
Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Rated current In (Amp.)at ambient temperature 40°C (IEC30°C)
2 3 2 3
3-pole
Line
Load
Number of poles
Rat
ed s
hort
-circ
uit b
reak
ing
capa
citie
s (k
A)
Suitability for isolation
Reverse connection
Mass of front-connection type (kg)
Con
nect
ion
met
hod
Acc
esso
ries
✽2
(opt
ion)
Ext
erna
l acc
esso
ries
✽2
(opt
ion)
Frontconnection
Insulating barrier
Mechanical interlock
Alarm switch
Auxiliary switch
Shunt trip
Under-voltage trip
Vertical lead-wire terminal unit
Handle lock device
Operating handle
Large
Small
IEC 35mm rail fixture
TÜV type approval
Automatic tripping device
Trip button
Terminalcover
Remark: The products of which rated current is parenthesized will be produced when an order is placed.The operating characteristics of breakers are different between AC and DC (JIS and IEC only).
a cac
b
Screw terminal
Solderlessterminal (box)
Notes: ✽ 1 The trip action characteristics differ between AC and DC for products that are compatible to both AC and DC.✽ 2 Specifications for products with a CE mark differ from those for general-purpose products. Details will
be available upon request.✽ 3 Use two poles among the three poles in the case of three-pole products. In addition, wiring as shown to the
right allows the models of NF100-CWU, NF100-SWU and NF225-CWU to be used for up to 400 V DC and the models of NF-SFW, NF-SJW, and NF-HJW to be used for up to 500 V DC.
✽ 4 The standard configuration contains a protection cover and adopts the IP20 (finger protection) structure.
26
2. Detailed SpecificationsUL Listed Products
27
epyT HB P-HB
)A(emarF 07 001 001 07 001 001
otohP
selopforebmuN 1 2 3 1 2 3
)A(Rated current04erutarepmettneibmata ° C
Rated voltage (V)CA 230/400
CD 125
IEC608983
3
— 1
230/400
125
1
snoisnemiD)mm(
a 52 05 57 52 05 57
b 59 47
c 5.75 5.06
ac 5.77 97
Mass (kg) 0.16 0.32 0.48 0.13 0.26 0.38
n ✳ 1oitcennoC
lanimretpmalC )daol(pmalC)enil(ni-gulP
ecivedgnippirtcitamotuA citengam,lamrehT
Optionalaccessories
revoclanimreT —
etalpgnitnuoM —
esablanimreT —
revockcoL
ybdevorppA —
—
—
3
3
—
—
KN,LG,RL — — KN,LG,BA,VB,RL —
✳ 1. If reguired Solderless terminal can be supplied. (BH : Line and Load side, BH-P : Load side only)
DC125V
AC230/400V
AC400VBreaking capacity(kA) sym.
Type of instantaneous operation Type C (5 In <, <10 In)
●
●
●
●
●
70,10070,10070 70,10070,10070
2. Detailed SpecificationsMiniature Circuit Breakers
2
28
epyT 3MS-HB 6MS-HB
otohP
selopforebmuN 1 2 3 1 2 3
)A(tnerrucdetaRat ambient temperature 40°C
,)52(,02,51,01,506,05,04,03
,)52(,02,51,0106,05,04,03
,)52(,02,5106,05,04,03
,)52(,02,51,01,506,05,04,03
,)52(,02,51,0106,05,04,03
,)52(,02,5106,05,04,03
Rated voltage (V)230/400
125
400 400 230/400 400 400
3
— —3
6
6
Type of instantaneous operation B,C,D ✳ 2sepyT
snoisnemiD)mm(
a 52 05 57 52 05 57
b 59 59
c 5.75 5.75
ac 67 67
Mass (kg) 51.0 23.0 05.0 51.0 23.0 05.0
n ✳ 1oitcennoC
lanimretpmalC
ecivedgnippirtcitamotuA citengam,lamrehT
lanoitpOseirossecca
revoclanimreT
etalpgnitnuoM
kcoleldnaH
revockcoL —
ybdevorppA —
✳ 1. If required Solderless terminal can be supplied (Line and Load side)✳ 2. Type B (3 In <, 5 In), Type C (5 In <, 10 In), Type D (10 In <, 20 In)
●
●
●
CA
CD
IEC60898
—
— — 125— —
1—
—
— 1—
—
—DC125V
AC230/400V
AC400VBreaking capacity(kA) sym.
a
b
cac
29
epyT BH-PS M3 BH-PS M9
otohP
selopforebmuN 1 2 3 1 2 3
,02,51,0106,05,04,03
,02,51,0106,05,04,03
,02,5106,05,04,03
,)52(,02,61,01,606,05,04,23
,)52(,02,61,0106,05,04,23
,)52(,02,61,0106,05,04,23
Rated voltage (V)230/400
125
400 400 230/400 400 400
3
3
Type of instantaneous operation B,C,D ✳sepyT
snoisnemiD)mm(
a 52 05 57 52 05 57
b 81.5
c 60.5
ac 79
81.5
60.5
79
Mass (kg) 51.0 23.0 05.0 51.0 23.0 05.0
noitcennoC
pm (load)alC
ecivedgnippirtcitamotuA citengam,lamrehT
lanoitpOseirossecca
revoclanimreT
Terminal base
●
ybdevorppA — LR
—
●
—
CA
CD
IEC60898
—
— — —
1—
—
—
—
9
9
—
—
—DC125V
AC230/400V
AC400VBreaking capacity(kA) sym.
)enil(ni-gulP
kcoleldnaH
revockcoL
)A(tnerrucdetaRat ambient temperature 40°C
✳ Type B (3 In <, 5 In), Type C (5 In <, 10 In), Type D (10 In <, 20 In)
a
b
cac
2. Detailed SpecificationsMiniature Circuit Breakers
2
30
a
b
cac
a
b
cac
a
b
cac
a
b
cac
MCB 6 (IEC60898) BH-DN (IEC60898)D-HB
otohP
selopforebmuN 1 2 3
)A(tnerrucdetaRat ambient temperature 30°C
,52,02,61,31,01,636,05,04,23
,52,02,61,31,01,636,05,04,23
,52,02,61,31,01,636,05,04,23
)CAV(egatlovdetaR 004/032 004 004 004
y (kA) sym. (IEC60898)ticapacgnikaerB 6
scitsiretcarahcgnippirT C, D ✳,BepyT C ✳,BepyT
snoisnemiD)mm(
a 18 63 45
b 78
c 44
ac 07
Mass (kg) 51
, Type D (10In , 20In)
.0 03.0 54.0
noitcennoC Solderless
ecivedgnippirtcitamotuA citengam,lamrehT
Optional accessories Insulating barrier — cp1 scp2
4 (3+N) 2 (1+N)
,52,02,61,31,06 1, 6,10,13,16,2025,32,4036,05,04,23
230
72
0.6
36
0.30
2 (1+N)
6,10,16,20
230
4.5
Type C
18
88
44
70
0.12
1 pc —3 pcs
Isolating switch D (IEC60947-3)-BK
otohP
selopforebmuN 1 2 3
)A(tnerrucdetaRat ambient temperature 30°C 32, 63
)CAV(egatlovdetaR 230 004
Short time withstand current (A) 20 ✕ In, 1s
Short-circuit making capacity (A) 20 ✕ In
snoisnemiD)mm(
a 81 63 45
b 78
c 44
ac 07
Mass (kg) 0.09 0.18 0.27
noitcennoC Solderless
— cp1 scp2
4 (3+N)
72
0.36
scp3
Utilization category AC22A class
Optional accessories Insulating barrier
RCCB D (IEC61008)-VB
otohP
selopforebmuN 2(1+N)
)A(tnerrucdetaRat ambient temperature 30°C 25, 40, 63
)C 230 230/400AV(egatlovdetaR
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Rated conditional short-circuit current (kA)
Pulsating current sensitivity
30, 300
Max. operating time (s) at 5I∆ 0.04
Type AC
6
snoisnemiD)mm(
a 63
b 58
c 4
solderless
4
a
a
bcca
c 07
Mass (kg) 0.2
noitcennoC
4(3+N)
72
0.35
BV-DN (IEC61009)
Number of poles
Rated current (A)
at ambient temperature 30°CRated voltage (VAC)
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max. operating time (s) at5I∆n
Pulsating current sensitivity
Breaking capacity (kA) sym. (IEC61009)
Tripping characteristics
Mass (kg)
Connection
Automatic tripping device
Option
2 (1+N)
6,10,16,20
230
30,100,300
0.04
Type AC
4.5
Type C ✳
36
88
44
70
0.19
Solderless
Thermal,magnetic
Over voltage release (280V±5%)
RCBO
DImension (mm)
Photo
31
2. Detailed SpecificationsELRs and ZCTs
Earth-Leakage relays
cosφ=1
555
cosφ=0.4L/R=0.007
222
cosφ=1
5515
cosφ=0.4L/R=0.007
2.52
0.62
cosφ=1
5324
0.40.2
cosφ=0.4L/R=0.007
3213
0.40.2
cosφ=1
555
cosφ=0.4L/R=0.007
222
Use auxiliary relay for AC415V contact.
cosφ=1
5313
cosφ=0.4L/R=0.007
3213
120VAC240VAC24VDC
120VAC240VAC415VAC30VDC100VDC200VDC
120VAC240VAC24VDC
120VAC240VAC480VAC30VDC
120VAC240VAC415VAC30VDC
Type
Model name of ZCT combined(✽ 9)
Hole diameter mm1530406080
100
Control voltage AC V
JIS
JIS
UL/JIS
UL/CE
UL/JIS (Note 3)UL/CE (Note 4)
Rated sensitivity current mA
Max. operating time s
Rated sensitivity current mA
Operating time s (Note 7)Inertial non-operating time s or longer than s
Rated sensitivity current mAMax. operating time s
Rated sensitivity current mAMax. operating time s (Note 7)
Inertial non-operating time s or longer than s Rated sensitivity current mAMax. operating time s at5I∆n
Rated sensitivity current mA
Max. operating time s at2I∆n (Note 7)Inertial non-operating time s at2I∆n
Earth-leakage indication
Resetting method
Standard attachment (Front connection)
Max. consumption VA
ConfigurationContinuous current capacity A
Contact capacity A
Japanese JIS standard
US UL standard (UR certified)
Canada CSA standard
European CE marking
Mass kg Relay
Front Rear
Externalaccessories
Terminal coverMounting hook for IEC 35mm rail (DIN rail) Fixture
Hig
h sp
eed
type
Del
ayty
peD
elay
type
Bui
lt-in
con
tact
Con
form
ing
stan
dard
High
spee
dty
pe
High
spee
dty
pe
High
spee
d •
Delay
type
Connection
Electrical self-hold type
NV-ZBA
Mechanical self-hold type
NV-ZSA
Harmonic surge readyElectrical self-hold type
NV-ZHAZT15BZT30BZT40BZT60BZT80B
ZT100B
Harmonic surge readyMechanical self-hold type
NV-ZLAZT15BZT30BZT40BZT60BZT80B
ZT100B
ZT15BZT30BZT40B
–––
–––
ZT60BZT80B
ZT100B
ZT15BZT30BZT40B
–––
–––
ZT60BZT80B
ZT100B
Interchangeable leakage relay (Note 1)
3φ4W, 3φ3W, 1φ3W, 1φ2W
Mounting screw
120 • 240 selectable
–
120 • 240 selectable240 • 415 selectable
–
–
120 • 240 selectable240 • 440 selectable
–
120 • 240 selectable240 • 440 selectable
48030
100 • 200 • 500selectable
100 • 200 • 500selectable
30100 • 200 • 500
selectable
100 • 200 • 500selectable
0.1
100 • 200 • 500 selectable
0.3 • 0.8 • 1.6 selectable0.1 • 0.5 • 1.1
–
–
Electric type (LED)
Push button on control power switch off
1c5
0.1
100 • 200 • 500 selectable(200 • 500 • 1000 selectable)0.3 • 0.8 • 1.6 selectable
0.1 • 0.5 • 1.1
–
–
Mechanical type (button)
Push button(conbined with earth-leakage indicator)
1a1c5
–
30 500.1
100 • 200 • 500 selectable0.1 • 0.45 • 1.0 selectable
– • 0.1 • 0.530 • 50 • 100 selectable
0.04100 • 300 • 500 selectable300 • 500 • 1000 selectable
0.45 • 1.0 selectable0.1 • 0.5
Electric type (LED)Push button on control power switch off
1a1c5
–
30 500.1
100 • 200 • 500 selectable0.1 • 0.45 • 1.0 selectable
– • 0.1 • 0.530 • 50 • 100 selectable
0.04100 • 300 • 500 selectable300 • 500 • 1000 selectable
0.45 • 1.0 selectable0.1 • 0.5
Mechanical type (button)Push button(conbined with earth-leakage indicator)
1a1c5
Clamp terminal–
0.3 (TC-ZBA) (DIN-ZBA)
JIS C 8374
–
–
–
Clamp terminal Clamp terminal
0.4 (TC-ZSA)
–
JIS C 8374
–
–
–
Clamp terminal Clamp terminal
0.4 (TC-ZSA)(Note 10)
–
JIS C 8374UL1053
Recognized component(File No.E196562)
LR103083(Certified No.)Declaration for conformity
IEC60947-2 AnnexBEN60947-2 AnnexB
Clamp terminal Clamp terminal
0.4 (TC-ZSA)(Note 10)
–
JIS C 8374UL1053
Recognized component(File No.E196562)
LR103083(Certified No.)Declaration for conformity
IEC60947-2 AnnexBEN60947-2 AnnexB
Control voltage120V240V440V480V
Available voltage range80~132V160~264V304~484V368~528V
Example of applicable circuit voltage100 • 110 • 120V
200 • 220 • 230 • 240V380 • 400 • 415 • 440V
460 • 480V
Control voltage120V240V415V
Available voltage range80~126V160~252V320~484V
Example of applicable circuit voltage100 • 110V • 120V200 • 220 • 240V400 • 415 • 440V
Combined type leakage relayFor protective coordinationUpper relay interlock type
NV-ZU (Note 2)NV-Z15UNV-Z30UNV-Z40U
–––
–––
NV-Z60UNV-Z80UNV-Z100U
120 • 240 selectable240 • 415 selectable
–
30200 • 500 • 1000
selectable
200 • 500 • 1000 selectable
0.1(Note 5)
–
–
–
Electric type (LED)
Push button on control power switch off
1a5
Clamp terminal Clamp terminal
0.5(Note 8)––
JIS C 8374
–
–
–
Note (1) Interchargeable leakage relay can be freely combined with relay and our ZCT. However, 30mA sensitivity product
(excluding NV-ZHA/ZLA) can be combined with only ZT15B, ZT30B and ZT40B.
(2) Combined type leakage relay is a combination of relay and ZCT. When ordering, specify the model name
combining that of relay and ZCT. (NV-Z15U~NV-Z100U)
(3) Indicates control voltage of UL. These are products indicating UL, CSA and JIS together. For voltage indication in
JIS, 100-200V changeover for 120-240V changeover, 200-415V changeover for 240-440V changeover, 460V for
480V are described together. When ordering, specify "UL/JIS".
(4) Indicates control voltage of UL. These are products indicating UL, CSA and CE together. For voltage indication in
CE, 120-230V changeover for 120-240V changeover, 230-440V changeover for 240-440V selectable are described
together. When ordering, specify "UL/CE".
(5) Time of backup operation by interlock signal is 0.3 seconds. (The relay operates between 0.15 and 0.45)
(6) This is a high speed delay selectable type.
(7) When the operating time are 0.3 and 0.45 seconds, 0.8 and 1.0 seconds, and 1.6 seconds, the relay operates
between 0.15 and 0.45, between 0.6 and 1.0 seconds and between 1.2 and 2.0 seconds respectively.
(8) Mass, outline dimension and rated short time current of ZCT are the same as those of interchangeable ZCT.
(9) Can be combined with interchangeable ZCT with primary conductor. Refer to the next page for detail.
(10) It's not UL-certified.
Remark (1) Relays with rate shown in the ( ) in the space for rate
are manufactured by your order.
(2) CE marking is for self-statement for the purpose of
interrupting NF when ground-fault occurs by combining
with our NF with CE marking (voltage tripping device).
(3) NV-ZBA/ZSA/ZU
(4) NV-ZHA/ZLA
Photo
Phase line type
3 2
2
32
epyT B51TZ B03TZ B04TZ B06TZ B08TZ B001TZ
)mm(retemaiderutrepA 51 03 04 06 08 001
Mass (kg) 2.0 4.0 6.0 0.2 6.2 3.3
Rated short time current
)mm(snoisnemiD a 84 86 58 041 061 581
b 25 25 25 09 09 09
c 07 09 001 051 961 091
d 52 05 05 001 001 001
e 04 04 04 07 07 07
50 (peak value)
da
be
c
)mm(retemaiderutrepaTCZ51 03 04 06 08 001
mmnieziseriwdetarV006elbissimrep.xaM 2 )serepmanitnerruc(
w2ø1 eriwdetalusniedirolhclynivyloP )88(41 )712(06 )593(051 )056(523 )299(006 )5811(008
elbacdetalusnienelyhteylopdeknil-ssorC )33(2 )091(83 )062(06 )556(052 )078(004 )0411(006
w3ø1w3ø3
eriwdetalusniedirolhc-lynivyloP )16(8 )261(83 )892(001 )655(052 )248(005 )5901(527
elbacdetalusnienelyhteylopdeknil-ssorC )33(2 )531(22 )062(06 )065(002 )067(523 )0411(006
w4ø3 eriwdetalusniedirolhc-lynivyloP )16(8 )261(83 )892(001 )593(051 )056(523 )299(006
elbacdetalusnienelyhteylopdeknil-ssorC — )501(41 )091(83 )563(001 )556(052 )078(004
epyT A006ATZ A0021ATZ A0002ATZ
selopforebmuN 3
)CAV(egatlovdetaR 006
Rated short time current (kA) )eulavkaep(001
a 722 722 063
b 652 892 052
ab 663 444 495
c 24 87 97
ac 521 671 412
a
ca
c
bab
)A(emarF 006 0021 0002 0023
epyT
ZBA
srotcudnocyramirphtiwsTCZelbaegnahcretnidnaRLEelbaegnahcretnI
NV-ZBA3200
ZSA
ZHA
ZLA
NV-ZSA3200
NV-ZHA3200
NV-ZLA3200
ZU 006UZ-VN 0021UZ-VN 0002UZ-VN 0023UZ-VN
selopforebmuN 3
)CAV(egatlovdetaR 006
Rated short time current (kA) )eulavkaep(001
a 722 722 063 094
b 652 892 052 023
ab 663 444 495 868
c 24 87 97 111
ac 521 671 412 092
Mass (kg) 5.6 11 72 45
fonoitacificepSsRLE
epytdeeps-hgiH
)CAV(egatlovlortnoC )Am(ytivitisnestnerrucdetaR )s(emitgnitarepo.xaM )s(emitgnitarepo-nonlaitrenI
ZBA 021 • 042 ✳ 002 • 005001 • ✳1.0 —
ZSA021
240 • 415✳
• ,0✳42002 • 005001 • ✳
ZU 002 • 005 • 0001 ✳1.0
kcolretniybemitpukcab()s3.0silangis
—
Time-delay type
High-speed •Time-delay type
ZBA
ZSA
ZHA
ZLA
✳ .elbatceleS
100 • 200 • 500✳ 0.3 • 0.8 • 1.6✳ 0.1 • 0.5 • 1.1
120 • 240✳240 • 415✳
100 • 200 • 500✳(200 • 500 • 1000✳ )
120 • 240✳
0.3 • 0.8 • 1.6✳ 0.1 • 0.5 • 1.1
100 • 200 • 500✳ 0.1 • 0.45 • 1.0✳ – • 0.1 • 0.5120 • 240✳240 • 440✳ 100 • 300 • 500✳
300 • 500 • 1000✳0.45 • 1.0✳ (at 2l∆n) 0.1 • 0.5 (at 2l∆n)
100 • 200 • 500✳ 0.1 • 0.45 • 1.0✳ – • 0.1 • 0.5120 • 240✳240 • 440✳
480100 • 300 • 500✳300 • 500 • 1000✳
0.45 • 1.0✳ (at 2l∆n) 0.1 • 0.5 (at 2l∆n)
021
240 • 415✳
• ,0✳42
a
ca
c
bab
ELRs with a ZCT with primary conductors
Interchangeable ZCTs with primary conductors
ZCT aperture diameter and permissible wire size
Interchangeable ZCT
33
)A(emarF 03
epyT AB03 -PC B-PC S-PC
otohP
selopforebmuN 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
)V(egatlovdetaR
Rated impulse voltage Uimp (kV)
052CA56CD
052CADC 125 052CA
052CA)ylnoepytseiressrekaerbelop-2rof(521CD,56CD ✳ 1
esunommocCD-CA
)A(tnerrucdetaR 03,02,51,01,7,5,3,2,1,5.0,3.0,52.0,1.0,57.0,5.0,3.0,52.0,1.0,50.0,51,01,5.7,7,5,3,5.2,2,1
03,52,02
Short circuitrating(A)
CA
V521 —
2.5 2.5 2.5
0052 0052
V042 0052 — —
V052 — 0051 0051
CDV06 0052 — — )V56CD(0001 )V56CD(0001
V021 — 0052 — — 1000 (DC125V) 1000 (DC125V)— — —
scitsiretcarahcgnitarepO)I(epytsuoenatnatsnI), (MD)M(epytdeeps-muideM ), (FD)F(epyttsaF)I(epytsuoenatnatsnI
), (SD)S(epytwolS), (MD)M(epytdeeps-muideM
metsysgnippirTmagnetic only:)I(epytsuoenatnatsnI
, MD, F, FD, S, SD): hydraulic magneticM(sepytrehtOmagnetic only:)I(epytsuoenatnatsnI
MD, S): hydraulic magnetic,M(sepytrehtO
(erutarepmettneibmadradnatS ° )C 04 04 52
Mass g 08 061 032 001 002 003 06 021 081
seirosseccA
)DI(yaledlaitrenI ● )ylnoCA:deeps-muideM( ● )ylnoCA:wols,tsaf,deeps-muideM(
)LA(hctiwsmralA ● )cI( ● )bIroaI( ✳ 2 ✳ 2● )cI(
)XA(hctiwsyrailixuA ● )cI( ● )bIroaI( ● )cI(
)THS(pirttnuhS — ● )ylnoepytyalerrof( ● )epytyalerdnalellaraprof(
)CL(revockcoL — ● — ● —
revoclanimreT
Accessory terminal covor
● ✳ 4
●
— —
— —
Back facing wiring terminal ● ✳ 3 — —
noitcennoCydobniaM
Screw terminal M4:sselroA02Screw terminal M5:A03
Screw terminal M5 052#lanimretnetsaF
hctiwsyrailixuA/hctiwsmralA Screw terminal M3.5 Screw terminal M3.5 011#lanimretnetsaF
dohtemgnitnuomydobniaMgnitnuomliarIEC,ecafruS
)noitpo(gnitnuomlenaphsulFgnitnuomliarIEC,ecafruS
On end contact fuse interchangeable metal (option)gnitnuomlenaP
)KN(lavorppaeniraM — ✳● 5 — —
dradnatslanoitanretnI ASC,LU — LU ✳ 6 —
gnikramEC ✳● 5 —
✳● 5
✳ 1 g.niredronehwesuCDroffiyficepS.✳ 2 . .elbaliavasiV56CDylno,esuCDfoesacnI✳ 3 . In case of back facing wiring terminals, specify if it will be used with ratings 20A or less, or 30A.
(with insulation cap).✳ 4 . The terminal cover is used for protection of electric shock (IPIX) caused by an intended contact from front direction,
with insulation cable lugs (or taping the tube of cable lugs) or direct clamp of the conductor.✳ 5 . Specify when ordering.✳ 6 . Specify when ordering. (In case of CP-S UL, type name is CP-SU.) Connection is fasten terminal only.
Slow type (S)
(Screw terminal M4 <series type only>)
Operating characteristics isMedium-speed type(M) only.The rated current, 0.3A,2A, 3A and 7A are not applied.
2. Detailed SpecificationsCircuit Protectors
CIRCUIT PROTECTORS TYPE CP
3
2
34
dexiF 01xtnerrucdetaR
NF63-CW/HW CD,CA
NF125-CW/SW/HW CD,CA
NF160-SW/HW CD,CA
NF250-CW/SW/HW CD,CA
PS/PC-004FNPC-036FN
NF1000-SS, NF1250-SS AC
NF1600-SS AC
NF1000-SSD, NF1250-SSDDC
NF1600-SSD
CD,CA
elbatsujdAPES-008FN CA
01xtnerrucdetaR:hgiH2xtnerrucdetaR:woL
PDS-008FN CD A0008:hgiH
High: Rated current x10Low: Rated current x5
High: Rated current x6Low: Rated current x3
High: 8000ALow: 3200A
A0023:woL
PS-036FN AC, DC01xtnerrucdetaR:hgiH
4xtnerrucdetaR:woL
High: Rated current x10Low: Rated current x4
(AC)High: Rated current x13Low: Rated current x5.2
(DC)
AC, DCNF125-SGW/HGWNF160-SGW/HGWNF250-SGW/HGW
epyTselopforebmuN
)CDV(egatlovdetaR)Ak(yticapacgnikaerbdetaR
)SCI/UCI(2-74906CEI
NF63-SW NF125-SW NF160-SW NF250-SW NF400-SP NF630-SP NF800-SDP NF1000-SSD NF1250-SSD NF1600-SSD3
4003
4404
5503
4404
5503
4404
5503
5004
6003
5004
6003
5004
600
2/1 10/5 20/5 20/5 40/40 40/40 40/40 40/20
3500
4600
3500
4600
3500
4600
40/20 40/20
epyTselopforebmuN
)CDV(egatlovdetaR)Ak(yticapacgnitpurretnI
).nim(tnerrucpirtsuoenatnatsnI
NF125-SW NF160-SW NF250-SW NF400-SP NF630-SP NF800-SDP NF1000-SSD NF1250-SSD NF1600-SSD2
25015
344020
3 times rated current 3 times rated current
225015
344020
3 times rated current
2250
3440
900A
20
2250
3440
1000A
20
2250
3440
1400A
20
2250
3440
2000A
20
2250
3440
2500A
20
2250
3440
3200A
20
225015
344010
epyT SC-03NSD DSN63-CW DSN125-CW DSN250-CW PC-004NSD PC-036NSD PC-008NSD)A(tnerrucdetaR 03 63 125 052 004 036 008
selopforebmuN 2 3 32 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 3)CD/CA(egatlovdetaR —/064 052/005 052/005 052/005 052/006 052/006 052/006
—/081 360/150 052/006 065/0531 0001/0042 5751/0873 0002/0084)CD/CA(tnerrucgnihctiws.xaM
3. Special Purpose BreakersMag Only, DC-Use And DSN-Type
Mag Only (Instantaneous tripping circuit breakers)
Remarks: 1. The size, weight, accessories, etc., are all identical to the same-designation C, S
and H series breakers.
2. For more detail, contact your dealer.
DC-Use MCCBs and DSN-type Switches
•DSN-type switchesThese are standard MCCBs without the automatictripping element. The tripping capacity is about sixtimes the rated current.
The appearance, size, drilling plan and availableaccessories are all identical to similar type standard Sand C series MCCBs.
Breaking is more difficult with direct currents becausethe current value never reaches zero. While ordinaryDC breakers are suitable for low voltages, specialvoltage DC breakers are recommended for voltages inexcess of 250VDC. Breakers for 550V are all 4-polemodels.The size, shape, drilling plan, accessories, etc., are allidentical to the S series of same-designation breakers.
Notes: 1: Time constant: 10ms or below.
•DC sideThese breakers are designed as thyristor-Leonardsystem DC-side breakers. They protect the thyristorfrom short circuiting when there is a power or
communication failure. (Mag-Only breakers can alsobe used for this role.) Use these breakers incombination with fast fuses for even greater protection.
Note: The tripping characteristics will change if the wiring differs from the oneshown here.
Wiring diagram for DC use.
Wiring diagram for DC-usage.
epyT)A(tnerrucdetaR
selopforebmuN
)CD/CA(egatlovdetaR
)CD/CA(tnerrucgnihctiws.xaM
DSN32-SW DSN50-SS DSN63-SW DSN125-SW DSN250-SW DSN400-SP DSN630-SP DSN800-SP DSN1000-SS DSN1250-SS DSN1600-SS32 125
2 3
500/250
180/75 600/250
50 631
265/125 500/250 690/250
300/125 360/150
2 3 2 3 4
DSN125-SGW125
750/315
690/300
2 3 4
DSN160-SGW160
960/400
690/300
2 3 4250
1350/560
500/250
2 3 4
DSN250-SGW250
1500/625
690/300
2 3 4400
2400/1000
690/250
2 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4630
3780/1575
690/250
800
4800/2000
690/250 660/250 660/250 660/250
1000
6000/2500
1250
7200/3000
1600
9600/4000
35
3. Special Purpose Breakers400Hz-Use, Instantaneous And Generator Protection
PF
Tr1
MCCB 1
MCCB 2
Tim
e
Current
Low-inst. MCCBs
MCCBoperatingcharacteristiccurve
PF short-time tolerance capacity
Fig. 4.12 Low-inst. MCCB characteristics
✳ 1: These MCCBs operating characteristic must be adjusted as follows.
STD ≤ 3 (Is setting)
LTD: minimum setting (TL = 12sec setting)
These breakers are designed for generator protection.
•Specifications
The tripping characteristics for these MCCBs increasewith an increase in the interrupted currentinstantaneous trip operating current. For this reason,these breakers are recommended for use in high-frequency circuits.
•SpecificationsThe appearance, size, rated interrupting capacity,drilling plan, accessories, etc., are all identical to thestandard S and H series of same-designation breakers.
•Low-Inst. MCCBs for DiscriminationWhen a power fuse (PF) is used for high-voltageproection, make sure that the MCCB on the secondaryside is compatible.
Remarks: 1. Ensure compatibility with motor, etc., before use to prevent accidental tripping at start up.
2. Specify rated current and tripping characteristic.
3. There are no short time delay characteristics.
The appearance, size, rated interrupting capacity,accessories, etc., are all identical to the standardinstantaneous trip breakers of the same designation.
•Specifications
Note *1. Instantaneous trip current : Rated current x 14 (Fix)
400Hz-Use MCCBs
Low-Instantaneous MCCBs
Generator-Protection MCCBs
NF125-SW NF125-HW NF250-SW NF400-SP NF400-SEP NF630-SP*1 NF630-SEP NF800-SEP NF1250-SS NF1600-SS
16, 20, 32,40, 50, 63,80, 100, 125
16, 20, 32,40, 50, 63,
80, 100
125, 150175, 200
225, 250300, 350
200~350adjustable
300~500adjustable
400~600adjustable400, 500
600-700-800adjustable
800-1000-1200adjustable
2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 42 3 4
8/418/9
25/1330/1550/25
15/825/1330/1550/25
10/530/1550/2550/25
100/50
10/1030/3042/4245/4585/85
NF250-HW
125, 150175, 200
2 3 4
5/330/8
50/1350/13
100/25
10/1030/3042/4245/4585/85
10/1030/3042/4245/4585/85
10/1030/3042/4245/4585/85
10/1030/3042/4245/4585/85
25/1365/3385/4385/43
125/63
25/1365/3385/4385/43125/63
690
epyT
)A(tnerrucdetaR
selopforebmuN)CDV(egatlovnoitalusnidetaR
yticapacgnikaerbdetaR)Ak(
)Ics/Icu(2-74906CEI
690VV005V044V004V032
epyT NF125-CW PC-004FN
selopforebmuN 2 3 2 3 4 2 3 2 3 4 2 3
)A(tnerrucdetaR,08,36,05
100, 12504,23,02,61
100,125,08,36,05571,051,521052,522,002
571,051,521052,522,002
003,052004,053
pirtsuoenatnatsnIdetarfo%(
)tnerruc
006 ● ● ● ● ●
004 — — ● ● ●
NF125-SW NF250-CW NF250-SW
epyT NF125-SGW
selopforebmuN 3 3 3 3
)A(tnerrucdetaR
16-3232-6363-10075-125
adjustable
125~250adjustable
125~250adjustable
16-3232-6363-10075-125
adjustable
)tnerrucdetarfo%(pirtsuoenatnatsnI 300
18~28
✳ 1
✳ 1
690
)s(tnerrucdetarfo%051taemitgnitarepO
)V(egatlovnoitalusnidetaR
gnikaerbdetaRyticapac
)Ak(
2-74906CEI)Ics/Icu(
V096CA 8/8
30/30
36/36
36/36
85/85
20/20
50/50
65/65
75/75
100/100
20/20
50/50
65/65
75/75
100/100
8/8
30/30
36/36
36/36
85/85
V005CA
V044CA
V004CA
V032CA
NF125-HGW NF250-SGW NF250-HGW
3
36
Load current : Present value, demand value, maximum demand value
Line voltage : Present value, demand value, maximum demand value
Harmonic current (3rd, 5th, 7th and total harmonics) :
Present value, demand value, maximum demand value
Electric power : Present value, demand value, maximum demand value
Electric energy :
Electric energy, electric energy (hourly value), maximum electric energy (hourly value)
Power factor : Present value
Rated (maximum) measuring current (Note2.)
Accuracy of measurring current
Rated (maximum) measuring voltage (Note2.)
Accuracy of measurring voltage
Measurment range of power factor
Fault current/cause
PAL, OVER
Pre-alarm (PAL) (Power supply AC/DC100-240V required)
Trip indicator (TI) (Power supply AC/DC100-240V required)
Phasing line
Electric energy accumulated pulse output (option) (Note3.)
CC-Link transmission (option) (Note3.)
Control power (Allowable voltage range 85~110%)
Items
Measured and
displayed
value
Alarm LED
indication
Alarm contact
output (option)
(note1.)
NF400-SEPM/HEPM
400A (800A)
±10A
NF630-SEPM/HEPM
630A (1260A)
±15.7A
AC440V (690V)
±11V
Lead 0~1~0 Lag
PAL
PAL, OAL
3φ3W, 1φ3W (3 poles breaker), 3φ4W (4 poles breaker)
AC/DC100-240V 12VA(Note4.)
NF800-SEPM/HEPM
800A (1600A)
±20A
Type
Note1. The module (terminal) is attached to the right side of the breaker.Pre-alarm (PAL) output function can set “Self-holding” or “Auto reset”.For function of alarm contact output (PAL, OAL), MDU and the circuit breaker must be connected with the mutuality and the control power must be supplied to MDU and alarm contact output module.
Note2. If input is over range, in this case, MDU display maximum measuring value.Note3. Pulse output option and CC-Link option cannot be attached at the same time.Note4. When control power supplied to MDU, then rushed current transitionally, max. 40Apeak, 1ms (at 240VAC).
3. Special Purpose BreakersMDU Breakers
Measuring Display Unit (MDU)
• Energy management becomes possible bymeasurement and display of load current, linevoltage, electric power, electric energy, harmoniccurrent (3rd, 5th, 7th and total) and power factor ofMDU.
• MDU with pulse output option can output pulse whenelectric energy accumulated setting unit. MDU withCC-Link option can transfer measured data to opennetwork CC-Link.
• When a circuit breaker outputs a alarm, LED onMDU turns on.
PAL : pre-alarmOVER : over current
• When the circuit breaker is tripped, fault cause andfault current stored in EEPROM. It makes causeinvestigation and restoration of power line possible.
Fault cause : over current (L) and short-circuit (SI)Fault current : up to 16 times the max. rated
current can be displayed.• The max. demand value of load current, line voltage
total harmonic current, electric power and electricenergy (hourly value), are stored in EEPROM. AndMDU with CC-Link option can store the outbreaktime of these. It makes easy finding of peak time ofpower consumption possible.
37
Installed on the circuit breaker.
Installed on the panel.
Panel
Breaker mountingNF400~800-SEPM/HEPM
Hold dimensions
M6 screwor φ7
Breaker
I
H
102
25.565
MDU
Conductorsthickness
tE
107
F
G
G
97
1035
B
155
131
Trip button
φ14M12 bolt
Terminalcover
140 (400AF)
A
51
2056
.5
98B
D
25
C
PE
12.5
A Frame400630800
A70
105105
B393232
C798787
D257275275
E8812
F8810
G444446
H447070
I194243243
A Frame400630800
J504646
K68
103103
L598686
M598686
N715656
O718686
P237246246
Q367376376
R198214214
Please contact our company about outline of 4P and outline of contact alarm output.Hold dimensions is 1.0mm clearance on the side of the circuit breaker cut out.Please contact our company about outline CC-Link and Terminal arrange of CC-Link Panel mounting.
Note 1 :
K
R2
38
2512
8
24
46
ML
R6
J
ON
Front panel cut out
Breaker mount
SE
PM
(P),
HE
PM
(Q)
RFront panel cut out
136
R3
MDU is connected with circuit breaker via flat cable.Space greater than the values shown in the figure below must be secured.
140
7672
30
Upper side
Flat cableconnector
82
PE
Panel holder plate
47
12
145
140 Operation/display side
Panel
MDU terminal plate
Mounting MDU panel
Note 2 : Please contact our company about outline of CC-Link and Terminal arrange of CC-Link Panel mounting.
DGSLDFG
FG
FG DB DA
– – 114113
––––breaker mounting
CC-Link
no transmission
PULSE
1 2 3 54
CC-Link
–
–
–
––
113
–
114
no transmission
PULSE
Panel mounting
Note 2
1 2 3 4
MDU Terminal arrange
Terminal cover
Panel mounting
PE L1L21 2 3 4
Breaker mounting
L2 1 2 3 54L1
MDU control power supply
210 (630, 800AF)
Mode selectionswitch
Phase selectionswitch
Measured valueselection switch
Functionselection switch
Alarm resetswitch
ENTER switch
UP/DOWN switch
Numerical display LED (6digit)
Mode selection LED
Phase selectionLED
Measured value selection LED
Function selection LED
Alarm displayLED
Unit displayLED
UP/DOWN active LEDM e a s u r i n gD i s p l a yU n i t
ENTER
MODE PHASE VALUE FUNCTION ALARMA
V
W
Wh
I1 V1-2
I2 V2-3
I3 V3-1
PRESENT
MAX.
DEMAND
DEMAND TIME
CLEAR
kWh/imp
ALARM HOLD
PAL
OVER
HARMONICS
TRIP
PFALARM RESET
m
k
%
A
V
W
Wh
Measuring Display Unit
3. Special Purpose BreakersMDU Breakers
3
4
38
1. Connection TypesTable 4-1: Connection Types
2. Connection AccessoriesTable 4-2: List of Connection Accessories
Connection Method (Abbreviation) Front connection (F) Rear connection (B)Solderless terminal Plug-in (PM)
Appearance
The front connection model will be delivered unless otherwise specified. Notice, however, that you can convert the front connection model to other types (excluding the plug-in) by using an appropriate connection component, which is separately available.
✽ 1
3. Connection of Line and LoadThe standard wiring of line and load on the circuit breaker is (a) normal connection shown on the right. Avoid the wiring shown in (b) reverse connection, which may lead to the decrease in breaking performance. However, the reverse connection is allowed for the following models (except NF models with MDU).
Line
Line
Load
Load
Normal connection (a)
Normal and reverse connection methods
Reserve connection (b)NF-C series, NF-S series, NF-H series, NF-U series,MB series, C • S • H series of NV400–800A Frame Reverse connection is allowed for the standard models.
Type name
NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW 2P
NF32-SW, MB30-SW, MB50-CW/SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW, NV32-SW, NV63-CW/SW/HW
NF63-SW/HW
NF125-CW/SW
3P
4P
NV100-SEP/HEP 3P
2PNF125-HW
NF125-CW/SW/HW, MB100-SW, NV125-CW/SW/HW3P
NV125-RW
NF125-SW/HW, NV125-SW/HW 4P
NF250-CW/SW/HW, NF160-SW/HW
NF250-CW/SW/HW, MB225-SW, NF160-SW/HW, NV250-CW/SW/HW/RW/SEW/HEW
2P
NV250-RW
3P
NF250-SW/HW, NF160-SW/HW, NV250-SW/HW/SEW/HEW 4P
NF250-SGW/HGW, NF160-SGW/HGW, NF125-SGW/HGW
NF250-RGW/UGW, NF125-RGW/UGW2P
NF250-SGW/HGW, NF160-SGW/HGW, NF125-SGW/HGW3P
NF250-RGW/UGW, NF125-RGW/UGW
NF250-SGW/HGW, NF160-SGW/HGW, NF125-SGW/HGW4P
NF250-UGW, NF125-UGW
NF400-CP/SP
NF400-CP/SP/SEP, NV400-CP/SP/SEP
NF400-HEP/REP, NV400-HEP/REP
NF400-SP/SEP, NV400-SEP
NF400-HEP, NV400-HEP
NF630-CP/SP
NF630-CP/SP/SEP, NV630-CP/SP/SEP
NF630-HEP/REP, NV630-HEP
NF630-SP/SEP, NV630-SEP
NF630-HEP
NF800-SDP
NF800-CEP/SEP, NV800-SEP
NF800-HEP/REP, NV800-HEP
NF800-SEP
NF800-HEP
2P
3P
3P
4P
4P
2P
3P
3P
4P
4P
2P
3P
3P
4P
4P
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ST-4SP2
ST-4SP3
ST-4SP4
ST-6SP2
ST-6SP3
ST-6SP4
ST-6SP2
ST-6SP3
ST-6SP4
PM-4SP2
PM-4SP3
PM-4SP4
PM-6SP2
PM-6SP3
PM-6SP4
PM-8SP2
PM-8SP3
PM-8SP4
Notes: ✽ 1 You can use the plug-in terminal unit (PM) when the wiring of terminal units is required in advance, and the delivery of both the main body and the components at the same time, which is normal, is not allowed. Furthermore specify the nonuse of plug-in terminal (PM-N) for the connection of circuit breaker.
✽ 2 If safety device is necessary ,please require.✽ 3 Connected wire size: 2.5~25mm2
✽ 4 Connected wire size: 25~70mm2
✽ 5 Connected wire size: 14~95mm2
✽ 6 Connected wire size: 70~125mm2
Solderless terminal (SL) Rear studs (B-ST) Plug-in (PM) ✽ 1
ST-05SW2 PM-05SW2
ST-05SW3 PM-05SW3
ST-05SW4 PM-05SW4
ST-1SP3 PM-1SP3
ST-1SW2
ST-1HW2
ST-1SW3
ST-1SW4
ST-2SW2
ST-2SW3
ST-2UW3
ST-2SW4
ST-2GSW2
ST-2GSW3
SL-1SW4L ✽ 3SL-1SW4G ✽ 4
SL-1SW3L ✽ 3SL-1SW3G ✽ 4
SL-1SW4L ✽ 3SL-1SW4G ✽ 4
SL-2SW4L ✽ 5SL-2SW4G ✽ 6
SL-2SW3L ✽ 5SL-2SW3G ✽ 6
SL-2UW3L ✽ 5SL-2UW3G ✽ 6
SL-2SW4L ✽ 5SL-2SW4G ✽ 6
SL-2GSW4
SL-2GSW3
SL-2GSW4
–
PM-1SW2
PM-1HW2
PM-1SW3
PM-1UW3
PM-1SW4
PM-2SW2
PM-2SW3
PM-2SW4
PM-2GSWIP2 ✽ 2
PM-2GUW2
PM-2GSWIP3 ✽ 2
PM-2GUW3
PM-2GSWIP4 ✽ 2
–ST-2GSW4
4. Connection Method
39
OFF or ON
Trip
OFF or Trip
ON
OFF or Trip
ON
98/ALa (open)96/ALb (closed)95/ALc
98/ALa (closed)96/ALb (open)95/ALc
14/AXa (open)12/AXb (closed)11/AXc
14/AXa (closed)12/AXb (open)11/AXc
Vertical lead-wireterminal unit
Indicator lamp(example)
Control power supply
EALa
P2
P1(EALc)
MG switch (open)
MG switch (closed)
Over current, short circuittrip or on or off
EALa (open)
EALc
EALa (open)EALb (closed)EALc
Ground-fault trip
250A frame or less
400A frame or more
250A frame or less
400A frame or moreEALa (closed)EALb (open)EALc
EALa (closed)
EALc
Note: (1) Models NV250-SEW/HEW are excluded. Remark: (1) Accessory terminals are marked by both IEC-based terminal symbolsand conventional symbols, like 98/ALa.
Note: *1. When DC use polarity must be considered.Please contact us for applications in the field of smaller current values.
A control power supply (compatible to 100 and 200V AC) is required; see the diagram on the right showing its wiring. (The permissible range of voltage of the control power supply is 80 to 242V AC, and the power requirement is 10VA.)
Table 5-6: AL·AX·EAL Switch Rating (In case of EAL, 400AF and more)
Table 5-3: AX Switch Operation
Table 5-4: EAL Switch Operation
Table 5-5: MG Switch Operation
Table 5-7: EAL Switch Rating (250AF and less)
Internal accessories Function Applicable models Cassette-type of accessories
AL Alarm switch A switch that electrically indicates the trip status of the circuit breaker. NF-C·S·H·U,NV-C·S·H·Uand MB seriesAX Auxiliary switch A switch that electrically indicates the ON-OFF status of the circuit breaker.
SHT Shunt tripA device that electrically trips the circuit breaker from a remote distance. Permissible working voltages are 70 to 110% of the AC rated voltage or 70 to 125% of the DC rated voltage.
NF-C·S·H·Uand MB series
NF-C·S·H·U, (Note 1)NV-C·S·H·Uand MB seriesUVT Undervoltage trip
A device that automatically trips the circuit breaker if the voltage is lowered. Working voltages are 70 to 35% of the UVT rated voltage. When the voltage recovers to 85% or higher, you can reset the device and put into operation.
EAL Earth-leakage alarm switchA switch that electrically indicates the trip status of the earth leakage circuit breaker caused by a ground fault. If 250AF and less, This switch is available only for models with the vertical lead-wire terminal unit (SLT).
NV-C·S·H·U –
TBM Test button moduleThis module allows you a remote testing by applying a voltage.An external sequence common to SHT can be used. (The standard configuration requires the vertical lead-wire terminal unit (SLT).)
NV-C·S·H·U –
MG Insulation switch The incorporation of this switch enables the measurement of insulation resistance between the terminals of the load with the circuit breaker being turned OFF. NV-C·S·H·U –
PAL Pre-alarm module
OAL Overcurrent trip alarm switch
Indicates that the load current exceeds the pre-alarm setting current.
Indicates that the breaker has been tripped by overcurrent or short-circuit current.
Electronic Types –
Electronic Types(SGW, HGW, RGW, UGW) –
Circuit breaker status AL switch contact
Circuit breaker status AX switch contact
Circuit breaker status
Circuit breaker status MG switch status
EAL switch contact
Switch type
AC DC
Voltage(V)
Current (A) Voltage(V)
Current (A)
Resistive load
Inductive load
Resistive load
Inductive load
Resistive load
Inductive load
S
V
X
460 – – 250 0.2 0.2
250 3 2 125 0.4 0.4
125 5 3 30 4 3
460
250
125
460
250
125
5
10
10
5
10
10
2
10
10
2.5
10
10
250
125
30
250
125
30
0.3
0.6
10
5
10
10
0.3
0.6
6
3
6
10
AC
Voltage
(V)
Current A
200 3 2
100 3 2
1. AccessoriesTable 5-1: Accessories
2. Switch Operation and RatingTable 5-2: AL Switch Operation
●
●
●
●
*1
5. AccessoriesInternal Accessories
5
40
3. Maximum Number of Internally Mounted Accessories
Table 5-8: Combinations of Accessories
Remarks: (1) Circled numbers indicate the order of installation.(2) Accessories of EAL, and TBM can be installed independent of installations of AL, AX, and MG. (Two units among EAL, and TBM cannot be installed at the same time.)
Notes: (1) Second AX can substitute the AL on the left-pole.(2) Models with UVT require a UVT voltage module to be installed on the lead-wire terminal unit. (No such voltage module is required for SHT.) Part of UVT accessories is not of
cassette type. (Details will be available upon request.)(3) UVTs for left-pole installation can be produced, if specified, for frame current values of 125A (excluding SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW).(4) SHT cannot be installed.(5) EALs are available only for models with the vertical lead-wire terminal unit (SLT). Specify a control power supply of either 100 or 200 V AC.(6) Models NV250-SEW/HEW are not allowed to install the UVT device.(7) The standard lead drawing is performed laterally.
Load drawing is also available.(8) Only the models with an SLT are available. EAL and PAL require a control power supply (shared 100 - 200 VAC).
For the 24 VDC TBM only, instruct us of a control voltage. (The standard shared voltage is 100 - 240 VAC/100 - 240 VDC.)
Series NF-C · S · H · U, MB NV-C · S · H · U
Type
Poles
Accessories
AL
AL + SHT or UVT
AX + SHT or UVT
AL + AX + SHT or UVT
AX
AL + AX
SHT or UVT
MG
AL + MG
AX + MG
EAL
TBM
PAL
NF32-SWNF63-CW/SW/HWNF125-CW/SW
NF32-SW(3P)NF63-CW/SW/HW(3P)NF125-CW(3P), NF125-SW(3P, 4P)NF125-HW, NF125-SGW/HGWNF125-RGW/UGWNF160-SW/SGW/HW/HGWNF250-CW/SW/HWNF250-SGW/HGWNF250-RGW/UGWMB30-SW, MB50-CW/SWMB100-SW, MB225-SW
NV32-SWNV63-CW/SW/HWNV125-CW/SW/HWNV250-CW/SW/HWNV250-SEW/HEWNV125-RW, NV250-RW
22, 3 3 3, 42, 3, 4 2, 3, 4
(Note 2) (Note 2)(Note 3)
(Note 2)
(Note 7)
(Note 2)
(Note 1)(Note 2)
(Note 1)
(Note 7)
1 2
1 2
(Note 7)
1 2
1 2
(Note 2)(Note 4)(Note 6)
(Note 1)
(Note 5)
(Note 7)
3-pole product only
(Note 7)
(Note 7)
(Note 7)
(Note 8)
(Note 8)
(Note 8)
NF30-CSMB30-CS
NV30-CS NV100-SEPNV100-HEP
Left-sidemounting
Right-sidemounting
Handle AL AX
MG EAL
SHT or UVT TI Cassette-type accessories
TBM Lead wire direction
41
Left-sidemounting
Right-sidemounting
Handle AL AX
MG EAL TBL PAL
SHT or UVT TI Cassette-type accessories
TBM Lead wire direction
5. AccessoriesInternal Accessories
epyT
S/H/C-FN
U-FN )P3(PEU-004FN PEU-008FN,PEU-036FN,)P4(PEU-004FN
seloP 4,3,2
epythctiwS S V
seirosseccA
LA
✳ 3
XA
✳ 3
THSroTVU
✳ 1✳ 2
✳ 1 ✳ 2✳ 2
XA+LA
✳ 3 ✳ 3
TVUroTHS+LA
✳ 1✳ 2✳ 3✳ 4
✳ 1✳ 2✳ 3✳ 4
TVUroTHS+XA
✳ 1✳ 2✳ 3✳ 4
✳ 1✳ 2✳ 3✳ 4
TVUroTHS+XA+LA
✳ 1✳ 2✳ 3✳ 4
✳ 1
✳ 2
✳ 2
✳ 2✳ 2✳ 3✳ 4
LAP)tuptuotcatnoc(
✳ 5
PEU/PER/PEH/PES-004FNrofnoitpO
✳ 5
Option for NF630-SEP/HEP/REP/UEPNF800-CEP/SEP/HEP/REP/UEP
Option for NF630-SEP/HEP/REP/UEPNF800-CEP/SEP/HEP/REP/UEP
IT
✳ 6
PEU/PER/PEH/PES-004FNrofnoitpO
✳ 6
.gnitnuomforedroehtswohselcricehtnihtiwrebmunehT✳ .1✳ .)eludomegatlovhcusonseriuqerTHS(eludomegatlovTVUaseriuqergnitnuomTVU.2✳ .yrassecensiTLSredro-laicepsa,XA+LAroXA,LAehtsaelopemasehtotTVUroTHSagnitnuomnehwro,TLSybsecivedgnitnuomelop-tfeleerhtnahteromgnitnuomnehW.3✳ .etarapessieludomegatlovTVUeht,XA+LAro,XA,LAehtsaelopemasehtotTVUagnitnuomnehW.4✳ ).elopthgirs'rekaerbehtotdetnuomebnacseirosseccarehtoon,esacsihtnI(.yrassecensi)V002~001CA(egatlovlortnoC.dradnatssideppiuqe-TLS.5✳ ).elopthgirs'rekaerbehtotdetnuomebnacseirosseccarehtoon,esacsihtnI(.yrassecensi)V002~001CD/V002~001CA(egatlovlortnoC.dradnatssideppiuqe-TLS.6
SHT and UVT are right-pole mounting as standard. Please specify if left-pole mounting is required.
NF400-CP/SPNF400-SEP/HEP/REP
NF630-CP/SPNF630-SEP/HEP/REPNF800-CEP/SDPNF800-SEP/HEP/REP
NF1000-SSNF1250-SSNF1600-SSNF1000-SSDNF1250-SSDNF1600-SSD
NF1250-UR
1 3
2
5
6 4
1
51 3
2 4
2
3
4
1 3
2 4
1
23
1
2
5
3
4
6
5
42
Left-sidemounting
Right-sidemounting
Handle AL AX
MG EAL TBL PAL
SHT or UVT TI Cassette-type accessories
TBM Lead wire direction
epyT S/H/C-VN
seloP 4,3
epythctiwS S
seirosseccA
LA
✳ 2
XA
✳ 2
TVUroTHS
✳ 1 ✳ 1
XA+LA
✳ 2 ✳ 2
TVUroTHS+LA
✳ 1✳ 2✳ 3
✳ 1✳ 2✳ 3
TVUroTHS+XA
✳ 1✳ 2✳ 3
✳ 1✳ 2✳ 3
TVUroTHS+XA+LA
✳ 1✳ 2✳ 3
✳ 1✳ 2✳ 3
GM
GM+LA
✳ .)eludomegatlovhcusonseriuqerTHS(eludomegatlovTVUaseriuqergnitnuomTVU.1✳ .yrassecensiTLSredro-laicepsa,XA+LAroXA,LAehtsaelopemasehtotTVUroTHSagnitnuomnehwro,TLSybsecivedgnitnuomelop-tfeleerhtnahteromgnitnuomnehW.2✳ .etarapessieludomegatlovTVUeht.XA+LAroXA,LAehtsaelopemasehtotTVUagnitnuomnehW.3
The number within the circle shows the order of mounting.
NV400-CP/SPNV400-SEP/HEP/REP
NV630-CP/SPNV630-SEP/HEPNV800-SEP/HEP
43
Left-sidemounting
Right-sidemounting
Handle AL AX
MG EAL TBL PAL
SHT or UVT TI
TBM Lead wire direction
5. AccessoriesInternal Accessories
epyT S/H/C-VN
seloP 4,3
epythctiwS S
seirosseccA
GM+XA
GM+XA+LA
LAE
LBT
MBT
)tuptuotcatnoc(LAP
IT
The number within the circle shows the order of mounting.).ylsuoenatlumisdetnuomebtonnacsMBTrosLBT,sLAEowt,revewoH(.seirosseccaGMdnaTVU,THS,XA,LAforebmunehtfosseldragerdetnuomebnacMBTdna,LBT,LAE.1
.seiresS/C-VN
Option for NV400-SEP/HEP/REP Option for NV630-SEP/HEPNV800-SEP/HEP
Option for NV400-SEP/HEP/REP Option for NV630-SEP/HEPNV800-SEP/HEP
andS/C-FNehtrofegnahcsnoitacificepsdnasnoisnemids’LAPehT.2✳ .1✳ .2
).elopthgirs’rekaerbehtotdetnuomebnacseirosseccarehtoon,esacsihtnI(.yrassecensi)V002-001CA(egatlovlortnoC.dradnatssideppiuqe-TLS).elopthgirs’rekaerbehtotdetnuomebnacseirosseccarehtoon,esacsihtnI(.yrassecensi)V002-001CD/V002-001CA(egatlovlortnoC.dradnatssideppiuqe-TLS
✳ 1
✳ 2 ✳ 2
✳ 1
NV400-CP/SPNV400-SEP/HEP/REP
NV630-CP/SPNV630-SEP/HEPNV800-SEP/HEP
5
44
Left-sidemounting
Right-sidemounting
Handle AL AX SHT or UVT
epyT NF-C/S/H
seloP
epythctiwS S SS
32 33
seirosseccA
AL
AX
SHTor
UVT
AL + AX
AL + SHT or UVT
AX + SHT or UVT
AL + AX + SHTor
UVT
NF50-SWUNF100-CWUNF100-SWU
NF50-SWUNF100-CWUNF100-SWU
NF-SFWNF-SJWNF-HJW
NF225-CWU NF-SKW NF-SLW NV225-CWUNV50-SWUNV100-SWU
Remarks: (1) Encircled numbers show the order of mounting.
Notes: (1) If a UVT is used, a UVT voltage module is installed on the lead wire terminal block. (The SHT requires no voltage module.)(2) If a UVT is used, a UVT voltage module is installed on the lead wire terminal block. (The SHT requires no voltage module.) No cassette is attached to the UVT.(3) If a UVT is used, the UVT voltage module is externally installed. (The SHT requires no voltage module).(4) No SHT can be installed.(5) The 2nd AX can be installed instead of the AL on the left pole.(6) The standard mounting of the SHT and the UVT is performed on the right pole. If mounting on the left pole is required, instruct us. (The UVTs for interlocks are mounted on the left pole.)(7) We can manufacture the SLTs used when 3 or more accessories are installed on the left pole and the SLTs used when the AL and the AX are attached on the same pole that is
attached with the SHT or the UVT at your order.(8) If a UVT is used and an AL, an AX or an AL + an AX are attached to the same pole that is attached with the UVT, the UVT voltage module is separately installed.
2 4
1 3
(Note 1) (Note 1)
(Note 5)
(Note 1)
(Note 1)
(Note 1)(Note 5)
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
(Note 1)
(Note 5)
(Note 1)
(Note 1)
(Note 1)(Note 5)
1 2
1 2
(Note 2)
(Note 7)
(Note 7)
(Note 2)
(Note 6)(Note 8)
(Note 1)(Note 7)
32
1
(Note 6)(Note 8)
(Note 1)(Note 7)
(Note 6)(Note 8)
(Note 1)(Note 7)
(Note 5) (Note 7) (Note 5)
(Note 2)
(Note 2)
(Note 2)(Note 5)
(Note 1)(Note 4)
1 2
1 2
2 4
1
6
5 3
(Note 2)
(Note 6)(Note 8)
(Note 1)(Note 7)
2
1
4
35
4
3
2
1
(Note 6)(Note 8)
(Note 1)(Note 7)
(Note 6)(Note 8)
(Note 1)(Note 7)
(Note 7) (Note 5)
(Note 1)(Note 4)
UVT Voltage Module Wiring Diagram(Lead-Wire Connection)
J1/UC1
J2/UC2
Circuitbreaker
UVT voltage module
D1/P1
J1/UC1
J2/UC2
D3/P3
D2/P2
4. Shunt Trip (SHT)Table 5-9: Standard Coil Rating
5. Undervoltage Trip (UVT)● UVT Voltage Module
Notes: (1) Secure a sufficient input power so that the voltage will not drop below the permissible lower working voltage (70% of the lowest rated voltage).(2) The operating time denotes the time from when the rated voltage is applied to SHT until when the main contact of the breaker starts to open.
The UVT voltage module is normally installed on the vertical lead-wire terminal unit (SLT). (A separate-mount type can be produced upon request.)
Notes: (1) A desired voltage can be selected by changing the terminal wiring.(2) The operating time denotes the time from when no voltage is applied to UVT until when the main contact of the breaker
starts to open.(3) Time-delayed types can be produced. Details will be available upon request.(4) Compatible to 50 and 60Hz(5) Rated voltage differs according to make and country of manufacture.Please consult your dealer.
SeriesCut-offswitch Voltage (V)
Input power requirement (VA) (Note 1)Operating time (ms) (Note 2)
AC DC
NF-C • S • H • UMBNV-C • S • H • U
32(30) • 63A Frame125A Frame(NF125-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW are excluded)
160 • 250A FrameNF125-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW
400 • 630 • 800 FrameNF400-CP/SP/SEP/HEP/REP/UEPNF630-CP/SP/SEP/HEP/REP/UEPNF800-SDP/CEP/SEP/HEP/REP/UEPNV400-CP/SP/SEP/HEP/REPNV630-CP/SP/SEP/HEP, NV800-SEP/HEP
1000 • 1250 • 1600 FrameNF1000-SS/SSD, NF1250-SS/SSD/URNF1600-SS/SSD
Equipped
AC100-240380-550
(Compatible to 50 and 60Hz. )DC100-125
AC100~450/DC100~200(50 also 60Hz)
AC100-120200-240380-450
(50 also 60Hz)DC100
15 or less120
100V : 20200V :50
330V : 120450V : 170
100V : 10200V :35
200 70 7~15
5~15
60
50
Table 5-11: Coil Rating
SeriesVoltage (V)
(Note 1)Input power(VA)
Operatingtime (ms)
(Note 2) (Note 3)
250AF and less
NF400-CP/SP/SEP/HEP/REP/UEP,NF630-CP/SP/SEP/HEP/REP/UEP,NF800-CEP/SDP/SEP/HEP/REP/UEP,NF400-CP/SP/SEP/HEP/REP,NF630-CP/SP/SEP/HEP,NF800-SEP/HEP
NF1000-SS/SSD,NF1250-SS/SSD/UR,NF1600-SS/SSD
AC100-110/120-130 selectable200-220/230-250 selectable380-415/440-480 selectable(Note4)
DC100/110 selectable
AC24/48 selectable500-550/600 selectable
DC24/48 selectable110/125 selectable
AC100-110200-220400-440(Note4)
DC100
AC100-120200-240380-450(Note4)
DC100-110
AC110-120220-240380-415440-480500-550(Note4)
DC2448110
AC2448440-480500-550(Note4)
DC2448120-125
5 30 or less
5 5~30
5 5~35
Standard voltage Special voltage (note 5)
epytBCCM
CA )V( CD )V( AC/DC(V)
42 84 083055~ 21 42 63 84 011 521 220
~2504284~
● –
● ● – ● ● ● ● ● ● –
– – ● ● – – – – – –
–
●NF400-CP/SP/SEP/HEP/REP, NF630-CP/SP/SEP/HEP/REP,NF800-SDP/CEP/SEP/HEP/REP, NF400-UEP, NF630-UEP, NF800-UEPNV400-CP/SP/SEP/HEP/REP, NV630-CP/SP/SEP/HEP, NV800-SEP/HEP
NF-C • S • H • UMB32(30) • 63A Frame 125A Frame 160 • 250A Frame
NF1000-SS/SSD, NF1250-SS/SSD/URNF1600-SS/SSD
–
24~48
–
–
● –
Table 5-10: Coil Ratings (List of manufacturable special voltages)
–
24~36
–
36~48
– – – ●
–
–
●
–
–
●–
5. AccessoriesInternal Accessories
45
5
18
TBM2TBM1
7
12.5
92 (
Ter
min
al
c
over
)
(10.
5)10.5
6. Test Button Module (TBM)
7. Lead-wire Specifications
Table 5-12
● The effect of pressing the test button on the breaker main body is produced while the input control voltage is applied. (Apply the voltage for more than two seconds for the breaker main body of time-delayed NV models.)
● The model with the vertical lead-wire terminal unit (SLT) is standard.
8. Internal Terminal Type (INT)● This unit is an internal accessory that is provided with terminal screws for lead-wire connection.
● Lead wires are normally extended laterally.● Grooves are provided standardly on the side face of the breaker,
allowing the extension of the lead wires along them. (Note 1)
Note: (1) The models of NF125-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW, NF160-SGW/HGW,NF250-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW, 400Aframe and more are excluded.
Remark: (1) Available for the models of NF125-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW,NF160-SGW/HGW, NF250-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW.
Table 5-13
Series NV-C • S • H • U
Input rated control voltage (V)
Compatible toAC100-240/
DC100-240(DC24) (Note 1)
Input control power (VA)
1VA or less
Type Size Length Marking Ring-mark example
Heat-resistant wire
A ring-mark marked by the terminal symbol is attached to each lead-wire.
0.5mm2
(Note 1)
450mm98/ALa , 96/ALb , 95/ALc
C1/S1 , C2/S2
Note: (1) The specifications of 100-240VAC/100-240V DC are standard unless otherwise specified. The specifications of 24 V DC areavailable if requested.
Note: (1) The length is 400 mm for the model of four-pole, right-pole installation.
46
Applicable models A B C D E4
7
777
25257
41
62.5
138
4.5
17.5
27.51929253537
79.588.5173
119.5135.5
44.5
54
5454545454545454525454
86.5
86.5
86.586.586.586.586.586.586.586.586.586.586.5
4.5
17.5
27.51929253537
79.588.5173
119.5135.5
18
712.5
D 2510
.510
.5 FE
52G
Terminal cover(Skeleton)
86.5
B
A C
38.5
26.5
14.5 8
13.5
M3.5 terminal screw
Remarks: (1) Terminal screw tightening torque M3.5 ··· 0.9~1.2N·m(2) Lead-wire terminal block for TBL is attached to right-side.
Applicable models A B C D ENV30-CSNV32-SW, NV63-CW/SW/HWNV50-SWUNV125-CW/SW/HWNV100-SWUNV100-SEP/HEPNV250-CW/SW/HW, NV250-SEW/HEW, NV225-CWUNV125-RWNV250-RWNV400-CP/SP/HP/HEP/REPNV630-CP/SP/SEP/HEP, NV800-SEP/HEP
4777777774141
4.517.527.51929303780
11279.588.5
44.554545454545454545454
86.586.586.586.586.586.586.586.586.586.586.5
47777
2.52.57
2.526.526.5
F4.521.531.51929303780
11279.588.5
G86.59292
86.586.59292
86.5929292
Terminal cover(Skeleton)
M3.5 terminal screw
A 75
B
115
1111 11
419
25
17
7
Applicable modelsA
NFB NVB
NV400-CP/SP/SEPNV400-HEP/REP
NV630-CP/SP/SEP/HEPNV800-SEP/HEP
20
117
20
117
60
100
69
116
–
–
NF30-CS, MB30-CSNF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HWMB30-SW, MB50-CW/SWNF50-SWUNF125-CW/SW/HWNF100-CWU, NF100-SWUNF125-HGW, NF225-HGWNF-SFW,NF-SJW, NF-HJWNF250-CW/SW/HW, NF225-CWU, NF160-SW/HWNF400-CP/SP/SEP/HEP/REP, NF-SKWNF630-CP/SP/SEP/HEP/REP, NF800-CEP/SDP/SEP/HEP/REP, NF-SLWNF1000-SS/SSD, NF1250-SS/SSD, NF1600-SS/SS (Note1)
NF400-UEP(3P)NF400-UEP(4P), NF630-UEP, NF800-UEP
NF400-CP/SP/SEPNF400-HEP/REP, NF-SKWNF400-UEP(3P)NF630-CP/SP/SEPNF630-HEP/REPNF800-CEP/SDP/SEPNF800-HEP/REP, NF-SLWNF400-UEP(4P), NF630-UEP, NF800-UEP
Table 5-14: Summary of Dimensions
Table 5-15: Summary of Dimensions
Table 5-16
Note: (1) SLT can not be mounted when more than 3 pieces of accessories are mounted on one side in larger frame than 1000A frame.Remark: (1) Terminal screw tightening torque M3.5 ··· 0.9~1.2N·m
Remark: (1) Terminal screw tightening torque
■ 14 Terminals SLT
■ NV
■ NFB
SLT when three and more than three pieces of internal accessories are mounted on left-side.
9. Vertical Lead-wire Terminal Block (SLT)● The circuit beaker can be mounted, being closely fitted to the unit.● Terminal screws are arranged in a zigzag pattern, and screws can be tightened further after wiring.● A terminal cover is provided standardly.● This unit supports the models of front connection, rear connection, and plug-in type (excluding PLT).
18
712.5
D 2510
.510
.5 E
Terminal cover(Skeleton)
86.5
B
A C
38.5
26.5
14.5 8
13.5
M3.5 terminal screw
5. AccessoriesInternal Accessories
47
5
epyTDELmrala-erP)teserotuA(
-tuptuo)RSS(yaleretatsdiloS)teserotuA(tuptuoseitcatnoC
)a1(tuptuotcatnoC-eludommrala-erP
yticapacgnihctiwS )gnidloh-fleS( yticapacgnihctiwS metsysteseR
NF125-SGW/HGW
tnempiuqedradnatS
Option
Option
CAV002-001CDV42Am02
noitpO roCAV001A2CAV002
rohctiwsteserehtsserP.rewoplortnocffonrut
NF160-SGW/HGW
NF250-SGW/HGW
NV100-SEP/HEP—
NV250-SEW/HEWPER-004FNPEH-004FNPES-004FNPEH-036FNPES-036FNPEU-004FNPEC-008FNPEU-036FNPER-036FNPER-008FNPEH-008FNPES-008FN
PEU-008FNCAV002-001CDV42
Am02PER-004VNPEH-004VNPES-004VNPES-008VNPEH-036VNPES-036VN
PEH-008VN
Table 5-17
Pre-alarm LED The LED starts blinking on the circuit breaker when load current exceeds the preset current, then changes to continuous glowing when pre-alarm output is given.
Solid-state relay output Open the upper cover of the circuit breaker, connect the connector of the lead wire packed together and use it as the lead wire outlet. In this case, only the lead wire outlet of the internal accessories can be attached to the right pole. (For flush plate type, the outlet is manufactured in advanced as a PAL mount.)
Pre-alarm module SLT is attached as standard and is used as the control power source of 100VAC or 200VAC. In this case, no other internal accessories can be attached to the right pole. (Auto resetting is also applicable.)
PAL OUT LED
Reset switch
Indicator lamp (Example)
(AC 100V or AC200V)Control power pre-alarm output
PALa
P2
P1
(PALc)
In the case of flush plate type. this is mounted on back side of the circuit breaker.
RISET
10. Pre-Alarm Module (PAL)
This module functions to give alarm output whenload current exceeds a preset current level andserves for securing continuous power supply andalso for preventive maintenance. The electronicbreakers with mount digital ETR of 125 to 800AF
•Pre-alarm characteristics
are provided with this module as an option.(Some modules are with this module as standardequipment.) 1000 to 2000AF are prepared forexclusive use.
Pre-alarm pick-up current
LTD operating time TL12-60-80-100s ± 20%(at 200%)
60 70 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 15000.1s
0.2s
0.5s
1s
2s
5s
10s
20s30s
1min
2min
4min6min
10min14min20min30min
1h
2h
5h
Pre-alarmpickup current IpIr x(0.7-0.75 -0.8-0.85-0.9 ± 10% -0.95-1.0)
Pre-alarmoperatiing time Tp
± 20%
(at 200%)
Tp=2TL
Current
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
Percentage (%) to rated current or preset current rating(NF/NV125,250AF)
Percentage (%) to rated current or preset current rating(NF/NV400,630,800AF)
Pre-alarm pick-up current
LTD operating time TL12-60-100-150s ± 20%(at 200%)
60 70 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 15000.1s
0.2s
0.5s
1s
2s
5s
10s
20s30s
1min
2min
4min6min
10min14min20min30min
1h
2h
5h
10h
Pre-alarmpickup current IpIr x(0.7-0.75 -0.8-0.85-0.9 ± 10% -0.95-1.0)
Pre-alarmoperatiing time Tp
± 20%
(at 200%)
Tp=2TL
Current
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
48
49
11. Trip Indicator (TI)
When the breaker is tripped, this accessory installed on the right side willdisplay the cause of the trip--either long delay (LTD) , short or instantaneous(STD/INST), earth-leakage (EAL) (with earth-leakage breakers only)--on itsLED and output an alarm signal. In this case, both LTD and STD/INST aretreated as overcurrent trips (OAL) and output signals. Pre-alarm is alsooutput. Again, with this module, it is impossible to connect other internalaccessories to the breaker’s right side.)
control power supply
Long-time delay(LTD) alarm LEDPre-alarm(PAL)LEDEarth-leakage alarm (EAL)LED
Reset switch
Pre-alarm output
Overcurrentalarm outputEarth -leakagealarm output
PALaPALcOALaOALcEALaEALc
Short-time(STD),instantaneous(INST) alarm LED
Control voltageP1
25
98
P2
epyT stnetnocDEL
PEU/PER/PEH/PES-004FNPEU/PER/PEH/PES-036FN
PEU/PER/PEH/PES/PEC-008FNmrala-erP,suoenatnatsnI,yaledemit-trohS,yaledemit-gnoL
,suoenatnatsnI,yaledemit-trohS,yaledemit-gnoLmrala-erP,egakael-htraE
✳ .egatlovlortnocCAV002-001seriuqeR
NV400-SEP/HEP/REP, NV630-SEP/HEP,NV800-SEP/HEP
Table 5-18
epyteriw/esahP W4ø3
egatlovdetaR CAV 514egatlovylppuselbasU CAV 484~403
gnippirTscitsiretcarahc
)egatlovenil(egatlovelbasU CAV 083 004 514 044)egatlovesahplatotfo%531()egatlovesahp(egatlovrevognitarepolatoT CAV 692 213 323 343
)egatlovesahplatotfo%021()egatlovesahp(egatlovrevognitarepo-nonlatoT CAV 362 772 882 503emitgnitarepoegatlovrevolatoT )s( 1emitgnitarepo-nonegatlovrevO )s( 1.0nahteroM
dohtemnoitacidnipirT nottuBdohtemteseR )esuyalpsidesahp-nepo(nottubteseR
stcatnoctuptuolanretxE
c1CA CD
egatloVøsoc
egatloVR/L
0.1 4.0 0 700.0V021,001 A7 A7 V03 A7 A6V042,002 A7 A7 V521 A6.0 A6.0
V514 A5 A2 V052 A3.0 A3.0
.noitcetorpesahpdnagnippirtevorpmilliwrekaerbdeppiuqe)THS(ecivedpirt-tnuhsahtiwgnisU:krameR
Table 5-19
• In a 3-phase 4-wire circuits, the voltage rise of the circuit by phase failure of a neutral line is detected, and acontact output is taken out.
52 52
52
min.12
Drilling planø5mm or M4 x 0.7mm screwR pole S Pole T Pole
687.
5
20 6011
.511
.583
63
Test button
Operation display(reset button)
Current switch
N pole NRaNRbNRc
Item output terminal4.8 x 6.8 mounting holemounting screw M4 x 0.7 mm
M3.5 x 0.6 screwself-tap terminal
5737.5
92.5
74
610
9
10.5
39
9.5
12. 3ø4W Neutral-pole protection Relay (NR)
5. AccessoriesInternal Accessories
5
5. AccessoriesExternal Accessories
50
● Outside Dimension Diagram Center of Hinge andCircuit Breaker
● Mounting-hole Drilling Dimension Diagram
The above illustration shows a view of the hinges and the circuit breaker when viewed from the direction of the load.
H X
0 or more (5H+100) or more
● Front Plate DrillingDimension DiagramCenter of the circuit breaker
operating handle
Circuitbreaker
54
54ø54
ø9
16
90B
90
A
N
OFF
RESE
T
OPED
TR
IP
XX
HH
LeftHinge
RightHinge
Front plate
Front plate
Platethickness
1.2–3.2
Handle
Front base
54
C D
Minimum EMaximum F
Front panel
E
D F Minimum JMaximum K
G H
C
A B
Panelthickness1.2~3.2
Handle
The above illustration shows a view of the hinges and the circuit breaker when viewed from the direction of the load.
Breaker
Breaker
N X
O or more P or more
Hinge(left side)
Hinge(right side)
X X
4- 10
M6 screwor 7
Center ofbreaker's handle
Center ofbreaker's handle
Front panel
104
104
Breaker
L
M
63
Note 1: The drilling at this position is not required for the models of both V2GSW and V2GSWF.
Circuitbreaker
Center of thecircuit breaker
operating handle
Center of theoperating handle
Center of thecircuit breaker
Center of the circuitbreaker operating handle
3-pole 4-pole
Circuit breaker
H H
GG G
JEither M4×0.7screw or ø5
Either M4×0.7screw or ø5
CL
CL CL
CL CL
CL
CL
(Note 1)
(Note 1)
Table 5-21
(b)(a)
Outview
External dimensions
Drilling plan
(c)
1. V-type Operating Handle● Appearance (Color N1.5)
Table 5-20: Summary of Dimensions
● This handle in conjunction with the breaker main enables the isolation function effective.
● The safety standards of EN Standards (EN60204-1) are satisfied.
● Degrees of protection (IEC60529) IP65 is satisfied standardly.
● OFF-position lock only is available for up to three commercial padlocks (ø8).
● A door-lock mechanism allows the door to be opened at OFF-position only.
● Can be locked in OFF position only.● The door is locked when ON and can only be
opened in OFF position.● Degrees of protection (in accordance with
IEC60529): IP65.
Type name Applicable modelsNumberof poles
Dimensions (mm)A B C D E F G H J
NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW, NV32-SWNV63-CW/SW/HW, MB30-SWMB50-CW/SW
130 44 61300
25 111
V1SWNF125-CW/SW/HW, NV125-CW/SW/HWMB100-SW
9012090120
130 44 61154 518
30 111(Note 2)V1SWF
(Note 2)V05SWF
V05SW
125
154
125
–
–
V2SWNF160-SW/HW, NF250-CW/SW/HW, NV250-CW/SW/HWNV250-SEW/HEW, MB225-SW
165 46 61
154 518
35 126(Note 2)V2SWF 125 –
V2GSWNF125-SGW/HGW, NF160-SGW/HGW, NF250-SGW/HGW
105140105140
165 46 79
172 536
35 126(Note 2)V2GSWF 143 –
Notes: (1) This hole is not required for two and three poles.(2) The last letter of “F” of the type designations of V-type operating handles denotes a fixed type.
Remark: (1) You may contact us for details of the V-type operating handle for the U series.
3P
3P
2P, 3P
2P, 3P
105
105
140
1402P, 3P
2P, 3P
–
15
–
–12.5
–12.5
15
–
17.5
–
17.5
–
17.5
–
17.5
4P
4P
3P
3P
4P
4P
4P
4P
4P
4P
✽ Equipped with cylinder key (option) to prevent deliberate operation.
epyTepytsrekaerB .giF )mm(snoisnemiD
BCCM BCLE weivtuO gnillirDnalp A B C D E F G H J K L M P
PWS4V,PES-004FN,PS-004FN,PC-004FN
PEH-004FN—
a c,b
752 041 041 041 52 26 67 79 712 935 491 44 051+N8
V4SPWNV —PS-004VN,PC-004VN
PEH-004VN,PES-004VN
PWS6V
V4SPWF
V4SPWFNV
V6SPWF
PES-036FN,PS-036FN,PC-036FNPEH-036FN
PES-008FN,PDS-008FN,PEC-008FNPEH-008FN
572 041 012 041 52 26 67 79 712 935 342 07
752 041 041 041 52 26 67 79 191 – 491 44
572 041 012 041 52 26 67 79 191 – 342 07
051+N8
051+N8
051+N8
NV630-CP, NV630-SPNV630-SEP, NV630-HEPNV800-SEP, NV800-HEP
,PES-004FN,PS-004FN,PC-004FNPEH-004FN
—
—PS-004VN,PC-004VN
PEH-004VN,PES-004VNPES-036FN,PS-036FN,PC-036FN
PEH-036FNPES-008FN,PDS-008FN,PEC-008FN
PEH-008FN
NV630-CP, NV630-SPNV630-SEP, NV630-HEPNV800-SEP, NV800-HEP
N N
7510075100
5. AccessoriesExternal Accessories5. AccessoriesExternal Accessories
Left hinge
F-type operating handle
Front panel
Right hinge
H
Breaker
● Outside Dimension Diagram
● Drilling Dimension Diagram
The above illustration shows a view of the hinges and the circuit breaker when viewed from the direction of the load.
The figure above shows the relationship between the hinge and breaker viewed from the load side of the breaker.
Center of the circuitbreaker operating handle 4 ø12
78
78ø90
CL
CL
Circuit breaker
Circuitbreaker
(a) (b)
(b)
C
BD
CL
CL
(a)
X1 X2
H H
Left hinge Right hinge
Operating handleFront plate
Center ofthe circuitbreakerand theoperatinghandle
51
Platethickness 1.2–3.2
A±2
104
104
ESAE
LER
OPEN
SE ERT
OFF
TRIPPED
ON
circuitbreaker
H
X1 X2
(c)
Breaker
D
E
(X)
(X)
(Y)
(Y)
C(b)
112
112
118
4- 15
F
Center of breaker
2. F-type Operating Handle● Appearance (Color N1.5)
Center of Hinge and Circuit Breaker
● Appearance (Color N1.5)
● This handle in conjunction with the breaker enables the isolation function effective.
● The standard model is equipped with a safety device that prevents the circuit breaker from being turned on if the door is open. (If not desired, please specify so.)
● The handle can be locked at either ON or OFF position. (Three padlocks (40mm) can be installed. OFF-position lock only specifications are also acceptable.)
● Degrees of protection (IEC60529) IP3X(IP5X with dustproof packing)
● Includes as standard a safety device which prevents breaker closing as long as the cover is open. (Specify if this safety feature is not required.)
● Indicates the tripping of the breaker even in ON-lock position--but only in cases when a single padlock (35mm) is used.
● Degrees of protection (in accordance with IEC60529): IP3X (IP5X with provision of dustproof packing).
Left hinge Right hinge
H X1 H X 2
0or more
(5H+100)or more
Less than 10
10or more
170or more
(5H+120)or more
Table 5-22: Summary of Dimensions
● Drilling plan
Type name Applicable modelsNumberof poles
Dimensions (mm) Mounting screwsA B C D
F05SW2P NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW 2P
105
–
111
111
EitherM4×0.7
screw or ø5
(a) Circuit breaker
mounting screws(2pcs)
(b) Handle mounting screws
(2pcs)
F05SW3P, 4P
25NV63-CW/SW 2P, 3P
F1SW2P NF125-CW/SW/HW 2P –F1SW 3P, 4P 30
F2SW 2P, 3P, 4P 107 35 126F2GSW
F05SWR2P
F05SWR
F1SWR2PF1SWR
F2SWRF2GSWR 3P, 4P 125 35 126
Remark: (1) Trip action can be displayed when the circuitbreaker trips even if ON-position lock is selected(only in the case of a single padlock (35 mm)).
Remarks: (1) The test button becomes difficult to press when an operating handle is installed on an NV model. Then, use models with either TBM instead. (2) Dustproof packings are separately available.(3) You may consult us for details of the F-type operating handle for the U series.
*1. Handles with NV in the product name include a test button.*2. Dustproof packing is also available as an option.*3. Other optional handles can also be mounted.*4. F4SPW~F6UPW are for isolation purposes. (Speify OFF lock only.)
*5. The figures show the dimensions of the front connection. Some connection and plug-in breakers have a different reference surface for mounting purposes.
*6. The standard type is equipped with a door-lock mechanism that allows the door to be opened only when OFF operation is carried out.
*7. In case of reset opened type use.
*1. Dimensions of both front connection and rear connection are shown. The plug-in type has a different reference plane for mounting the circuit breaker.*2. The standard type is epuipped with a door-lock mechanism that allows door to be opened only when OFF operation is carried out.*3. In case of reset opened type use.
egnihtfeL egnihthgiR
H 1X H 2X
eromro0 eromro)051+H8( eromro0 eromro)120+H4(
epyT epytrekaerB selopforebmuNgiF )mm(snoisnemiD
MountingcrewslanretxE
snoisnemidgnillirD
nalp*5
A C D E F
P4,P3,P2
a b c
381 44 491
wercs6M7øro
M8 screwor ø10
—
)X(rekaerBgnitnuom
swercs)scp4(
P4,P3P3 082 44 432 02
P4,P3,P2381 07 342 —
—
—
P4,P3
PWS4FPWNVS4FPWU4F
PWS6F
PWNVS6F
PWU6F
PWRS4FPWRNVS4FPWRU4F
PWRS6F
PWRNVS6F
PWRU6FF100F1004PF120URF120UR4P
PER/PEH/PES/PS/PC-004FNPER/PEH/PES/PS/PC-004VN
PEU-004FNPER/PEH/PES/PS/PC-036FN
PER/PEH/PES/PDS/PEC-008FN,PEH/PES/PS/PC-036VN
PEH/PES-008VNPEU-008FN,PEU-036FN,)P4(PEU-004FN
NF1000-SS/SSD, NF1250-SS/SSDNF1600-SS/SSD
NF1250-UR
P4,P3P3,P2
4P3P4P
082
221
225
70
70
B
53
50
375
375
07 092 5.32
Center of Hinge and Circuit Breaker
Table 5-23
*1
NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW, NV32-SW, NV63-SW/HW, MB30-SW, MB50-CW/SW
NF125-CW/SW/HW, NV125-CW/SW/HW, MB100-SW
NF125-SGW/HGW, NF160-SGW/HGW, NF250-SGW/HGWNF160-SW/HW, NF250-CW/SW/HW, NV250-CW/SW/HW, NV250-SEW/HEW, MB225-SW
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
F4SPW ~ F6UPW F100 ~ F120UR4P
*6
*6
*6
*6
*6
*6
*7
*7
*7
*7
*7
*7
*7
*7
*7
*7
● External dimensions
(a)
Flusf plate
Release screw
Front panel
ON
OFF
RESTE
TPRIEPD
150
150 Plate thickness 1.2-3.2
B A ± 2
51
5
Specification explanation for F-type operating handlesSpecification Detailed explanation Kind
ON and OFF-position lock OFF-position lock only
RESET-position open OFF-position open
Vertically type (ON side of breaker is upper)
Horizontally type (ON side of breaker is left)
Horizontally type (ON side of breaker is right)
Handle lock position
Mounting direction
The top of label is ON side of
breaker
For emergency
*You may consult us for details
of emergency
The position where it can lock
with the padlock.
Can not open, when it use
padlock.
When OFF-lock, please turn
handle in RESET direction.
The door can be opened with the
operating handle RESET-position
or OFF-position.
When the operating handle was
locked, the panel (door) can not
be opened.
Door opening system
Reconstruction to vertically from
horizontally can not be
performed.
For emergency stop use.
(In accordance with EN60204-1)
SE ERT
OF F
TRIPPED
ON
SE ERT
OF F
TRIPPED
ON
SE ERT
OF F
TRIPPED
ON
SE ERT
OF F
TRIPPED
ON
SE ERT
OF F
TRIPPED
ON
SE ERT
OF F
TRIPPED
ON
SE ERT
OF F
TRIPPED
ON
SE ERT
OF F
TRIPPED
ON
SE ERT
OF F
TRIPPED
ON
SE ERT
OF F
TRIPPED
ON
Red color
Yellow color
12
Lock lever lockedby lock plate
OFF-position OFF-positionRESET-position
Lock lever unlockedby lock plate
Lock plate
Lock lever
Lock lever unlockedby lock plate
ON side
Label
52
5. AccessoriesExternal Accessories
Table 5-25
–
–
–
– –
–
–
–
● External dimensions ● Drilling plan
5947
Operating plate
Operatingplate
max
. 145
114
130(
S4C
P·S
4SP
)18
0(S
100)
55
110
max
. 150
OF
F
TRIPON
Front panel
Decorative plate
(a)
84
25 102 ± 5
45
12
B ±
2A
± 2
D
35 ±
5
62
5.54-
Retainer
Front panelDeviation: 5mm or less110 or more (250 or more if hingeis mounted on the left)
Deviation: 2 mm or less
Centre of breaker
Hinge
Retainer(option)
Retainer*1
Center of breaker's handle
*1
*2
*5
*3
*3
84Front panel applicable thickness : 1.6 to 3.2
Reference planefor mounting the breaker
(b)
● Outside Dimension Diagram ● Front Plate Drilling Dimension Diagram
Operating plate
ON
OF
F
TRIP
45
110
114
80
Operating plateFront plate
Max
. 95
Max
. 115
34 40
Face plateø62
4-ø4.5 Center of the circuitbreaker
Deviationof 4mmor less
9
70
4770
Clasp(Note 1)
Clasp(Note 1)(Note 2)
Clasp(option)
(Not
e 3)
41.5
±4
(Note 3)43.5±4
Center of the circuit breakeroperating handle
17
Front plate deviation of 4mm or less100 or more (210 or more when the hinge is on the left)
Hinge
A±2 B±2
(Not
e 2)
C±2
Reference plane for mountingthe circuit breaker
ø12
Front plate thickness 1.2–3.2
ON
OFF
Fastening
Fastening ON
OFF
A16
BM5 screwfor attachingthe fastening
Center ofthe breaker
Center of thehandle of breaker Breaker
Notes: (1) The clasps are not supplied standardly, and should be prepared by users Details on dimensions and others will be available upon request. (2) When the optional clasp is used. (3) The tolerance from the center of ø62 is shown. (4) The dimensions of the front-face type are shown. Some of the back-face and plug-in types have a different reference plane for mounting the circuit breaker. (5) The front plate drilling dimensions for the U series differ from those shown above. Please consult us for their details.
Notes: *1. Retainers are not included. They must be provided by the customer.*2. When using optional retainer.*3. Shows the tolerance for the distance from the center of a 62mm dia. hole.*4. The figures show the front-connection dimensions. Some rear-connection and plug-in breakers have a different reference surface for mounting purposes.*5. S4CP and S4SP are for isolation purposes. (Specify OFF lock only.) The tolerance is less than 5mm. It does not conform to isolation purposes, however, if the deviation is more than 2mm.
Remark: The clamp for surface plate interlock fastener is common to 2P, 3P and 4P.
epyT epytrekaerBgiF )mm(snoisnemiD
lanretxEsnoisnemid nalpgnillirD A✳ 4 B✳ 4 C✳ 4 D
P *5C4S PC-004VN,PC-004FN a b 041 651 — 0
P *5S4S
S100
PER/PEH/PES/PS-004VN,PER/PEH/PES/PS-004FNPEH/PES/PS/PC-036VN,PER/PEH/PES/PS/PC-036FN
PEH/PES-008VN,PER/PEH/PES/PDS/PEC-008FN a b
a b
261 871 —
0
0
)P3(PEU-004FN 952 572 — 02PEU-008FN,PEU-036FN,)P4(PEU-004FN
NF1000-SS/SSD, NF1250-SS/SSDNF1600-SS/SSDNF1250-UR
952
199
203
215
219
572 —
—
—
5.32
3. S-type Operating Handle
● Surface plate interlocking fastening (separately available)
● Appearance (Color N1.5)
Table 5-24: Summary of Dimensions
● Appearance (Color N1.5)
● The handle can be locked at either ON or OFF position. (Three padlocks (40mm) can be installed. Off-position lock only specifications are also acceptable.)
● Digrees of protection (IEC60529) IP5X
● Indicates the tripping of the breaker even in ON-lock position--but only in cases when a single padlock(35mm) is used.
● Degrees of protection (in accordance with IEC60529): IP5X.
Type name Applicable modelsDimensions (mm)
A (Note 4) B (Note 4) C (Note 4)
S05SW NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW, NV32-SW, NV63-CW/SW/HW, MB30-SW, MB50-CW/SW87 102 104.5
S1SW NF125-CW/SW/HW, NV125-CW/SW/HW, MB100-SW, NV125-RW (Note 5)
S2SWNF160-SW/HW, NF250-CW/SW/HW, NV250-CW/SW/HWNV250-SEW/HEW, MB225-SW, NV250-RW (Note 5) 95 110 112.5
S2GSW NF125-SGW/HGW, NF160-SGW/HGW, NF250-SGW/HGW 113 128 130.5
Remark: (1) Trip action can be displayed when the circuitbreaker trips even if ON-position lock is selected(only in the case of a single padlock (35 mm)).
Remark: (1) Reset open-type(2) These are not suitable for isolation.
Operationhandle series
S-type
Type Drilling diagram and referential diagram
Drilling diagram
MCCB ELCB A BBreaker type Dimensions (mm)
NF32-SWNF63-CW/SW/HWMB30-SW, MB50-CW/SWNF125-CW/SW/HWMB100-SW
TG-S05SW
TG-S1UWTG-S05SP
TG-S2SW
TG-S2UW
TG-S2GSW
TG-S4CP
TG-S4SP
TG-S4UP
TG-S100
TG-S120UR
NF125-RGW/UGW
NF400-UEP (3P)NF400-UEP (4P), NF600-UEP, NF800-UEP
NF250-RGW/UGW
NF400-CP
NF1250-UR
NF160-SW/HWNF250-CW/SW/HWNF250-SEW/HEW,MB225-SW
NF125-SGW/HGWNF160-SGW/HGWNF250-SGW/HGWNF-SFW, NF-SJW, NF-HJW
NF400-SP/SEP/HEP/REPNF630-CP/SP/SEP/HEP/REPNF800-CEP/SDP/SEP/HEP/REPNF-SKW, NF-SLW
NF1000-SS/SSD, NF1250-SS/SSDNF1600-SS/SSD
NV32-SWNV63-CW/SW/HW
NV125-CW/SW/HW
NV125-RWNV100-SEP, HEP
NV250-RW
NV400-CP
67
6787
67
67
119
119119
119
119
NV250-CW/SW/HWNV250-SEW/HEW
NV400-SP/SEP/HEP/REPNV630-CP/SP/SEP/HEPNV800-SEP/HEP
Remark: (1) Reset open-type
53
5
● Outside Dimension Diagram
● Mounting-hole Drilling Dimension Diagram
Handle
Center of thecircuit breaker
operating handle
Center of theoperating handle
Center of theoperating handle
Center of thecircuit breaker
Center of the circuitbreaker operating handle
Center of the circuitbreaker operating handle
2, 3-pole(a) (b) (c)4-pole
Circuit breaker
G G
FF F
JEither M4×0.7screw or ø5
Either M4×0.7screw or ø5
CL
CL CL
CL CL
(Note 1)
Center of thecircuit breaker
G
H
F Either M4×0.7screw or ø5
CL
CLCL
Note 1: The drilling at this position is not required for the models of R2GSW.
C
88D
E
A
B 88
16
(Note 1)
Table 5-27
K
L
Breaker
M6 screwor 7
4. R-type Operating Handle● Appearance (Color N1.5)
Table 5-26: Summary of Dimensions
● This handle in conjunction with the breaker main enables the isolation function effective.
● OFF-position lock only is available for up to three commercial padlocks (ø8).
● Equipped with cylinder key (option) prevent deliberate operation.
Type name Applicable modelsNumberof poles
Dimensions (mm)
A B C D E F G H J
R1SW NF125-CW, NF125-SW, NF125-HWNV125-CW, NV125-SW, NF125-HW
3P 90130
191
165
240
165
240
61
61
61
79
79
105
107
107
125
125
142
144
144
162
162
30
35
35
35
35
172
126
201
126
201
30.5
—
15
—
—
37.5
—
37.5
61 105 142 30 111 —
R1UW NV125-RW
NF160-SW, NF160-HW, NF250-CW, NF250-SW, NF250-HWNV250-CW, NV250-SW, NF250-HW, NV250-SEWNV250-HEW
R2SW
R2UW NV250-RW
NF125-SGW, NF125-HGW, NF160-SGW, NF160-HGW,NF250-SGW, NF250-HGWR2GSW
R2GUW NF125-RGW, NF125-UGW, NF250-RGW, NF250-UGW
4P
3P 90
2P, 3P
4P
3P
2P, 3P
4P
3P
120
105
140
105
105
140
105
✽ Equipped with cylinder key (option) to prevent deliberate operation.
—
17.5
—
—
—
17.5
(b)(a)
Outview External dimensions Drilling plan
● Can be locked in OFF position only.
a
c
b
a
b
c
a
b
c
Drillingplan
Fig
A B
E
D
C
G
F
J
H
epyTepytrekaerB giF )mm(snoisnemiD
BCCM BCLE OutviewgnillirD
nalpA B C D E F G H J K L
PWS4R,PES-004FN,PS-004FN,PC-004FN
PEH-004FN—
a b
752 821 041 041 52 34 79 471 812 491 44
VNPWS4R — ,PS-004VN,PC-004VNPEH-004VN,PES-004VN
PWS6R
,PES-036FN,PS-036FN,PC-036FNPEH-036FN
,PES-008FN,PDS-008FN,PEC-008FNPEH-008FN
572 821 012 041 52 34 79 471 812 342 07
M
—
—NV630-CP, NV630-SP,NV630-SEP, NV630-HEP,NV800-SEP, NV800-HEP
54
5. AccessoriesExternal Accessories
V1)
12)
SW3)
E4)
F5)
1) V : Operating handle type
2) 1 : Frame size of breaker
3) SW : Series name
4) E : For emergency
5) F : Adjustment type of depth (For only V-handle)
6) NV : Type of breaker
Ordering information
NV6)
Variable-depth handleRotary handleNF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW, MB30-SW, MB50-CW/SW, DSN32-SW, DSN63-CW/SW, NV32-SW, NV63-CW/SW/HWNF125-CW/SW/HW, NV125-CW/SW/HW, MB100-SW, DSN125-CW/SW, NV125-RWNF160-SW/HW, NF250-CW/SW/HW, MB225-SW, NV250-CW/SW/HW/SEW/HEW, DSN250-CW/SW, NV250-RW NF125-SGW/HGW, NF160-SGW/HGW, NF250-SGW/HGW, DSN125-SGW,DSN160-SGW, DSN250-SGW,NF125-RGW/UGW, NF250-RGW/UGWNF400-CP/SP/SEP/HEP/REP, DSN400-CP/SP, NV400/CP/SP/SEP/HEP/REP NF630-CP/SP/SEP/HEP/REP, DSN630-CP/SP, DSN800-CP/SP, NF800-CEP/SDP/SEP/HEP/REP, NV630-CP/SP/SEP/HEP,NV800-SEP/HEP
V·······R·······05·····
1·······
2·······
2G····
4·······
6·······
Blank······E············Blank······F············NV··········Blank······
For generalFor emergencyVariable typeFix typeNV type for 400A frameThe other
SW indicate WSSSPW indicate PSS
UW indicate WSS
C, S and H seriesC, S and H series
U series
F1)
12)
SW3)
A4)
R5)
1) F : Operating handle type2) 1 : Frame size of breaker
3) SW : Series name
4) A : Handle lock position
5) R : Door open position
6) Y : Mounting direction
7) 2P : Number of poles
8) NV : Type of breaker
Y6)
2P7)
NV8)
NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW, MB30-SW, MB50-CW/SW, DSN32-SW, DSN63-CW/SW, NV32-SW, NV63-CW/SW/HWNF125-CW/SW/HW, NV125-CW/SW/HW, MB100-SW, DSN125-CW/SW, NV125-RWNF160-SW/HW, NF250-CW/SW/HW, MB225-SW, NV250-CW/SW/HW/SEW/HEW, DSN250-CW/SW, NV250-RW NF125-SGW/HGW, NF160-SGW/HGW, NF250-SGW/HGW, DSN125-SGW,DSN160-SGW, DSN250-SGW,NF125-RGW/UGW, NF250-RGW/UGWNF400-CP/SP/SEP/HEP/REP, DSN400-CP/SP, NV400/CP/SP/SEP/HEP/REP, NF400-UEP NF630-CP/SP/SEP/HEP/REP, DSN630-CP/SP, DSN800-CP/SP, NF800-CEP/SDP/SEP/HEP/REP, NV630/CP/SP/SEP/HEP,NV800-SEP/HEP, NF400-UEP(4P),NF630-UEP, NF800-UEP
05·····
1·······
2·······
2G····
4·······
6·······
Blank······A············Blank······R············Blank······
Y············
Z············
Blank······2P···········NV··········Blank······
ON/OFF position lockOFF position lock onlyOFF position openRESET position openVertically type (ON side of breaker is upper)Horizontally type (ON side of breaker is left)Horizontally type (ON side of breaker is right)3 pole and 4 pole2 poleNV type for 400 to 800 A frameThe other
SW indicate WSSSPW indicate PSS
UW indicate WSSUPW indicate PSS
C, S and H seriesC, S and H series
U seriesU series
S1)
12)
SW3)
A4)
1) S : Operating handle type2) 1 : Frame size of breaker
3) SW : Series name
4) A : Handle lock position
NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW, MB30-SW, MB50-CW/SW, DSN32-SW, DSN63-CW/SW, NV32-SW, NV63-CW/SW/HWNF125-CW/SW/HW, NV125-CW/SW/HW, MB100-SW, DSN125-CW/SW, NV125-RWNF160-SW/HW, NF250-CW/SW/HW, MB225-SW, NV250-CW/SW/HW/SEW/HEW, DSN250-CW/SW, NV250-RW NF125-SGW/HGW, NF160-SGW/HGW, NF250-SGW/HGW, DSN125-SGW,DSN160-SGW, DSN250-SGWNF400-CP/SP/SEP/HEP/REP, DSN400-CP/SP, NV400/CP/SP/SEP/HEP/REP, NF400-UEP NF630-CP/SP/SEP/HEP/REP, DSN630-CP/SP, DSN800-CP/SP, NF800-CEP/SDP/SEP/HEP/REP, NV630/CP/SP/SEP/HEP, NV800-SEP/HEP, NF400-UEP(4P)NF630-UEP, NF800-UEP
05·····
1·······
2·······
2G····
4·······
S1)
1002)
1) S : Operating handle type2) 100 : Frame size of breaker
Blank······A············
ON/OFF position lockOFF position lock only
SW indicate WSSCP indicate PSSSP indicate PSS
C, S and H seriesC seriesS, H and U series
100·········NF1000-SS/SSD, NF1250-SS/SSD, NF1600-SS/SSD, NF1250-UR
F1)
1002)
1) F : Operating handle type2) 100 : Frame size of breaker
3) 4P : Number of poles
4P3)
100·········
120UR····Blank······4P··········
NF1000-SS/SSD, NF1250-SS/SSD, NF1600-SS/SSDNF1250-UR2 pole and 3 pole4 pole
55
5
C
A
B C
A
B C
A
B C
A
B
C
A
B
Table 5-29
5. Terminal CoverTable 5-28
Breaker type
Large terminal cover(TC-L)
Small terminal cover(TC-S)
Transparent terminalcover (TTC)
Rear terminal cover(BTC)
Plug-in terminal cover(PTC)
NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW 2P TCL-05SW2W(50×65.5×25)
TCS-05SW2W(50×65.5×5)
TTC-05SW2(50×65.5×25)
BTC-05SW2W(50×65.5×5)
NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HWNV32-SW, NV63-CW/SW/HW, MB30-SWMB50-CW/SW
3P TCL-05SW3W(75×65.5×25)
TCS-05SW3W(75×65.5×5)
TTC-05SW3(75×65.5×25)
BTC-05SW3W(75×65.5×5)
NF125-CW/SW/HW 2P
IP20
TCL-1SW2W(60×65.5×40)
TCS-1SW2W(60×65.5×6.5)
TTC-1SW2(60×65.5×40)
BTC-1SW2W(60×65.5×6.5)
NF125-CW/SW/HW, NV125-CW/SW/HW,NV125-RW, MB100-SW 3P TCL-1SW3W
(90×65.5×40)TCS-1SW3W(90×65.5×6.5)
TTC-1SW3(90×65.5×40)
BTC-1SW3W(90×65.5×6.5)
NF160-SW/HW, NF250-CW/SW/HW,NV250-CW/SW/HW, NV250-SEW/HEW, NV250-RWMB225-SW
2P3P
2P3P
TCL-2SW3W(105×65.5×40)
TCS-2SW3W(105×65.5×6.5)
TTC-2SW3(105×65.5×40)
BTC-2SW3W(105×65.5×6.5)
NF125-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW, NF160-SGW/HGWNF250-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW
IP40 TCL-2GSW3W(105×84×40)
TCS-2GSW3W(105×84×6.5)
TTC-2GSW3(105×84×40)
BTC-2GSW3W(105×84×6.5)
PTC-05SW2W(50×65.5×6.5)
PTC-05SW3W(75×65.5×6.5)
PTC-1SW2W(60×65.5×6.5)
PTC-1SW3W(90×65.5×6.5)
PTC-2SW3W(105×65.5×6.5)
PTC-2GSW3W(105×84×6.5)
Notes: (1) Attach the letter “F” to the end of model designation for models with F-type operating handle. (Those are F-type operating-handle dedicated models,and screws are used for fixing.)
(2) An F-type operating handle can be installed standardly.Remarks: (1) Parenthesized numbers denote the outside dimensions (A×B×C in mm).
(2) The terminal cover for a four-pole model can be produced upon request.
(Note 1)
(Note 2)
(Note 1)
(Note 2)
(Note 2)
(Note 1)
(Note 2)
(Note 1)
(Note 2)
(Note 2)
(Note 1)
(Note 2)
(Note 1)
(Note 2)
(Note 2)
NF30-CS, MB30-CS 2P TCL-03CS2W(43.5×30.5×25)
TCS-03CS2W(43.5×30.5×5)
TTC-03CS2(43.5×30.5×25)
BTC-03CS2W(43.5×30.5×6.5) —
NF30-CS, NV30-CS, MB30-CS 3P TCL-03CS3W(67×30.5×25)
TCS-03CS3W(67×30.5×5)
TTC-03CS3(67×30.5×25)
BTC-03CS3W(67×30.5×6.5) —
epytrekaerB
revoclanimretegraL)L-CT(
revoclanimrettnerapsnarT)CTT(
revoclanimretraeR)CTB(
revoclanimretni-gulP)CTP(
PER/PEH/PES/PS/PC-004FNPER/PEH/PES/PS/PC-004VN
P3,P23PS4-LCT
TCL-4SP3W ✳ 4
TCL-4SP3W ✳ 4
BTC-4SP3W ✳ 4
BTC-4SP3W ✳ 4
✳ 3
171( ✕ 5.99 ✕ )0111.giF
3PS4-CTT171( ✕ 5.401 ✕ )011
3PS4-CTB
041( ✕ 5.99 ✕ )24
3PS4-CTP041( ✕ 5.99 ✕ )24
PEU-004FN P33PS4-LCT ✳ 1
171( ✕ 5.691/5.231 ✕ )011—
3PS4-CTB ✳ 1
041( ✕ 5.691/5.231 ✕ )24—
PEH/PES-004VN,PEH/PES/PS-004FN P44PS4-LCT ✳ 4
042( ✕ 104.5✕ 110)
2.giF
4PS4-CTT042( ✕ 5.401 ✕ )011
4PS4-CTB ✳ 2581( ✕ 5.79 ✕ )93
—
PEH/PES/PS/PC-036VN,PER/PEH/PES/PS/PC-036FNPEH/PES-008VN,PER/PEH/PES/PDS/PEC-008FN
P3,P2
3PS6-LCT ✳ 5422( ✕ 103.5✕ 155)
3PS6-CTT422( ✕ 5.301 ✕ )551
3PS6-CTB ✳ 2012( ✕ 5.79 ✕ )23
—
PEU-008FN,PEU-036FN P3
2P, 3P
3PU6-LCT ✳ 1022( ✕ 5.491/641 ✕ )551
—3PS6-CTB ✳ ,1 ✳ 2
012( ✕ 5.491/641 ✕ )23—
PES-036VN,PEH/PES/PS-036FNPEH/PES-008FN
NF1000-SS/SSDNF1250-SS/SSD
NF1000-SS/SSD
NF1250-UR
NF1250-SS/SSD
NF1250-UR
P44PS6-LCT ✳ 6
492( ✕ 103.5✕ 155)4PS6-CTT
492( ✕ 5.301 ✕ )5514PS6-CTB ✳ 2
082( ✕ 5.79 ✕ )23—
PEU-008FN,PEU-036FN,PEU-004FN P4
P4
P3
P4
4PU6-LCT ✳ 1092( ✕ 5.491/641 ✕ )551
TCL-10SS3
TCL-10SS4
TCL-12UR3
TCL-12UR4
022( ✕ 0)51✕931
092( ✕ 0)51✕931
052( ✕ 0)32✕341
023( ✕ 0)32✕341
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
4PS6-CTB ✳ ,1 ✳ 2082( ✕ 5.491/641 ✕ )23
—
—
—
—
—
A(.mmnisnoisnemidlanretxeswohS)(.1:skrameR ✕ B✕ )C✳ edisdaoL/ediseniL.1✳ .epytni-gulpnodetnuomebnacsrevocesehT.2✳ .PER/PEH-004VNdnaPER/PEH-004FNroftpecxE
Color is white..3
✳ .4
C
B
A
C
B
A
C
B
A
CB
A
Fig.2
Fig.1CB
A
56
5. AccessoriesExternal Accessories
L2
ALc
X
This refers to the status in which the circuit breaker and the electrical operation device is OFF.
MDS Module MDS Base
ON
OFF(RESET)
P1
P2
S1
S2
S4
P.SPowerSupply
UcM
K1
K2
K3
K1K1
K2
K2K3
K3SW1
SW2
Control circuitvoltage
ALa
Breaker alarm switch (AL)(for small current)
L1
SW1
SW2
M
Switching power supply(except for 24VDC model)
MANUAL/AUTO switch
Limit switch (for spring condition detection Charge/Discharge)
Motor
P.S
Relay(for Charge/OFF operation)
Relay(for motor)
Relay(for motor)
K1
K2
K3
Pumping prevention circuitX
Power LED indicator (red)L1
Trip LED indicator (yellow)L2
SW1
SW2
M
Switching power supply(except for 24VDC model)
MANUAL/AUTO switch
Limit switch (for spring condition detection Charge/Discharge)
Motor
P.S
Relay(for Charge/OFF operation)
Relay(for motor)
Relay(for motor)
K1
K2
K3
Pumping prevention circuitX
X
Breaker is OFF condition and MDS is charge condition
MDS Module MDS Base
ON
OFF(RESET)
P1
P2
S1
S2
S4
P.SPowerSupply
UcM
K1
K2
K3
K1K1
K2
K2K3
K3SW1
SW2
Control circuitvoltage
6. Electrical Operation DeviceTable 5-30: Summary of Model Designations
Table 5-32
Table 5-31: Specifications
(Note 1)
Applicable modelsNF125-CW(3P)NF125-SW(3P, 4P)NF125-HW
NF160-SW/HWNF250-CW/SW/HWMB225-SW
NV125-CW/SW/HW NV250-CW/SW/HW NV250-SEW/HEW
Rated operating voltage
24V DC MDSD024-NF1SWE MDSD024-NF2SWE MDSD024-NV1SWE MDSD024-NV2SWE MDSD024-NVE2SWE
Compatible to 100-240V AC/100-250V DC
MDSAD240-NF1SWE MDSAD240-NF2SWE MDSAD240-NV1SWE
NF125-SGW/HGWNF160-SGW/HGWNF250-SGW/HGW
MDSD024-NF2GSWE
48-60V DC MDSD060-NF1SWE MDSD060-NF2SWE MDSD060-NV1SWE MDSD060-NV2SWE MDSD060-NVE2SWEMDSD060-NF2GSWE
MDSAD240-NF2GSWE MDSAD240-NV2SWE MDSAD240-NVE2SWE
Rated operating voltage (Allowable voltage range 85~110%)
24V DC 48-60VDCCompatible to
100-240V AC/100-250V DC
Operating time (s)
ON action 0.05–0.1
OFF action 0.6 or less
Charging action 1.2 or less
Power requirement (VA) 150
Note: (1) Place an order of other models in conjunction with the circuit breaker. Remarks: (1) The standard terminal cover can be used.
(2) Please contact us for details of the outside dimensions.
● 250A Frame and less
● 400A Frame and more
BCCMepyt
seiresC-FN
seiresS·H-FN
seiresBM,U-FN
BCLEepyt
seiresC-VN
seiresS·H-VN
seiresNM
metsysnoitarepolacirtcelE
NF1000-SSNF1000-SSDNF1250-SSNF1250-SSDNF1600-SSNF1600-SSD
NF1250-UR
—
—
—
—
Spring-charged type
)V(egatlovgnitarepodetaRegnaregatlovelbawollA(
)%011~58 ✳ 1
CAV022/002,CAV011/001,CDV011/001)CAV042,CDV521(
gnitarepOtnerruc)smr,A( ✳ 2
CD V011/001
CAV011/001
V022/002
NO
8
10
8
emitgnitarepO )s(nO 50.0
ffO )gnidloh-fles(3nahtsseL
remrofsnartderiuqeR )AV(yticapac 007 007
FFO
)0.3(0.1
)0.3(0.1
)5.1(5.0
NO
9
10
8
70.0
)gnidloh-fles(3nahtsseL
)V(egatlovecnarudnE
NF1000-SSNF1000-SSDNF1250-SSNF1250-SSDNF1600-SSNF1600-SSD
NF1250-UR
—
—
—
—
Motor-drive type (2)
)0.8(0.4
10.0)(0.5
)0.7(5.3
)gnidloh-fles(3.0nahtsseL
007
✳ .relaedruoytlusnoc,sliatedroF.rotsiserlanretxenaeriuqerthgimdnasnoitpolaicepserasegatlov)(.1✳ .stnerrucgnitratsswohs)(.2
FFO
)0.3(0.1
)0.3(0.1
)5.1(5.0
NF400-CP NF630-CP NF800-CEP
PS-004FNPER/PEH/PES-004FN
PS-036FNPER/PEH/PES-036FNPER/PEH/PES-008FN
NF400-UEP NF630-UEP NF800-UEP
PC-036VNPC-004VN
—
Motor-drive type (2)
)0.8(0.3
)0.8(0.4
)5.4(0.2
)gnidloh-fles(3.0nahtsseL
004
NV400-SPNV400-SEP/HEP/REP
NV630-SEP/HEPNV800-SEP/HEP
NF400-CP NF630-CP NF800-CEP
PS-004FNPER/PEH/PES-004FN
PS-036FNPER/PEH/PES-036FNPER/PEH/PES-008FN
NF400-UEP NF630-UEP NF800-UEP
PC-036VNPC-004VN
—
Spring-charged type
NV400-SPNV400-SEP/HEP/REP
NV630-SEP/HEPNV800-SEP/HEP
0051
MDSD024 -NF2SWE MDSD024 -NV2SWE/NVE2SWEMDSD060 -NF2SWE MDSD060 -NV2SWE/NVE2SWEMDSAD240-NF2SWE MDSAD240-NV2SWE/NVE2SWE
others
Motor-drive type (2)(MD)
Spring-charged type(MDS)
57
5
General precautions for motor-operated electrical MCCBs● Motor-operated types have intermittent ratings, and therefore they
should not be operated more than 10 times consecutively (one on/off counts as an operation).
● The operating voltage should be between 85~110% of the rated control voltage.
● When the breaker is tripped by trip button or breakdown (i.e., overload or short circuit), the breaker will not show that it has been tripped (except for motor-operated type 1 breakers).
● The dielectric strength of the electrical operating circuits is 1500V. When performing a dielectric strength test simultaneously with another device at a voltage over 1500V, the operating circuit terminal should be disconnected.
Automatic Reset● If the breaker is an auto reset type, it contains a built-in alarm
switch and the off-control circuit closes when the breaker is tripped. Since the breaker automatically resets itself after tripping, the power is easily restored by switching on the breaker again. With a UVT mounted, however, auto reset may not be possible. In this case, please consult your dealer.
Motor-operated type (2)● Electrical operation Forward and reverse motor rotation is changed by ball screw to
switch the breaker ON and OFF (reset).● Manual operation The manual operation handle can be used to switch the breaker ON
and OFF directly.● Cautions during electrical operation1. In case the UVT operates and a circuit breaker trips if the breaker
has a UVT, the re-closing procedure may differ according to the state of the breaker before tripping.When the circuit breaker trips while turned ON..... Reset (OFF) -> Turn ONWhen the circuit breaker trips while turned OFF..... Turn ON (idle tripping) -> Reset (OFF) -> Turn ON (If it fails to turn ON (idle tripping), please operate Reset (OFF) and turn ON.)
2. Do not send ON and OFF signals consecutively. An interval of at least 0.5s is required between each ON and OFF.
3. For models with auto reset capability, resetting after an NFB trip should be performed after an interval of 0.5s.
4. The electrical operating device is equipped with a pumping prevention circuit. Although it is possible to set the device to OFF while it is set to ON, it is impossible to return it to ON immediately. To return to ON, first shut off the ON switch, then set it back to ON.
5. Special care is required during electrical operation because the manual operation handle moves at high speed. Also be sure to turn off the circuit power supply when using manual operation.
6. With manual operation, ensure that the handle is fully extended.
Control circuitThe dotted line shows an additional connection for the automatic-reset type.
Electrically Operated MCCBs and ELCBs
M
Earth terminal
(DC-)P2
P1
S1
S4
95
ON
OFFRESET
Operationalpower supply
ALa
T1
T1
T1T2
LS
T2
YY
Y
Y
Y
YX
X
X
X
X
Z ZZ
breaker is OFF state
M :MotorX :Relay for ON operationY :Relay for OFF operationZ :Relay for changing Motor polarityT1 :Timer for antipumpingT2 :Timer for automatic resetLS :Limit SwitchALa :Alarm switch for automatic reset (a contact)
Earth terminal
(DC-)P2
P1
S1
S4
95
ON
OFFRESET
Operationalpower supply
ALa
T1
T1T2 LS
Y
YX
YX
XY
YX
Z
Z
Z
XZ
M
X
Y
T2
(2) Control circuit 2. (NF1000-SS to NF 1600-SS)
(1) Control circuit 1. (400,630 and 800AF)
Manual operation Internal structure
58
5. AccessoriesExternal Accessories
Control circuitThe dotted line shows an additional connection for the automatic-reset type.
Spring-charged type● Electrical operation When the ON switch is closed, the coil is excited to release the
latch mechanism and the force of the closing spring turns the breaker ON instantly.
When the OFF switch is closed, a relay starts the motor which turns the breaker OFF and charges the spring simultaneously.
● Manual operation Pressing the ON button will release the latch mechanism and the
force of the closing spring turns the breaker ON instantly. Pressing the leaf spring, pulling out the manual handle and pumping
it back and forth over 10 times will turn the breaker OFF and charge the spring at the same time.
● Cautions during electrical operation Whenever an electrical operation device is to be installed in or
removed from the breaker, the breaker must be tripped and the device discharged.
Pushing the TRIP button on an MCCB with an electrical-operation device installed will not trip the breaker in the OFF state. This does not mean the breaker is faulty.
Switching OFF a breaker with an electrical-operation device installed will take 3s. If instant opening is required, install an SHT or UVT to the breaker.
● The breaker contains a built-in pumping-prevention relay.
Internal connection
Earth terminal
(DC-) P2
P1
X
X
M
X
Y Y
YCC
LS1
LS2
LS3
S2
S4
ON
OFFRESET
Operationalpower supply
Alarm switch for automatic resetting (contact a)
CC.....Coil for makingY.....Relay for pumping preventionX.....Relay for self-sustaining on OFF sideLS1...Limit switch interlocking with camLS2...Limit switch interlocking with camLS3...Limit switch interlocking with OFF lock plateM....Motor
Ala
Internal structure
59
5
max. 19
8
110–
111
30 30
S4S2S1P2P1S4S2S1P2P1
40
80
8825
4586
3941
163158
24
61
78
86
130
50
120
30
9090
111
8660
90 Display hole(Charge/Discharge)
M4x0.7 screwor ø5
4-pole3-pole
Circuit breaker
Front plate
Power supply module
Operating circuitterminal board(M3.5 screw)
M8 screw
Display hole(ON/OFF/TRIP)
OFF lock plateInsulation barrier(removable)
Trip button
ON button
Automatic/manualselectionswitch
Manual handle
(Conductor thickness t=5 max.)
ø8.5
Conductor drilling for direct connection
Drilling plan Font-plate cut out
Operating circuitterminal cover(standard supply)
Center of the electrically operated
Center of the electrically operated
Remarks:The 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.The three-pole type only is available for the model NF125-CW, and the3-pole and 4-pole types only are available for the model NF125-SW.
R1
ø8.5
(Conductor thickness t=7 max.)
Conductor drilling for direct connection50
50
353778
79
176181
24
8645
11.5
35
8690
105140
144
165
708690105
126
35 35
8032
88
S4S2S1P2P1S4S2S1P2P1
max. 24
10
M4x0.7 screwor ø54-pole3-pole
Circuit breaker
Front plate
Power supply module
M8 bolt (Hex-soket)
Operating circuitterminal board(M3.5 screw)Display hole
(ON/OFF/TRIP)
OFF lock plateInsulation barrier(removable)
Trip button
ON button
Automatic/manualselectionswitch
Manual handle
Drilling plan Font-plate cut out
Operating circuitterminal cover(standard supply)
Center of the electrically operated
Center of the electrically operated
Display hole(Charge/Discharge)
R1
S4S2S1P2P1
8660
90
Display hole(ON/OFF/TRIP)
OFF lock plateInsulation barrier(removable)
Trip button
ON button
Automatic/manualselectionswitch
Manual handle
S4S2S1P2P1
86
130
50
120
30
9090
111
Center of the electrically operated
Display hole(Charge/Discharge)
Test button
25
4586
3941
163158
24
61
78
Front plate
Power supply module
M8 screw
Operating circuitterminal board(M3.5 screw)
Operating circuitterminal cover(standard supply)
110–
111
30 30
M4x0.7 screwor ø54-pole3-pole
Circuit breaker
Drilling plan
40
80
88
Font-plate cut out
Center of the electrically operated
max.19
8
ø8.5
(Conductor thickness t=5 max.)
Conductor drilling for direct connection
R1
● NF125-CW, NF125-SW, NF125-HW
● NF160-SW, NF160-HW, NF250-CW, NF250-SW, NF250-HW, MB225-SW
● NF125-SGW, NF125-HGW, NF160-SGW, NF160-HGW, NF250-SGW, NF250-HGW
● NV125-CW, NV125-SW, NV125-HW
● NV250-SEW, NV250-HEW
Front connection
Dimensions
(Bus t max=7)
Bus drilling for direct connection
max. 24
10
ø8.5
35
Breaker
4-pole3-pole Drilling planFont-plate cut out
Note.1.One AL(micro loads use)is used for the LED display for a trip indicator check.
2.2-pole breakers are 3-pole breakers with the central pole removed.
3.NF250-CW is available in 2-and 3-pole only.MB225-SW is available in 3-pole only.
Alarm switch AL(micro loads use)
105
708690
OPEN(TRIP)button
Breaker condition's indicator(ON/OFF)
MANUAL/AUTO switch
Electrical operation devicePower supply indicator LED(Red)
ON button
TRIP indicator LED(Yellow)
Insulating barrier(removable)
OFFlock plate
S4S2S1P2P1
140105
358690
Control circuit terminal Mounting screw(M3 tapping screw)
Center of MDS
Manual handle
144
165
100
100
S4S2S1P2P1
Hex.socket headM8 bolt
Control circuit terminal(M3.5 screw)
MDS base
33 31
15.5
4586 78
24
Terminal block for alarm switch AL connection (M4 screw) (with terminal cover)
Control circuit terminal cover
Front panel
MDS Module
61
158163
M4X0.7 screwor 5mm-dia. hole
126
35
R1
80
88
Center of MDS
32
(Bus t max=7)
Bus drilling for direct connection
max. 24
10
ø8.5
Note.1.One AL(micro loads use)is used for the LED display for a trip indicator check.
2.4-pole breakers are only NV250-SEW.
33 31
15.5
4586 78
24
61158163
Hex.socket headM8 bolt
Control circuit terminal(M3.5 screw)
MDS baseTerminal block for alarm switch AL connection (M4 screw) (with terminal cover)
Control circuit terminal cover
Front panel
MDS Module
35
Breaker
4-pole3-pole Drilling plan
M4X0.7 screwor 5mm-dia. hole
126
35
32
80
88
Font-plate cut out
R1
Center of MDS
Test button
140105
358690
144
165
100
100
Control circuit terminal Mounting screw(M3 tapping screw)
Center of MDS
Manual handle
S4S2S1P2P1
105
708690
Alarm switch AL(micro loads use)
Breaker condition's indicator(ON/OFF)
MANUAL/AUTO switch
Electrical operation devicePower supply indicator LED(Red)
TRIP indicator LED(Yellow)
Insulating barrier(removable)
OFFlock plate
OPEN(TRIP)button
ON button
S4S2S1P2P1
60
5. AccessoriesExternal Accessories
● NF400-CP, NF400-SP, NF400-SEP, NF400-HEP, NF400-REP Motor drive type (2)
● NF630-CP, NF630-SP, NF630-SEP, NF630-HEP, NF630-REP Motor drive type (2)
● NV400-CP, NV400-SP, NV400-SEP, NV400-HEP, NV400-REP Motor drive type (2)
● NF400-UEP (3-pole) Motor drive type (2)
Trip button
Insulating barrierCenter line of electrical operationdevice and breaker
Center line of breaker
Breaker Operating circuit terminalblock M3.5 screw
4-pole2, 3-pole
4-pole2, 3-pole
Drilling plan
120 70
231
194
257
16 4311
0
277
44
112
Remark: 2 pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
140231
44
44Conductor thickness t=8 max.
ø14M12 bolt
94.5195
255
44
8Breaker
M6tap or ø7
Center line of electrical operation device
168185196
22 2856
44
Trip button
Insulating barrierCenter line of electrical operation device and breaker
Center line of breaker
Breaker
Operating circuit terminal block M3.5 screw
Drilling plan
23470
120
277
297
257
110
110
112140231
44
127.578
144
Conductor thickness t=8 max.
ø14M12 bolt
47ø
7
ø12
.5
141191.5
292352
8Breaker
M6 tap or Ø7
Center line of electrical operation device
44
28
16
20
4343
ø7
ø12
.5
Trip button
Insulating barrierCenter line of electrical operationdevice and breaker
Center line of breaker
Breaker Operating circuitterminal block M3.5 screw
4-pole3-pole
4-pole3-pole
Drilling plan
120 70
23119
4
257
16 4311
0
277
44
112140231
44
44Conductor thickness t=8 max.
ø14M12 bolt
94.5195
255
44
8Breaker
M6tap or ø7
Center line of electrical operation device
168185196
22 2856
44
Test button
Insulating barrierCenter line of electrical operationdevice and breaker
Center line of breaker
Breaker
Operating circuit terminal blockM3.5 screw
4-pole2, 3-pole
2,3-pole
Drilling plan
120 70
243
87328
15
275
277
110
44
140
Remark: 2 pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
210231
70
44
Conductor thicknesst=8 max.
ø14M12 bolt
94.5195
255
44
8
Breaker
Neutral poleM6tap or ø7
Center line of electrical operation device
7035 40
210280
231
4-pole
70
Trip button
Front connection
61
5
● NF630-UEP (NF400-UEP 4-pole) Motor drive type (2)
● NF800-UEP Motor drive type (2)
● NF800-CEP, NF800-SDP, NF800-SEP, NF800-HEP, NF800-REP Motor drive type (2)
● NV630-CP, NV630-SP, NV630-SEP, NV630-HEP Motor drive type (2)
Insulating barrier
Center line of electrical operationdevice and breaker
Center line of breaker
Center line of breaker Center line of breaker
Breaker
Operating circuitterminal blockM3.5 screw
4-pole3-pole
Drilling plan
(NF400-UEP 4-pole)
87
328
15
87
Conductorthicknesst=8 max.
Conductor thicknesst=8 max.
ø14M12 bolt
ø14M12 bolt
Breaker
Neutral pole
M6 tapor ø7
Center line of electricaloperation device
Center line of electricaloperation device
Center line of electricaloperation device
120 70
23.5
110
277
Operating circuitterminal block M3.5 screw
Neutral pole
44
140210231
1440
4-pole3-pole
70
322
210280
231
3570
48
1648 11
0
35
322
290
140
290
210280
231
358141
191.5292
352
112
15
8
14397
ø14
ø14
ø727
5
70
ø7
6.5141
191.5292
352
112
15
6.5
14397
ø14
ø14
ø727
5
ø7
Trip button
Insulating barrierCenter line of electrical operationdevice and breaker
Center line of breaker
Breaker
Operating circuitterminal block M3.5 screw
4-pole3-pole
3-pole
Drilling plan
120 70
243
87328
15
275
277
110
44
140210231
70
44
Conductorthicknesst=8 max.
ø14M12 bolt
94.5195
255
44
8
Breaker
Neutralpole
Center line of electrical operation device
7035 40
210280
231
4-pole
70
Trip button
M6 tapor ø7Test
button
Trip button
M6 tapor ø7
Insulating barrierCenter line of electrical operationdevice and breaker
Center line of breaker
Breaker
Operating circuit terminalblock M3.5 screw
4-pole2, 3-pole
2, 3-pole
Drilling plan
120 70
243
87328
15
275
277
110
44
140
Remark: 2 pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
210231
70
46Conductorthicknesst=12 max.
ø14M12 bolt
94.5195
255
46
8
Breaker
Neutralpole
Center line of electrical operation device
7035 40
210280
231
4-pole
70
Trip buttonM6 tapor ø7
Insulating barrier
Center line of electrical operationdevice and breaker
Center line of breaker
Center line of breaker
Breaker
Operating circuitterminal blockM3.5 screw
4-pole3-pole
Drilling plan
87
328
15
87
Conductor thicknesst=8 max.
ø14M12 bolt
Breaker
Neutral pole
Center line of electricaloperation device
Center line of electricaoperation device
120 70
23.5
110
277
44
140210231
1440
4-pole3-pole
70
322
210280
231
3570
290
140
290
8143
191.5292
352
112
15
8
14364
ø14
ø14
ø7
275
ø7
Front connection
62
5. AccessoriesExternal Accessories
● NV800-SEP, NV800-HEP Motor drive type (2)
● NF1600-SS, NF1600-SSD Motor drive type (2)
● NF1250-UR Motor drive type (2)
● NF1000-SS, NF1250-SS, NF1000-SSD, NF1250-SSD Motor drive type (2)
Trip button
Test button
Insulating barrierCenter line of electrical operationdevice and breaker Breaker
Operating circuitterminal blockM3.5 screw
3-pole
3-pole
Drilling plan
120 70
110
243
277
44
14040
210231
14
70
46Conductor thicknesst=12 max.
ø14M12 bolt
94.5195
255
46
8
Breaker
M6 tapor ø7
87328
15
275
87
M8 screwor ø10
Bolt max.M10×65
Conductor thicknesst=6×width 75 max.ø11
375
203263
290
140231
69.5
Center line of electricaloperation device
20
70
Operating circuitterminal blockM3.5 screw
Neutral pole
Breaker
115
(185
.5)
3815
38
60
44210
6112
0
Drilling plan4-pole3-pole
70
304.5101.5
364.5
130
406
(185
.5)
55
35210280
Insulating barrier
Terminal block
Center line of electrical operationdevice and breaker
Center lineof breaker
Operating circuitterminal blockM3.5 screw
4-pole3-pole
Drilling plan
Conductor thickness t=8×2 max.
Bolt max.M12×50
ø13M12 bolt
Breaker
Neutral poleM8 screwor ø10
Center line of electricaloperation device
106
61
120
Insulating barrier
ø13M12 bolt
Terminal block
Operating circuitterminal blockM3.5 screw
44
140210240
43
13815
3280
406
4-pole3-pole
70
8080
566
375
51
22.5
15
144235
294
15 44
ø9.
5ø
17.5 70
106
61
120
44
70140
210310
43210
13
815
3280
406
8080
566
Insulating barrier
Center line of4-pole model
Center line of electricaloperation device and3-pole model
Operating circuitterminal blockM3.5 screw
Drilling plan
120 61
406
110
80
375
44
14043
13
70210(4-pole)
210(3-pole)
280(4-pole)
70
55Conductor thicknesst=8×2 max.
Bolt max.M12×50
ø13M12 bolt
140231
290
59
15
Breaker
Neutral pole
M8 screwor ø10
70
4-pole3-pole
328
15
Front connection
63
5
● NF1600-SSD (4-pole) Motor drive type (2)
● NF1600-SSD Motor drive type (2)
● NF1600-SS (4-pole) Motor drive type (2)
● NF1600-SS (3-pole) Motor drive type (2)
210
35
406
ø9.
5
M8 tapor ø10
ø11M10×50 bolt
ø17.
5
109
1854
15
269
81.5
over
160
unde
r 100
38
273
20
18.515
70
210
231
290 125Center line of electricaloperation device
38 1860
106 106
31870
Mounting angle
Mounting angleOperating circuitterminal blockM3.5 screw
Connectionallowance Conductor thickness
t=6×width 75 max.
Stud can be rotated 90°Breaker
280
20
44
61
120
Drilling plan4-pole
406
ø9.
5
36
M8 tapor ø10
ø11M10×50 bolt
ø17
.5
109
233
38 60
375
over
160
over
175
20
18.515
210
140 231
290 200
125 38
38 15
15 21270
Mounting angleMounting angleOperating circuit terminal block
M3.5 screw Connectionallowance
Conductor thicknesst=6×width 75 max.
Stud can be rotated 90° Breaker
44
61
120
Drilling plan3-pole
406
ø9.
5
M8 tapor ø10
ø11M10×50 bolt
ø17.
5
109
273
38 60
269
over
160
81.5
20
18.515
36
210
140 231
290 200
125 38
38 15
15 21270
Mounting angleMounting angleOperating circuit terminal blockM3.5 screw Connection
allowanceConductor thicknesst=6×width 75 max.
Stud can be rotated 90° Breaker
44
61
120
unde
r10
0
Drilling plan3-pole
210
35
406
ø9.
5
M8 tapor ø10
ø11M10×50 bolt
ø17
.5
109
15
375
over
160
over
175
38
233
20
18.515
70
210
231
290 125Center line of electricaloperation device
38 1860
106 106
31870
Mounting angle
Mounting angleOperating circuitterminal blockM3.5 screw
Connectionallowance Conductor thickness
t=6×width 75 max.
Stud is in horizontal direction.Stud can not be rotated 90°.
Breaker
280
44
61
120
Drilling plan4-pole
Rear connection
64
5. AccessoriesExternal Accessories
● Outside Dimension Diagram (Front connection, Rear connection, and Plug-in)
● Drilling Dimension Diagram (Front connection, Rear connection, and Plug-in)
Panel plate thickness(t1~3.2)
(Gap between the circuit breaker and the panel)
15Stroke
Center of circuit breaker
Center of mechanical interlock
Center of circuit breaker
Center of mechanical interlock
Machine this part according to the front plate drilling dimensions of the main breaker.
4ø (ø5.5 and ø7.5 countersunk (rear) (Note 1)); use M5×0.8 flat countersunk head screws to fix.
1.5
33
70
50
120 (Note 2)
A
22
31 15.5
44
13
63 (N
ote
3)
Notes: (1) When the panel plate thickness is 2.3 or more, prepare four holes (ø5.5 and ø9.5 countersunk (rear)).
(2) These are standard dimensions for 2- and 3-pole models, but can be altered upon request.
(3) The U series have different dimensions. Please contact us for details.
Remarks: (1) Please contact us for outside dimensions of other models of different specifications.
(2) These are not isolation-compatible.
Mechanicalinterlock
Breaker
A
50
DP
B
E
2244
31 15.5
C
Stroke
70
Panel thickness(t1~3.2mm)
Gap between paneland breaker
Differs with mainbreaker unit drilling plan.
Mounts to 4-5.5mm-dia hole,7.5mm-dia countersunk (rear)*2
Mechanicalinterlock
Breaker
Mechanical interlock
Drilling planFig.1 Fig.2 Fig.3
Drilling plan
External dimensions
Mechanicalinterlock
Breaker
70(100)
A
31(4
0)
15.5
(20)
C
50(80)
P
44(5
5)
22(3
0)
B
Mechanicalinterlock
Breaker
Panel thickness(t1.6~3.2mm)Stroke
1.5
Gap between paneland breaker
External dimensions
Differs with mainbreaker unit drilling plan.
Mounts to 4-5.5mm-dia hole,7.5mm-dia countersunk (rear)*2
( ) dimension are shown for NF1600-SS·NF1600-SSD
G
FFP
47.5 Stroke
94.5
45
P
Mechanical interlock
External dimensions
Drilling plan(breaker mount)
Breaker
Breaker
M6 screwsor 7mm-dia
Mechanical terminal mount
7. Mechanical Interlocks (MI)Table 5-33
Table 5-34
Front, Rear, Plug-in (panel mounting)
Breaker mounting (front)
S1. Above 400AF, use panel thickness t=1.6~3.2mm.S2. When the panel thickness is greater than t=2.3mm, use 4-5.5mm-dia 9.5mm dia countersunk (rear).
Numberof poles Front connection, Rear connection, Plug-in Dimension A mm
47.5
–
45
–
Direct mount oncircuit breaker
NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW 2PMI-05SW3
–
NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW, NV32-SW, NV63-CW/SW/HW, MB30-SW, MB50-CW/SW 3P MI-05SWFB3
NF63-SW/HW 4P MI-05SW4 –
NF125-CW/SW/HW 2PMI-05SW3
–
NF125-CW/SW/HW, NV125-CW/SW/HW, MB100-SW, NV125-RW
NF160-SW/HW, NF250-SW/HW, NV250-SW/HW/SEW/HEW
NF125-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW, NF160-SGW/HGW, NF250-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW
NF125-SGW/HGW/UGW, NF160-SGW/HGW, NF250-SGW/HGW/UGW
3P
4P
MI-1SWFB3
MI-1SW4 –
NF160-SW/HW, NF250-CW/SW/HW, NV250-CW/SW/HW, NV250-SEW/HEW, MB225-SW, NV250-RW
2P3P
MI-05SW3 MI-2SWFB3
MI-2GSWFB3
–
4P
3P
4P
MI-2SW4MI-05SW3
MI-2SW4
–
Panel moutingApplicable models
epyT F G P3BFPS4-IM 44 491 0913BFPS6-IM 07 342 062
epytrekaerB )mm(snoisnemiD
BCCM BCLEdradnatS laicepS
dradnatS dradnatSt A B D E .giF
epyT.giF
epyT P2 P3 P3 epyT P4 P3PER/PEH/PES/PS/PC-004FN PER/PEH/PES/PS/PC-004VN
3PS4-IM091
– 012 4PS4-IM 052
(✳ )2–
5.74 335.38
– 47
1.giF
2.giF
3BFPS4-IM
3.giF)P3(PEU-004FN – – 091 5.36 –
,PER/PEH/PES/PS/PC-036FNPER/PEH/PES/PDS/PEC-008FN
,PEH/PES/PS/PC-036VNPEH/PES-008VN 3PS6-IM
M-10SS3 220
315M-12UR3M-16SS3
022042
–
–
––
–––
4PS6-IM
MI-10SS4MI-12UR4MI-16SS4
092
02.3
92023624
5.74
5.745.74
65
33
7474
4.55 937.537.53
5.38–
–––
–––
–––
–––
473BFPS6-IM
,PEU-036FN,)P4(PEU-004FNPEU-008FN
NF1000-SS/SSD, NF1250-SS/SSDNF1250-URNF1600-SS/SSD
–
–––
– 022
– 052
06 –
✳ yficepS.1 )P(hctipgnitnuomrekaerbeht✳ ).mm2.3~6.1=tssenkcihtlenapesu,FA004evobA.mm2.3~1=t:egnarssenkcihtlenapelbasU(.)t(ssenkcihtlenapehtyficepsotdeenoN.2✳ nihtiwnoitaivednoisnemidCehtpeek,sledomFA008/036/004htiwsesoprupnoitalosiroF.3 ± .mm1✳ .sliatederomroferiuqnE.4
Mechanical interlock walking type (MI-W) for electrical operating:skrameR )FA004evobA(.relaedruoytlusnoC.redrootedamebnac
Pitch (P) ✳ 1
C(✳ 3)
Breaker mount(✳ 4)
● Front, Rear, Plug-in
● Table of Altered Dimensions
With two breakers, use a panel-mounted mechanical interlock for one-way only input.A breaker-mounting mechanical to mount on the breaker main unit can be made to order. Consult your dealer for more details.
65
5
CL
6
M4×0.7 screw
35
13
7
CLCL
Mounting hookfor IEC 35mm rail
Fig.2Fig.1 Fig.3
4
5
35
Adapter for IEC 35mm rail
8. Handle Lock Devices and Card HolderTable 5-35
Table 5-36
9. IEC 35mm Rail Mounting AdaptersTable 5-37
Notes: (1) HLF types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.(2) HL-S types are used for OFF-lock.
Remark: (1) Users are requested to prepare padlocks for HL and HL-S types. (25mm padlock for HL, and 35mm padlock for HL-S.)
Applicable models Number of poles Parts number Outline
NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HWNV32-SW, NV63-CW/SW/HW, MB30-SWMB50-CW/SW
DIN-05SW Fig.2
Fig.3
Fig.1
2P3P
NF125-CW/SW
NF30-CS, NV30-CS, MB30-CS
2P
2P, 3P
DIN-1SW2
DIN-03CS
3P
DIN-1SW3NF125-HW, NV125-CW/SW/HW, MB100-SW
2P3P
Description Lock cover (LC) Handle lock (HL) Handle lock (HL-S) (Note 2) OFF Lock with 3 Padlock Card holder
Appearance
NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW 2P
NF30-CS, NV30-CS, MB30-CS 3P
NF30-CS, MB30-CS 2P
LC-05SW
LC-03CS
(Note 1)
HLF-05SWHLN-05SW
HLS-05SW2P
—
——
NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW, NV32-SW, NV63-CW/SW/HWMB30-SW, MB50-CW/SW
3PHLS-05SW
NF63-SW/HW 4P
NF125-HW 2P
NF125-CW/SW 2P
LC-1SW
(Note 1)
HLF-1SWHLN-1SW
HLS-1SW2P
NF125-CW/SW/HW, NV125-CW/SW/HWMB100-SW, NV125-RW
3PHLS-1SW
NF125-SW/HW, NV125-SW/HW 4P
NF160-SW/HW, NF250-CW/SW/HW, NV250-CW/SW/HWNV250-SEW/HEW, MB225-SWNV250-RW
2P3P4P
LC-2SW
(Note 1)HLF-2SWHLN-2SW
HLS-2SW
NF125-SGW/HGW, NF160-SGW/HGW, NF250-SGW/HGWNF125-RGW/UGW, NF250-RGW/UGW 3P, 4P LC-2GSW
HLF-2GSW (Note 1)
HLN-2GSW
HL-05FH
HLS-2GSW HLF3-2GSW
tcudorP )TH(eldnaH )LH(kcoleldnaH )S-LH(kcoleldnaH redlohdraC
epytrekaerB
PC-004VN,PC-004FN TH - PC4 LH - C4S4-SLH
3.oNP-HC
PEU/PER/PEH/PES/PS-004FNPER/PEH/PES/PS-004VN
TH
HT-10SS
- PS4 LH - S4
)P3(PEU-004FN U4-SLH
)P4(PEU-004FNPEU/PER/PEH/PES/PS/PC-036FN
PEH/PES/PS/PC-036VNPEU/PER/PEH/PES/PDS/PEC-008FN
PEH/PES-008VN
NF1000-SS/SSDNF1250-SS/SSDNF1250-URNF1600-SS/SSD
HLS-6SP (✳ 1)HLS-6UP (✳ 3)
:skrameR.remotsucehtybdedivorpebtsumS-LHdnaLHrofskcoldaP.1 ✳ 1. Must be ordered with breaker.
✳ 2. The HL without padlock can be used as a lock cover (LC). ✳ 3. Applicable types are NF400-UEP (4P) and NF630/800-UEP (3P, 4P).
—
P (✳ 1·2)P (✳ 1)
HL (✳ 1)
P (✳ 1·2)
P (✳ 1)
CH-P No.5
8
100
35
1
3
Adapter for IEC 35mm rail
66
67
2-pole
3-pole
ALLeft-sidemounting
Right-sidemounting
Operating handle
AXLead wiredirection
NF30-CSMB30-CS
Type NF30-CS
■ Operating Characteristics
■ Internal Accessories
■ External Accessories ■ Standard Attached Parts(Front connection)
■ Temperature Characteristics
Note: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
Remark: (1) Standard lead wire is drawn from side. However, lead wire drawn by load can beproduced upon request.
(2) refer to page 40.
Mounting screw: M4×0.7×20 2pcs
Rat
ed b
reak
ing
capa
city
(kA
)
Rated current In (A) at ambienttemperature 30°C
Number of poles 32
IEC60947-2(Icu/Ics)
AC
DC
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
Suitability for isolation
Utilization category
Reverse connection
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV)
Pollution degree
500
—
—
1.5/1.5
1.5/1.5
2.5/2
—
—
A
—
4
2
Type name NF30-CS
Frame size 30
Series C series
3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30
AC
690V
500V
415V
380V
240V
250V
32 (for single phase)
MB30-CS
(2), (3.2), 4, (5),6.3, (8), 10, 16
1.4, 2.5, 4, 7.1,10, 16, 25, 32
Type NF30-CSMB30-CS
Operating Characteristics
Max.
Min.
1 1.30.01s
0.02s
0.04s
0.1s
0.2s
0.4s
0.6s
1s
2s
4s
6s
10s
20s
30s40s
1min
2min
4min
6min
10min
20min
40min
1h
2h
3h
0.06s
2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 40 50 70 100
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
×100% of rated current
Ambient temperature (°C)
Ope
ratin
g tim
ech
ange
rat
e (%
)
Rat
ed a
mbi
ent
7080
-5 0 10 20 30 40 50
100
150
200
250
300
Small terminal cover 2pcs Only MB30-CS
56
66
66
66
Term
inal
cov
er Small
Large
Rear
Skeleton
TCS-03CS (*1)
TCL-03CS (*1)
BTC-03CS (*1)
TTC-03CS (*1)
HL-05FH
LC03CS
DIN-03CS
(TC-S)
(TC-L)
(BTC)
(TTC)
(HL)
(LC)
(DIN)
Handle lock
Lock cover
Rail mounting adapters
Accessories Type name Referencepage
6. Characteristics and DimensionsMolded-Case Circuit Breakers and Motor Breakers
6
68
Front connection
Rear connection
Lead-wire Terminal block (LT)
IEC Rail Mounting Adapter
4723.5
67.545
64 54
ø8.
5
10
14.5
12.5 (max.)
76.5
96
Mtg. hole M5 screw
Bus t max. =3
Bus drilling fordirect connection
2-pole 3-pole
2-pole 3-poleDrilling plan
ø5
28
49
523
67
6
ø5.5
84
23.5
BreakerM4 × 0.7 taps or ø5
2-pole 3-pole
2-pole 3-pole Drilling plan
8476.5
23.5
Breaker
ø14
M4 × 0.7 tapsor ø5
76.5
Mtg plat t max. =3.2
Insulating tube
5
38.5
58.5
8
45 (
min
)
25 (
min
)
Breaker mtgM4 × 0.7 screwM6 screw
47
23.5
Front-plate cutout
1mm clearance oneach side of handle
Breaker
R2
3-pole
2-pole
2018
20
55
35 100
431
52
55
58
70
35mm IEC-rail adapterfor installation
Installation utensilfor 35mm IEC-rail
2-pole 3-pole
5
63
7.5
2
25.5
8
18.5
9.5
80.5
40.5
2
22
Terminal cover (optional)M3.5 self-lifting terminal
77.5
9.5
69
6. Characteristics and DimensionsMolded-Case Circuit Breakers and Motor Breakers
2-pole
3-pole
AL
Left-sidemounting
Right-sidemounting
Breaker handle
AX
SHT or UVT
Lead wiredirection
Type nameType name
F05SW (*1)F 51
53
50
Ml Ml-05SW3 (*1) 65S S05SW
V V05SWF
R
Small TC-S TCS-05SW3W (*1)
56
66
Large TC-L TCL-05SW3W (*1)
Skeleton TTC TTC-05SW3 (*1)
Rear BTC BTC-05SW3W (*1)
LC LC-05SW
Plug-in PTC PTC-05SW3W (*1)(*2)HL HLN-05SW
HLF-05SW
DIN-05SW 66
HL-S HLS-05SW (*1)
NF32-SWNF63-SWMB30-SWMB50-SW
■ Operating Characteristics
■ Internal Accessories
■ External Accessories ■ Standard Attached Parts(Front connection)
■ Temperature Characteristics
Notes: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.(*2) HLF types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.
Remark: (1) refer to page 40.
Note: These are supplied with NF63-SW, NF63-HW, and MB50-SW models.
Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (2 and 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)
(Note)
Insulation barrier: (2P: 1pc, 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
NF63-CWNF63-HWMB50-CW
Min.
Max.
×100% of Rated current
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
NF63-CW NF63-SW NF63-HWNF32-SW
AC use (IEC60947-2)
4h
2h
1h
30min 20min 14min 10min
6min 4min
2min
1min
30s20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 400.01s
NF63-CW NF63-SW NF63-HWNF32-SW
DC use (IEC60947-2)
Min.
Max.
×100% of Rated current
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
4h
2h
1h
30min 20min 14min 10min
6min 4min
2min
1min
30s20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 400.01s
Min.
Max.
(IEC60947-2)
MB50-CW MB50-SWMB30-SW
×100% of Rated current
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
4h
2h
1h
30min 20min 14min 10min
6min 4min
2min
1min
30s20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 400.01s
Rate
d am
bien
t
Ambient temperature (°C)
Ope
ratin
g tim
ech
ange
rat
e (%
) 300250
200
150
100
8070
6050403020100
300250
200
150
100
8070
6050403020100–10
Ter
min
al c
over
Rat
ed s
hort
-circ
uit
brak
ing
capa
city
(kA
)
Rated current In (Amp.)
Number of poles 32∗ 1
–2.5/1
IEC60947-2(Icu/Ics)
AC(50/60Hz)
DC
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
Suitability for isolation
Utilization category
Reverse connection (terminals unmarked)
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV)
Pollution degree
600
–
2.5/1
2.5/1
5/2
7.5/4
●
A
●
6
2
Type name NF32-SW
3 4 6 1016 20 25
32
690V
500V
440V
400V
230V
250V
32∗ 1
– –2.5/1
600
–
2.5/1
2.5/1
5/2
7.5/4
●
A
●
6
2
NF63-CW
3 4 6 1016 20 25 32
40 50 63
2∗ 1 3 4
7.5/4
600
–
7.5/4
7.5/4
7.5/4
15/8
●
A
●
6
2
NF63-SW
3 4 6 1016 20 25 32
40 50 63
–
2∗ 1 3 4
7.5/4
690
2.5/1
7.5/4
10/5
10/5
25/13
●
A
●
6
2
NF63-HW
10 16 2025 32 40
50 63
8 10 1216 25 32
40 45
3
500
–
–
2.5/1
5/2
7.5/4
–
●
A
●
6
2
MB30-SW
0.8 1.2 1.42 2.5 4 5
7.1 8 10 12 16 25
3
500
–
–
2.5/1
5/2
7.5/4
–
●
A
●
6
2
MB50-CW
0.8 1.21.4 2 2.54 5 7.1
3
500
–
–
7.5/4
7.5/4
15/8
–
●
A
●
6
2
MB50-SW
Accessories Accessories
Mechanicalinterlock
IEC 35mm railmounting adapters
(option)
Referencepage
Referencepage
Operating handle
Handle lock device
— —
✽ 1: Types of DC specifications can be produced upon request.
Type NF32-SW
6
70
Front connection
Rear connection
Plug-in
Drilling plan4-pole3-pole2-pole
M4×0.7 tapsor 5mm dia.hole
Breaker
4-pole3-pole2-pole
Conductor drillingfor direct connection
(Conductor thickness t=5 max.)
φ5.5(6.5mm-diameter for 63A)
Screw terminal
Applicablewire size:1.6mm-dia.to 22mm2
M5×0.8 screw(M6 for 63A)
Neutral pole
Trip button
Insulation barrier(removable)
Mounting hole
50
22
25
50
50
75
25
75
100
5013
0
111
84
24
45
φ8.5
61
68
724
90
12.5 max.
6
2525
111
φ4.5
2-pole
min.
M4×0.7 tapsor 5mm-dia.hole
Breaker
Drilling plan
4-pole3-pole
M4×0.7 screwfor mounting breaker
M6 screw
Insulation tube
Mounting panelt=3.2max
φ14
111
25
25
75
25
5025
50
6
4268
72
8
27
111
Front-panel cutout
1.0mm clearance on each side ofthe handle frame.
Breaker
4-pole
3-pole
2-pole
50
22.5
70
52R1
φ6.5
Details of terminal
M6 screw
M5×0.8terminal block mounting screw
Plug-in terminal block
Mounting panel
Center line ofbreaker body
Conductor drillingfor direct connection2-pole
4-pole3-pole
Cutout and drilling plan
4-pole3-pole2-pole6mm-dia.hole oror M5×0.8 taps
Breaker (plug-in terminal block)
11
54
5454
80
57 82
25
107
50
50
80
75
25
105
111
55
25
16.5 max.
7
3
180
83.5
85
30
21
89
5.5 15.5
10
71
NF125-CWNF125-HW
NF125-SWMB100-SW
Remark: (1) Only AC characteristics are available for the model MB100-SW.
∗ 1: When wired as shown at the bottom of page 13, 3-pole models can be used for up to 400 V DC, and 4-pole models for up to 500 V DC.
F F1SW (*1) 51
53
50
Ml Ml-05SW3 (*1) 65S S1SW
V V1SW (*2)
R R1SW
Small TC-S TCS-1SW3W (*1)
56
54 Large TC-L TCL-1SW3W (*1)
Skeleton TTC TTC-1SW3 (*1)
Rear BTC BTC-1SW3W (*1)
LC LC-1SW
66Pulg-in PTC PTC-1SW3W (*1)
(*4)HL
HLF-1SW
DIN-1SW3 (*1) 66
57
HLN-1SW
HL-S HLS-1SW (*1)(*4)
MDS-NF1SWE (*3)
2-pole
3, 4-pole
AL AX
■ Operating Characteristics
■ Internal Accessories ■ Ambient Compensating Curve
■ External Accessories ■ Standard Attached Parts(Front connection)
Rat
ed s
hort
-circ
uit
brak
ing
capa
city
(kA
)
Rated current In (Amp.)
Number of poles 32 2 3 342 3 4
IEC60947-2(Icu/Ics)
AC(50/60Hz)
DC ∗ 1
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
Suitability for isolation
Utilization category
Reverse connection (terminals unmarked)
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV)
Pollution degree
600
–
7.5/4
10/5
10/5
30/15
7.5/4
–
–
7.5/4
15/8
–
40/20
15/8 40/20
40/20
–
15/8
– –
–––
●
A
●
8
3
●
A
●
8
3
●
A
●
8
3
●
A
●
8
3
690
8/4
18/9
25/13
30/15
50/25
690
10/5
30/15
50/25
50/25
100/50
500
–
–
25/13
30/15
50/25
–
–
–
Type name NF125-CW NF125-SW NF125-HW MB100-SW
(12.5) (16)(25) 32 (40)
45 63 7190 100
50 63 80100 125
16 20 32 4050 63 80
100
16 20 32 4050 63 80100 125
690V
500V
440V
400V
230V
250V
400V
500V
Left-sidemounting
Right-sidemounting
Operating handle
SHT or UVT
Lead wiredirection
Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (2 and 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)
(Note)
Insulation barrier: (2P: 1pc, 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
Type name Type name
Ter
min
al c
over
(IEC 60947-2)MB100-SW 40A~100ANF125-HW 40A~100ANF125-SW 40A~100ANF125-CW 50A~100A
(40A~50A)
(60A~100A)Max.
Max.
breaking time
Max. total
AC
DC
Instantaneous tripTime-delay trip
Min.
×100% of Rated current
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
4h
2h
1h
30min 20min 14min 10min 6min 4min
2min
1min
30s20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 500.01s
Min.
(IEC 60947-2)NF125-SW 125ANF125-CW 125A
Max.
breaking timeMax. total
AC
DC
Instantaneous tripTime-delay trip
×100% of Rated current ×100% of Rated current
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
4h
2h
1h
30min 20min 14min 10min 6min 4min
2min
1min
30s20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 50 1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 500.01s
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
4h
2h
1h
30min 20min 14min 10min 6min 4min
2min
1min
30s20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
×100% of Rated current
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
4h
2h
1h
30min 20min 14min 10min 6min 4min
2min
1min
30s20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 700.01s
130
120
110
100
90
800 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
Rat
ed a
mbi
ent
–10
Cur
rent
rat
ing
(%)
Accessories AccessoriesReferencepage
Referencepage
Operating handle
Handle lock device
Mechanicalinterlock
IEC 35mm railmounting adapters
Electricaloperation device
Notes: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.(*2) Attach the letter "F" to the end of designation for a fixed type.(*3) Specify the working voltage. An order should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.(*4) HLF and HLS types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.
Remark: (1) refer to page 40.
Note: These are supplied with NF125-SW, NF125-HW, and MB100-SW models.
AC
DC
Min.
breaking time
Max. total
Max.
(IEC 60947-2)NF125-HW 32A
MB100-SW 32ANF125-SW 32A
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip
DC
AC
Min.
breaking timeMax. total
(IEC 60947-2)MB100-SW 12.5A~25ANF125-HW 16A~20ANF125-SW 16A~20A
Max.
Instantaneous tripTime-delay trip
Type NF125-CW
6. Characteristics and DimensionsMolded-Case Circuit Breakers and Motor Breakers
6
72
Front connection
Rear connection
Plug-in
M5×0.8Terminal blockmounting screw
4-pole
4-pole
2-pole 3-pole2-pole
3-pole
Drilling plan
Plug-in terminal block
Mounting plateBreaker (plug-in terminal block)
6mm-dia. holeor M5×0.8 taps
Details of terminal
M8 screw
Conductor drillingfor direct connection
134
φ8.5
12
16.5 max.
65
30
90
125
60
95
205.5
30
21
11
190
98
67 97
30 60
127
5656
9454
30
12.5
LCLCCL
LC
89
LC
R1
R1
2-pole
Breaker
52
86
3-pole
28
4-pole
57
Front-panel cutout
1.0mm clearance on each sideof the handle frame.
CL
CL
LC
LC
Mounting base11
0-11
1
4-pole
30
112
30
90
2-pole
6
3-pole
4-pole
102
52
15
72
68
8.5
2.5
15
54.5
104.5
15
2.5
16
112
60
5
30
60
30
3-pole2-pole
M4×0.7 taps or5mm-dia. hole
Mounting platet=3.2 max.
Stud rotatableby 90°
Connectionallowance
M8 bolt
Insulationtube
M4×0.7breakermounting screw
Breaker
Drilling plan
φ18
CLCL
CL
CL
LC
4-pole
110-
111
30
130
112
4-pole
120
90
30
Neutralpole
50
60
30
90
60
22
24
84 50
68
61
45
724
90
φ8.5
8
19 max.
30
3-pole
3-pole
2-pole
2-pole
Tripbutton
Insulation barrier(removable)
Mounting hole
Conductor drillingfor direct connection
(Conductor thickness t=5 max.)
Breaker
Drilling plan
M4X0.7 tapsor 5mm-dia. hole
M8 screw
Solderless terminalfor wire size
14~2/0AWG CU/AL
Wire connection
LC
LC
LC LCLC
LCLC
CL
Remark: 2-pole model of NF125-HW are 3-pole model with the central pole removed.
73
6. Characteristics and DimensionsMolded-Case Circuit Breakers and Motor Breakers
NF250-CWNF250-HWNF160-HW
NF250-SWNF160-SWMB225-SW
■ External Accessories ■ Standard Attached Parts(Front connection)
F F2SW 51
53
50
54
Ml Ml-05SW3 (*1) 65S S2SW
V V2SW (*3)
R R2SW
Small TC-S TCS-2SW3W (*1)
56
57
Large TC-L TCL-2SW3W (*1)
Skeleton TTC TTC-2SW3 (*1)
Rear BTC BTC-2SW3W (*1)
LC LC-2SW
66Plug-in PTC PTC-2SW3W (*1)
(*4)HL
HLF-2SW
MDS-NF2SWE (*2)
HLN-2SW
HL-S HLS-2SW
*1: When wired as shown at the bottom of page 13, 3-pole models can be used for up to 400 V DC, and 4-pole models for up to 500 V DC.
Rat
ed s
hort
-circ
uit
brak
ing
capa
city
(kA
)
Rated current In (Amp.)
Number of poles 2 3 2 3 4
IEC60947-2(Icu/Ics)
AC(50/60Hz)
DC
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
Suitability for isolation
Utilization category
Reverse connection (terminals unmarked)
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV)
Pollution degree
600
–
10/5
15/8
18/9
35/18
–
●
A
●
6
2
Type name NF250-CW
125 150 175200 225 250
690
–
15/8
25/13
30/15
50/25
15/8
●
A
●
6
2
NF250-SW
125 150 175200 225 250
690V
500V
440V
400V
230V
250V
400V
500V
10/5 15/8– –
– 10/5 – –
15/8–
2 3 4
690
5/3
30/8
50/13
50/13
100/25
40/20
●
A
●
6
2
NF250-HW
125 150 175200 225 250
3
500
–
–
25/13
30/15
50/25
–
–
–
●
A
●
6
2
MB225-SW
125 150 175200 225
40/20 –
– –
40/20–
2 3 4
690
5/3
30/8
50/13
50/13
100/25
40/20
●
A
●
6
2
NF160-HW
40/20 –
– –
40/20–
2 3 4
690
–
15/8
25/13
30/15
50/25
15/8
●
A
●
6
2
NF160-SW
125 150 160 125 150 160
15/8 –
– –
15/8–
■ Operating Characteristics
NF160-HWNF160-SWMB225-SW
NF250-HWNF250-SWNF250-CW
time
Max.
Max. total
Instantaneous trip
breaking
Min.
Time-delay trip
×100% of Rated current
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
4h
2h
1h
30min 20min 14min 10min 6min 4min
2min
1min
30s20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 400.01s
Cur
reny
rat
ing
(%)
Rat
ed a
mbi
ent
–10 10 20 30 40 50 6080
90
100
110
120
130
Ambient temperature (°C)(rated ambient 40°C)
0
Ter
min
al c
over
Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (2 and 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)
Insulation barrier: (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
AL AX
■ Internal Accessories
Left-sidemounting
Right-sidemounting
Operating handle
SHT or UVT
Lead wiredirection
■ Ambient Compensating Curve
Notes: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.(*2) Specify the working voltage. An order of MB225-SW should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.(*3) Attach the letter "F" to the end of designation for a fixed type.(*4) HLF types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.
Type nameType nameAccessories Accessories
Mechanicalinterlock
Referencepage
Referencepage
Operating handle
Handle lock device
Electricaloperation device
125~225A DC
125~225A AC250A DC
250A AC
Type NF250-CW
Remark: (1) Only AC characteristics are available for the model MB225-SW.(2) refer to page 40.
6
74
Front connection
Rear connection
Plug-in
4-pole3-pole
φ9M8 bolt
Stud attachable in thisderection only
105
142
54 8058
.558
.5
Breaker (Terminal block)
Drilling plan
Con
nect
ion
al
low
ance
Insulating barrier
M6Terminal blockmounting screw
φ7
Plug-in terminal block
22
15
70
107
70
14
6
153
70
20
2834
.514
4
32
18
200
86
Mounting plate
3-pole
4-pole
100
52
32.5
Breaker
1mm clearanceon each sideof handle
Front-plate cutout
R1
Breaker
4-pole3-pole
144
126
35
105
35
70
105
6
8
3-pole
4-pole
Insulatingtube
M4×0.7taps
or φ5
Drilling plan106
71
72
68
ø24
M4×0.7breakermountingscrew
φ9M8 bolt
Connectionallowance
Insulatingtube
Stud can berotated 90°
Mounting plate t max.=3.2
35
70
144
20
22
15
15
30
125200
175A 14 95mm2
250A 70 125mm2
Wire connection
Solderless terminalfor wire size
4-pole3-pole
Neutralpole
4-pole3-pole
144
165
100
100
35
105
140
126
35φ8.5
ø4.
5
(Hex-soket)
M4×0.7 tapsor φ5
Drilling plan
Breaker
M8 bolt
(Bus t max.=7)
Bus drilling fordirect connection
Trip button
Mounting hole
Insulating barrier(removable)
35
φ8.5
10
23 max.22
70
24
92
4 72
45
68
61
50102
105
Remarks: 1. 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.2. Only 2- and 3-pole models are available for the model of NF250-CW, and only 3-pole models are available
for the model of MB225-SW.
75
AL AX F 51
53
50
Ml 65
56
S
V Small TC-S
57
54 Large TC-L
Skeleton TTC
Rear BTC
LC
Plug-in PTC
(*2)
HL66
66
HL-S
NF250-SGWNF160-SGWNF125-SGW
NF250-HGWNF160-HGWNF125-HGW
Ml-05SW3 (*1)
TCS-2GSW3W (*1)
TCL-2GSW3W (*1)
TTC-2GSW3 (*1)
BTC-2GSW3W (*1)
PTC-2GSW3W (*1)
MDS-NF2GSWE(*4)
F2GSW
S2GSW
V2GSW (*3)
R R2GSW
LC-2GSW
HLN-2GSW
HLF-2GSW
HLS-2GSW
Ra
ted
sh
ort
-circu
itbra
king c
apaci
ty (
kA)
Ra
ted
sh
ort
-circu
itbra
king c
apaci
ty (
kA)
Rated current In (Amp.)
Number of poles
IEC60947-2(Icu/Ics)
AC(50/60Hz)
DC ∗ 1
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
Suitability for isolation
Utilization category
Reverse connection (terminals unmarked)
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV)
Pollution degree
Type name
690V
500V
440V
400V
230V
300V
500V
600V
690
8/8
30/30
36/36
36/36
85/85
NF160-SGWRT
2 3 4
20/20
– 20/20
– 20/20
–
–
●
A
●
8
3
125–160
690
8/8
30/30
36/36
36/36
85/85
NF250-SGWRT
125–160,160–250
2 3 4
20/20
– 20/20
– 20/20
–
–
●
A
●
8
3
690
20/20
50/50
65/65
75/75
100/100
NF250-HGWRT
125–160160–250
2 3 4
40/40
– 40/40
– 40/40
–
–
●
A
●
8
3
690
8/8
30/30
36/36
36/36
85/85
–
–
–
NF250-SGWRE
125–250
3 4
●
A
●
8
3
690
20/20
50/50
65/65
75/75
100/100
–
–
–
NF250-HGWRE
125–250
3 4
●
A
●
8
3
690
8/8
30/30
36/36
36/36
85/85
–
–
–
NF160-SGWRE
80–160
3 4
●
A
●
8
3
Rated current In (Amp.)
Number of poles
IEC60947-2(Icu/Ics)
AC(50/60Hz)
DC ∗ 1
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
Suitability for isolation
Utilization category
Reverse connection (terminals unmarked)
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV)
Pollution degree
690
20/20
50/50
65/65
75/75
100/100
Type name NF160-HGWRT
690V
500V
440V
400V
230V
300V
500V
600V
2 3 4
40/40
– 40/40
– 40/40
–
–
●
A
●
8
3
690
20/20
50/50
65/65
75/75
100/100
–
–
–
NF160-HGWRE
80–160125–160
3 4
●
A
●
8
3
690
8/8
30/30
36/36
36/36
85/85
NF125-SGWRT
16–25, 25–40,40–63, 63–100,
80–125
16–25, 25–40,40–63, 63–100,
80–125
16–32, 32–63,63–100, 75–125
16–32, 32–63,63–100, 75–125
2 3 4
20/20
– 20/20
– 20/20
–
–
●
A
●
8
3
690
20/20
50/50
65/65
75/75
100/100
NF125-HGWRT
2 3 4
40/40
– 40/40
– 40/40
–
–
●
A
●
8
3
690
8/8
30/30
36/36
36/36
85/85
–
–
–
NF125-SGWRE
3 4
●
A
●
8
3
690
20/20
50/50
65/65
75/75
100/100
–
–
–
NF125-HGWRE
3 4
●
A
●
8
3
■ Operating Characteristics
■ Internal Accessories ■ External Accessories
Ter
min
al c
over
Left-sidemounting
Right-sidemounting
Operating handle
SHT or UVT Lead wire direction
×100% of Rated current
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
4h
2h
1h
30min 20min 14min 10min
6min 4min
2min
1min
30s20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 400.01s
×100% of Rated current
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
4h
2h
1h
30min 20min 14min 10min
6min 4min
2min
1min
30s20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 400.01s
×100% of Rated current
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
4h
2h
1h
30min 20min 14min 10min
6min 4min
2min
1min
30s20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 400.01s
130
120
110
100
90
800 10 20 30 40 50 60
(rated ambient 40°C)Ambient temperature (°C)
Mounting screw : M4 × 0.7 × 73 (4pcs)Insulation barrier : (2P : 2pcs, 3P : 4pcs, 4P : 6pcs)
Rat
ed a
mbi
ent
Cur
rent
rat
ing
(%)
–10
RT type RE type
Ambient temperature (°C)
10 20 30 40 50 60–10
130
120
110
100
70
80
90
Der
atin
g of
Loa
d cu
rren
t (%
)
0
Rat
ed a
mbi
ent
∗ 1: Use either 2-pole. When wired as shown at the bottom of page 13, 3-pole models can be used for up to 500 V DC, and 4-pole models for up to 600V DC.
■ Ambient Compensating Curve
Remark: (1) refer to page 40.
Type nameAccessories
Mechanicalinterlock
Referencepage Type nameAccessories Reference
page
Operating handle
Handle lock device
OFF Lock with 3 Padlock HLF3-2GSW Electricaloperation device
Notes:(*1) The designation depends
on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
(*2) HLF types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.
(*3) Attach the letter “F ” to the end of designation for a fixed type.
(*4) Specify the working voltage.
Instantaneous tripcurrent ratio
DC x In (%)
AC x In (%)
1300±2601000±200
IEC 60947-2
AC
DC
16-25A (Rated current In=25A)NF125-SGW/HGW 25-40A (Rated current In=40A)
Min.
breakingMax. total
Max.
time
Thermal-Adjustable types
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip
AC x In (%)1000±200
Instantaneous tripcurrent ratio
DC x In (%)1300±260
IEC 60947-2
AC
DC
Min.
breakingMax. total
Max.
time
NF125-SGW/HGW 63-100A (Rated current In=100A) 40-63A (Rated current In=63A)
Thermal-Adjustable types
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip
Instantaneous trip adjustmentrange
Positionof notch
468
10
400±80600800
1000±200
AC x In (%)
520±104
DC x In (%)
78010401300±260
(Adjustable range)
(Adjustable range)DC
AC
IEC 60947-2NF125-SGW/HGW 80-125A (Rated current In=125A)NF160-SGW/HGW 125-160A (Rated current In=160A)NF250-SGW/HGW 160-250A (Rated current In=250A)
time
Max.
Max. totalbreaking
Min.
Thermal-Adjustable types
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip
■ Standard Attached Parts (Front connection)
Type NF250-SGW
±15%
STD pickup current IS
STD operating time TS
Ir × (2-2.5-3-3.5-4 -5-6-7-8-10)
(at 200%)
LTD operating time TL
0.06±0.02s0.1±0.03s
0.2±0.04s0.3±0.06s
Pre-alarmpickup current IPIr × (0.70-0.75 -0.8-0.85-0.9 -0.95-1.0) ± 10%
12-60-80-100s ± 20%
Pre-alarm operating time TP
TLTP= 2 ± 20%
(at 200%)
Max.total breaking time
In × (4~14) ±15%INST pickup current Il
0.01s
0.02s
0.05s
0.1s
0.2s
0.5s
1s
2s
5s
10s
20s
1min
30s
2min
4min6min
10min
20min30min
1h
2h
4h
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
0.6 0.7 4020151065 7 3042 31.31
× 100% of Current setting
Note) Instantaneous tripping current (× 100% of In)
NF125-SGW NF125-HGWNote)Current setting Ir Rated current In16~ 32A32~ 63A63~ 100A75~ 125A
32A63A
100A125A
(Adjustable)
Electric types
(at 200%)
± 20%2
TP = TL
Pre-alarm operating time TP
12-60-80-100s ± 20%
Ir × (0.70-0.75 -0.8-0.85-0.9 -0.95-1.0) ± 10%
Pre-alarmpickup current IP
0.3 ± 0.06s0.2 ± 0.04s
0.1 ± 0.03s0.06 ± 0.02s
In × (4~14) ± 15%
LTD operating time TL
(at 200%)
Ir × (2-2.5-3-3.5-4 -5-6-7-8-10) ± 15%
STD operating time TS
INST pickup current Il
STD pickup current IS
Max.total breaking time
Note) Instantaneous tripping current (× 100% of In)
1 1.3 32 4
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
3075 6 10 15 20 400.70.6
NF250-SGW NF250-HGW
Note)Current setting Ir Rated current In 125~250A 250A (Adjustable)
Electric types
× 100% of Current setting
4h
2h
1h
30min20min
10min
6min4min
2min
30s
1min
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
STD pickup current IS
STD operating time TS
Ir × (2-2.5-3-3.5-4 -5-6-7-8-10)±15%
(at 200%)
LTD operating time TL
0.06±0.02s0.1±0.03s
0.2±0.04s0.3±0.06s
Pre-alarmpickup current IPIr × (0.70-0.75 -0.8-0.85-0.9 -0.95-1.0) ±10%
12-60-80-100s ±20%
Pre-alarm operating time TP
TLTP=2
± 20%
(at 200%)
Max.total breaking time
In × (4~14) ±15%INST pickup current Il
Note) Instantaneous tripping current (× 100% of In)
0.01s
0.02s
0.05s
0.1s
0.2s
0.5s
1s
2s
5s
10s
20s
1min
30s
2min
4min6min
10min
20min30min
1h
2h
4h
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
0.6 0.7 4020151065 7 3042 31.31
× 100% of Current setting
Note)Current setting Ir Rated current In80~160A 160A (Adjustable)
NF160-SGW NF160-HGW
Electric types
6. Characteristics and DimensionsMolded-Case Circuit Breakers
6
76
Front connection
Rear connection
Plug-in
Remark: 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
Mounting plate
4530Stud can berotated 90°
5454
9466
4-pole
3-pole
110
1048
103
M8 bolt(Hex-soket)12 96
4
4854
.514
4
120
15
200
4-pole3-poleø9 M8bolt
105
142
Drilling plan
Con
nect
ion
al
low
ance
Insulating barrier(removable)
M6Terminal blockmounting screw
Breaker (Terminal block)
φ7
Plug-in terminal block
107
70
70
20
86
3-pole
4-pole
100
52
32.5
Breaker
1mm clearanceon each sideof handle
Front-panel cutout
R1
35
90
86
Breaker
4-pole3-pole
144
126
35
105
35
70
105
6
8
3-pole
4-pole
Insulatingtube
M4×0.7tapsor φ5
Drilling plan
106
71
φ24
M4×0.7breakermountingscrew
φ9M8 bolt
Connectionallowance
Insulating tube
Stud can berotated 90°
Mounting plate t max.=3.2
70
144
2022
15
15
Hex-socket set screwWire connection
Solderless terminalfor wire size2.5 185mm2
10
6.1
2235
24 max.
110
90
86
79
63
112
4-pole3-pole
Neutralpole
4-pole3-pole
144
165
5050
35
105
140
126
35φ8.5
(Hex-soket)
φ4.5
M4×0.7 tapsor φ5
Drilling plan
BreakerM8 bolt
(Bus t max.=7)
Bus drilling fordirect connection
Tripbutton
Mounting hole
Insulating barrier(removable)
φ8.5
10
22
70
24
4
50
105
77
F—
S
V 50
54
65
Small TC-S
56
Large TC-L
Rear BTC
—
Skeleton TTC
Plug-in PTC
LC
(*2)HL
HL-S
MI
66
TCS-2GSW3W (*1)
TCL-2GSW3W (*1)
BTC-2GSW3W (*1)
PTC-2GSW3W (*1)
TTC-2GSW3 (*1)
LC-2GSW
HLN-2GSW
HLF-2GSW
HLS-2GSW
V2GUW
R R2GUW
—
—
—
MI-05SW3 (*1)
AL AX
NF250-RGWNF125-RGW
NF250-UGWNF125-UGW
Rat
ed s
hort
-circ
uit
brak
ing
capa
city
(kA
)
Rated current In (Amp.)
Number of poles
IEC60947-2(Icu/Ics)
AC(50/60Hz)
DC
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
Suitability for isolation
Utilization category
Reverse connection (terminals unmarked)
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV)
Pollution degree
Type name
32
690
25/25
125/125
125/125
125/125
125/125
–
–
–
●
A
●
8
3
NF125-RGWRT
16–25 25–4040–63 63–100
16–25 25–4040–63 63–100
32 2 3 4
690
25/25
125/125
125/125
125/125
125/125
–
–
–
●
A
●
8
3
●
A
●
8
3
690
30/30
200/200
200/200
200/200
200/200
–
–
–
NF250-RGWRT
NF250-UGWRT
125–160160–225
125–160160–225
2 3 4
●
A
●
8
3
690
30/30
200/200
200/200
200/200
200/200
–
–
–
NF125-UGWRT
690V
500V
440V
400V
230V
300V
500V
600V
■ Operating Characteristics
■ Internal Accessories
■ Standard Attached Parts(Front connection)
Mounting screw: M4×0.7×73 (4pcs)Insulation barrier: (2P : 2pcs, 3P : 4pcs, 4P : 6pcs)
■ External Accessories
Ter
min
al c
over
Left-sidemounting
Right-sidemounting
Operating handle
SHT or UVT
Remark: (1) refer to page 40.
Type name Type nameAccessories AccessoriesReferencepage
Referencepage
Operating handle
Mechanical interlock
Electrical operation device
Handle lockdevice
Notes: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.(*2) HLF and HLS types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.
■ Ambient Compensating Curve
×100% of Rated current
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
4h
2h
1h
30min 20min 14min 10min
6min 4min
2min
1min
30s20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 400.01s
×100% of Rated current ×100% of Rated current
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
4h
2h
1h
30min 20min 14min 10min
6min 4min
2min
1min
30s20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 400.01s
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
4h
2h
1h
30min 20min 14min 10min
6min 4min
2min
1min
30s20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 400.01s
1300±2601040
780
DC x In (%)520±104
AC x In (%)
1000±200800600400±80
10864
Positionof notch
Instantaneous trip adjustmentrange
Min.
breakingMax. total
Max.
time
NF250-RGW/UGW 160-225A (Rated current In=225A) 125-160A (Rated current In=160A)
IEC 60947-2
Thermal-Adjustable types
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip
DC(Adjustable range)
AC(Adjustable range)
1300±260
DC x In (%)
Instantaneous tripcurrent ratio
1000±200
AC x In (%)
40-63A (Rated current In=63A)NF125-RGW/UGW 63-100A (Rated current In=100A)
time
Max.
Max. totalbreaking
Min.
DC
AC
IEC 60947-2
Thermal-Adjustable types
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip
1000±200 1300±260
AC x In (%)
DC x In (%)
Instantaneous tripcurrent ratio
time
Max.
Max. totalbreaking
Min.
NF125-RGW/UGW 25-40A (Rated current In=40A) 16-25A (Rated current In=25A)
DC
AC
IEC 60947-2
Thermal-Adjustable types
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip
130
120
110
100
90
800 10 20 30 40 50 60
(rated ambient 40°C)Ambient temperature (°C)
Rat
ed a
mbi
ent
Cur
rent
rat
ing
(%)
–10
Type NF250-UGW
6. Characteristics and DimensionsMolded-Case Circuit Breakers
6
78
Front connection
Rear connection
Plug-in
φ7
Insulatingbarrier
Drilling plan
Mounting plate
Stud attachable in thisderection only φ9 M8bolt
(Terminal block)
Con
nect
ion
allo
wan
ce
M6Terminal blockmounting screw
BreakerPlug-in terminalblock
275
34.5
219
28
6
32
18
14
104
22
15
70
20
70
153
70
58.5
58.5
155
129
107
100
32.5
52
4-pole
3-pole
R1
Breaker
1mm clearanceon each sideof handle
Front-panel cutout
11.5
105
35
35
70
35
4-pole
3-pole
8
105
70
6
20
15
15
90 106
7186
4-pole3-pole
Insulatingtube
M4×0.7tapsor φ5
Drilling plan
ø24
M4×0.7breakermountingscrewφ9
M8 bolt
Connectionallowance
Insulating tube
Stud can berotated 90°
Mounting plate t max.=3.2
201
219
219
108
73
22
Breaker
24
(Bus t max.=7)
24 max.
10
(Hex-soket)M8 bolt
M4×0.7 tapsor φ5
3535
110
4 90
86
79
φ8.5
63
22
φ4.55011
2
4-pole
5050
35
105
140
22
70
1054-pole3-pole
Neutralpole
3-poleDrilling plan
Breaker
Tripbutton
Mounting hole
Insulating barrier(removable)
201
240
219
φ8.5
6.1
Solderless terminalfor wire size2.5 185mm2
10
Bus drilling fordirect connection
Wire connectionHex-socket set screw
26.5
7516
5
Remark: 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
79
NF400-CPNF400-SP
Type NF400-SP
■ Operating Characteristics
■ Internal Accessories ■ Ambient Compensating Curve
130
120
110
100
90
800 10 20 30 40 50 60
AL
(*1) (*1)(*1)
(*1)
AX SHT or UVT
1000.01s
1min
1h
0.02s
0.05s
0.1s
0.2s
0.5s
1s
2s
5s
10s
20s
30s
2min
4min6min
10min14min20min30min
2h
4h
130 200 300 400500
600700
1000 15002000
30004000
Operating Characteristics
(IEC 60947-2)
NF400-CP
NF400-SP
×100% of Rated current
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
Instantaneous tripTime-delay trip
Max. total breaking time
Max
NF400-CP
NF400-SP
Min
Type name
Rated current In (Amp.)
Number of poles
Rated insulationvoltage Ui (V)
Rat
ed s
hort
-circ
uit
brea
king
cap
acity
(kA
)
600
–
15/8
25/13
36/18
50/25
690
10/10
30/30
42/42
45/45
85/85
2 2 3 43
250 – 250 –
Note: (1)Types of DC specifications can be produced upon request.
IEC 60947-2
(Icu/Ics)
AC
DC
AC
DC(*1)
690V
500V
440V
400V
230V
250V 40/40 –20/10 –
NF400-CP NF400-SP
250 300 350 400
Left-sidemounting
Right-sidemounting
Operating handle
Note: (*1) Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting.Remark: (1) refer to page 41.
Lead wiredirection
Ref
eren
ce a
mbi
ent
tem
pera
ture
Ambient temperature (°C)(Reference ambient temperature 40°C)
Cur
rent
rat
ing
(%)
■ External Accessories
Note: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
Accessories
Operating handle
F
S
V
51
53
50
65
66
56
66
57
F4SPW
S4CP, S4SP
V4SPWF, V4SPW
MI-4SP3 (*1)
HT-4CP, HT4SP
Term
inal c
over Large
Skeleton
Rear
Electrical operation device
TCL-4SP3W (*1)
TTC-4SP3 (*1)
BTC-4SP3W (*1)
HL-4CP, HL-4SP
HLS-4SP
(MI)
(HT)
(TC-L)
(TTC)
(BTC)
HL
HL-S
Mechanical interlock
Auxiliary handle
Handlelock device
Type name Referencepage Accessories Type name Reference
page
■ Standard Attached Parts(An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
Front connection
Rear connection
Mounting screw: M6 × 60 (4pcs)Insulating barrier: (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
Mounting screw: M6 × 72 (4pcs)
6. Characteristics and DimensionsMolded-Case Circuit Breakers
6
80
Front connection
Rear connection
Plug-in
Remark: (1) 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
28
87
130.5
136
44
160
79
15
24
121
18
24280
3528
225
8
181
87
135
163
5555
R6
113
10
25
118
92
20 20
26
225
265
87
44
43.5
130.5
44
194
225
8
8
87
130.5
128 83
14
102
3939
ø12
.5
ø7
155 (NF400-SP)134 (NF400-CP)
107
103
97
44
844
94.5
5
47
12
25ø10.5
44 44
194
110 16
4325
7
51
112
140
28
185
196
168
56
4-pole3-pole
Breaker
Drilling plan
M6 tap or ø7
Conductor thickness t=8 max.Conductor drilling for
direct connection
Conductor thickness t=8 max.
Neutral pole
4-pole3-pole
Trip button
Insulating barrier (removable)
Mounting hole
ø14 M12 bolt
ø13M12 bolt
Mounting plate
Stud can be rotated 90°
Connectionallowance
4-pole
3-pole
Insulation tube
M6 screw formounting breaker ø35
4-pole3-pole
M6 tap or ø7
Breaker Groove for reducingheat by overcurrent
Drilling plan
4-pole
3-pole
Breaker
Front-panel cutout
1.0mm clearance on each side of thehandle frame.
Mounting plate Plug-in terminal block
M8 terminal blockmounting screw
Stud attachable in this direction only
Insulating barrier
Connection allowance
ø13M12 bolt
4-pole
3-pole
3-pole 4-pole
ø10
Drilling plan
Breaker
248
194
225
2424
24
11 11
6-ø35
87
44
Load side
Note:
Line side
Boring dimensions for rear connection type barriers (3-pole)
The bore dimensional drawing shows the breaker viewed from the rear.
4-M6 tap or ø7
8-M4 screw Add these tapped holes in 8 positions to standard boring.
81
NF400-SEPNF400-HEPNF400-REP
Type NF400-SEP
■ Operating Characteristics
■ Internal Accessories ■ Temperature Characteristics
Ambient temperature (°C)
Rat
ed a
mbi
ent
80
70
90
100
110
120
130
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Con
tinuo
us lo
ad c
urre
nt (
%)
LTD operating timeat 125%
1000s(TL=150s set) 670s(TL=100s set) 400s(TL= 60s set) 80s(TL= 12s set)
0.6 0.7 1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 30 4020150.01s
0.02s
0.05s
0.1s
0.2s
0.5s
1s
2s
5s
10s
20s30s
1min
2min
4min6min
10min14min20min30min
1h
2h
5h
10h
Pre-alarmpickup current Ip
Ir x(0.70-0.75-0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10%-0.95-1.0)
Pre-alarmoperating time Tp
±20%
(at 200%)
Tp=2TL
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
INST pickup current IIx4~x16 ±15%
(Magnification to In)Max. totalbreaking time
STD operating time Ts
STD pickup current Is
12-60-100-150s ±20%(at 200%)
Ir x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
0.3 ± 0.06s0.2 ± 0.04s
0.1 ± 0.03s0.06 ± 0.02s
LTD operating time TL
NF400-SEPNF400-HEPNF400-REP
Note)Current setting Ir: 200~400A (Adjustable)
Rated Current In: 400A
Current setting (×100% of Ir)Instantaneous tripping current (×100% of In)
■ External Accessories
Notes: (*1) This is for NF400-SEP.(*2) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
Accessories
Operating handle
F
S
V
51
53
50
65
66
56
66
57
F4SPW
S4SP
V4SPWF, V4SPW
MI-4SP3 (*2)
HT-4SP
Term
inal c
over Large
Skeleton
Rear
Electrical operation device
TCL-4SP3W (*1)(*2)
TTC-4SP3 (*2)
BTC-4SP3W (*1)(*2)
HL-4SP
HLS-4SP
(MI)
(HT)
(TC-L)
(TTC)
(BTC)
HL
HL-S
Mechanical interlock
Auxiliary handle
Handlelock device
Type name Referencepage Accessories Type name Reference
page
(An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)■ Standard Attached Parts
Front connection
Rear connection
Mounting screw: M6 × 60 (4pcs)Insulating barrier: (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
Mounting screw: M6 × 72 (4pcs)
Type name
Rated current In (Amp.)
Number of poles
Reted insulation voltage Ui (V)
Rat
ed s
hort
-circ
uit
brea
king
cap
acity
(kA
)
690
10/10
30/30
42/42
45/45
85/85
—
690
10/10
50/50
65/65
70/70
100/100
—
690
15/10
70/35
125/63
125/63
150/75
—
43 43 3
IEC 60947-2
(Icu/Ics)
AC
DC
AC
690V
500V
440V
400V
230V
250V
NF400-SEP NF400-HEP NF400-REP
200-400adjustable
SHT or UVTAL AX PAL TI
(*1) (*1) (*1)
(*1)
Left-sidemounting
Right-sidemounting
Operating handleLead wiredirection
Note: (*1) Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting.Remark: (1) refer to page 41.
6. Characteristics and DimensionsMolded-Case Circuit Breakers
6
82
Front connection
Rear connection
Plug-in
28
87
130.5
136
44
160
79
15
24
121
18
24280
3528
225
8
181
87
135
163
5555
R6
113
10
25
118
92
20 20
26
225
265
87
44
43.5
130.5
44
194
225
8
8
87
130.5
128 83
14
102
3939
ø12
.5
ø7
155
107
103
97
44
844
94.5
5
47
12
25ø10.5
44 44
194
110 16
4325
7
51
112
140
28
185
196
168
56
4-pole3-pole
Breaker
Drilling plan
M6 tap or ø7
Conductor thickness t=8 max.Conductor drilling for
direct connection
Conductor thicknesst=8 max.
Neutral pole
4-pole3-pole
Trip button
Insulating barrier (removable)
Mounting hole
ø14M12 bolt
ø13M12 bolt
Mounting plate Stud can be rotated 90°
Connectionallowance
4-pole
3-pole
Insulation tube
M6 screw for mounting breaker ø35
4-pole3-pole
M6 tap or ø7
Breaker
Groove for reducing heat by overcurrent
Drilling plan
4-pole
3-pole
Breaker
Front-panel cutout
1.0mm clearance on each side of the handle frame.
Mounting plate Plug-in terminal block
M8 terminal block mounting screw
Stud attachable in this direction only
Insulating barrier
Connectionallowance
ø13M12 bolt
4-pole
3-pole
3-pole 4-pole
ø10
Drilling plan
Breaker
248
194
225
2424
24
11 11
6-ø35
87
44
Load side
Note:
Line side
Boring dimensions for rear connectiontype barriers (3-pole)
The bore dimensional drawing shows the breaker viewed from the rear.
4-M6 tap or ø7
8-M4 screw Add these tapped holes in 8 positions to standard boring.
83
NF400-UEP
■ Operating Characteristics
■ Internal Accessories ■ Current reducing curve
Type name
Rated current In (Amp.)
Number of poles
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
Rat
ed s
hort
-circ
uit
brea
king
cap
acity
(kA
)
690
35/35
170/170
200/200
200/200
200/200
—
3 4
IEC 60947-2
(Icu/Ics)
AC
DC
AC
690V
500V
440V
400V
230V
250V
NF400-UEP
200-400adjustable
Ambient temperature (°C)
Rat
ed a
mbi
ent
80
70
90
100
110
120
130
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Con
tinuo
us lo
ad c
urre
nt (
%)
Current setting (×100% of Ir)Instantaneous tripping current (×100% of In)
LTD operating timeat 125%
1000s(TL=150s set) 670s(TL=100s set) 400s(TL= 60s set) 80s(TL= 12s set)
0.6 0.7 1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 30 4020150.01s
0.02s
0.05s
0.1s
0.2s
0.5s
1s
2s
5s
10s
20s30s
1min
2min
4min6min
10min14min20min30min
1h
2h
5h
10h
Pre-alarmpickup current Ip
Ir x(0.70-0.75-0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10%-0.95-1.0)
Pre-alarmoperating time Tp
±20%
(at 200%)
Tp=2
TL
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
INST pickup current IIx4~x16 ±15%
(Magnification to In)Max. totalbreaking time
STD operating time Ts
STD pickup current Is
12-60-100-150s ±20%(at 200%)
Ir x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
0.3 ± 0.06s0.2 ± 0.04s
0.1 ± 0.03s0.06 ± 0.02s
LTD operating time TL
NF400-UEP
Note)Current setting Ir: 200~400A (Adjustable)
Rated Current In: 400A
■ External Accessories
Note: (*1)The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
Accessories
Operating handle
F
S
51
53
65
66
56
—
56
66
57
F4UPW (*1)
S4SP
MI-4SP3 (*1)
HT-4SP
Term
inal c
over Large
Skeleton
Rear
Electrical operation device
TCL-4SP3W (*1)
—
BTC-4SP3W (*1)
HL-4SP
HLS-4UP
(MI)
(HT)
(TC-L)
(TTC)
(BTC)
HL
HL-S
Mechanical interlock
Auxiliary handle Handlelock device
Type name Referencepage Accessories Type name Reference
page
(An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)■ Standard Attached Parts
Front connection
(4-pole models are provided with auxiliary handle.)
Rear connection
Mounting screw: M6 × 65 (2pcs), M6 × 162 (2pcs)Insulating barrier: (3P: 4pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
Mounting screw: M6 × 72 (2pcs), M6 × 169 (2pcs)
Type NF400-UEP
SHT or UVTAL AX PAL TI
(*1) (*1) (*1)
(*1)
Left-sidemounting
Right-sidemounting
Operating handleLead wiredirection
Note: (*1) Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting.
Remark: (1) Specification of 4-pole model is same as that of NF630-UEP. (2) refer to page 41.
6. Characteristics and DimensionsMolded-Case Circuit Breakers
6
84
Front connection
Rear connection
Plug-in
Note (1): Overall dimension of 4-pole model is same as that of 4-pole model of NF630-UEP. Refer to page 90.
16
4329
7
102
39
257
ø12
.5
ø12
.5
11.5
234
ø7
ø7
31
110
43
51
28
112
140
252
204
200
194
141
144
25
47
8
78
127.5
5
44
218
1828
87
44
24
320
297
3528
265
160
79
175
15
24
8
R6
210
10
25
8
8787
118
44
20 20
2626
5
305
128
234
26
92
265
8
83
14
3-pole
3-pole
Trip button
Insulating barrier (removable)
Mounting hole
ø14M12 bolt
ø10.5
Conductor thickness t=8 max.Conductor drilling for direct connection
Conductor thickness t=8 max.
3-pole
Breaker
Drilling plan
M6 tap or ø7
ø13M12 bolt
Mounting plateStud can be rotated 90°
Connectionallowance
Insulation tube
M6 screw for mounting breaker
ø35
M6 screw or ø7
BreakerGroove for reducing heat by overcurrent
Drilling plan
Breaker
Front-panel cutout
1.0mm clearance on each side of the handle frame.
3-pole
ø10
3-pole
Drilling plan
Mounting angle
Mounting angle
Plug-in terminal block
M8 terminal block mounting screw
Stud attachable in this direction only
Insulating barrier
Connection allowance
ø13M12 bolt
Breaker
max
. 203
248
234
265
2424
24
11 11
6-ø35
87
44
Load side
Note:
Line side
Boring dimensions for rear connection type barriers (3-pole)
The bore dimensional drawing shows the breaker viewed from the rear.
4-M6 tap or ø7
8-M4 screw Add these tapped holes in 8 positions to standard boring.
85
NF630-CPNF630-SP
Type NF630-SP
■ Operating Characteristics
■ Internal Accessories ■ Ambient Compensating Curve
Ambient temperature (°C)
Cur
rent
rat
ing
(%)
Type name
Rated current In (Amp.)
Number of poles
Reted insulationvoltage Ui (V)
Rat
ed s
hort
-circ
uit
brea
king
cap
acity
(kA
)
600
–
18/9
36/18
36/18
50/25
690
10/10
30/30
42/42
45/45
85/85
2 2 3 43
250 – 250 –
Note: (1) Types of DC specifications can be produced upon request.
IEC 60947-2
(Icu/Ics)
AC
DC
AC
DC(*1)
690V
500V
440V
400V
230V
250V 40/40 –20/10 –
NF630-CP NF630-SP
500 600 630
1000.01s
1min
1h
0.02s
0.05s
0.1s
0.2s
0.5s
1s
2s
5s
10s
20s30s
2min
4min
6min
10min14min20min
30min
2h
4h
130 200 300 400500
600700
1000 15002000
30004000
×100% of Rated current
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
Operating Characteristics
(IEC 60947-2)
NF630-CP
NF630-SP
500A, 600A, 630A
Instantaneous tripping
Max. total breaking time
Max.
Min.
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip
NF630-SP Adjustable range NF630-CP
Note: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
■ External Accessories
Accessories
Operating handle
F
S
V
51
53
50
65
66
56
66
57
F6SPW
S4SP
V6SPWF, V6SPW
MI-6SP3 (*1)
HT-4SP
Term
inal c
over Large
Skeleton
Rear
Electrical operation device
TCL-6SP3 (*1)
TTC-6SP3 (*1)
BTC-6SP3 (*1)
HL-4SP
HLS-6SP
(MI)
(HT)
(TC-L)
(TTC)
(BTC)
HL
HL-S
Mechanical interlock
Auxiliary handle
Handlelock device
Type name Referencepage Accessories Type name Reference
page
(An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.) (4-pole models are provided with auxiliary handle.)■ Standard Attached Parts
Front connection
Rear connection
Mounting screw: M6 × 35 (4pcs)Insulating barrier: (2P: 1pc, 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
Mounting screw: M6 × 40 (4pcs)
AL
Note: (*1) Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting. Remark: (1) refer to page 41.
Right-side mounting
(*1)
(*1) (*1)
Left-side mounting
Operating handle
AX SHT or UVTLead wire direction
(*1)
130
120
110
100
90
800
(Reference ambient temperature 40°C)10 20 30 40 50 60
Ref
eren
ce a
mbi
ent
tem
pera
ture
Instantaneous tripping current valueAdjustable range (4 steps)
Position of adjusting handle
Instantaneous tripping Current standard value %NF630-SP
Lo23Hi
500±100800
11001400±280
6. Characteristics and DimensionsMolded-Case Circuit Breakers
6
86
Front connection
Rear connection
Plug-in
Remark: (1) 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
140
210
70
210280
110
14
40
51
32 815
32
275
87
97
103
107
87
32
94.5
8
4424
8
44
102
15
22
40
ø8.5
5
ø14
155
217
12
70
70
243
243
295
243
70
140
40
25
13
8 15
113 110
140
32
10
12.5
70
70
210
105
17251
92
R6
8
208
70
278
140
155
5656
18713
40
140
3225
815
112
243
8
20
301
126
23
Neutral pole
4-pole3-pole
Trip button
Insulating barrier (removable)Mounting hole
ø14M12 bolt
ø8
Conductor thickness t=8 max.
(Conductor thickness t=8 max.)Conductor drilling for
direct connection
Auxiliary handle (removable) Terminal dimension
for directly connecting conductor
4-pole
3-pole
Breaker
Drilling plan
M6 tap or ø7
4-pole
3-pole Breaker
Front-panel cutout
1.0mm clearance on each side of the handle frame.
ø48
4-pole3-pole
M6 tap or ø7
Breaker Groove for reducing heat by overcurrent
Drilling plan
M6 screw for mounting breaker
ø13 M12 bolt
Mounting plate
Stud can be rotated 90°Connection allowance
Mounting plate
Plug-in terminal block
M8 terminal block mounting screw
Stud can be rotated 90°
Con
nect
ion
allo
wan
ce
ø13M12 bolt
3-pole 4-pole
ø10
Drilling plan
Breaker
2424
2424
11 11
140
70
243
6-ø48
510
Boring dimensions for rear connection type barriers (3-pole)
4-M6 tap or ø7
8-M4 screw Add these tapped holes in 8 positions to standard boring.
87
NF630-SEPNF630-HEPNF630-REP
Type NF630-SEP
■ Operating Characteristics
■ Internal Accessories ■ Temperature Characteristics
Ambient temperature (°C)
Rat
ed a
mbi
ent
80
70
90
100
110
120
130
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Con
tinuo
us lo
ad c
urre
nt (
%)
Instantaneous tripping current (×100% of In)Current (×100% of Ir)
LTD operating timeat 125%
1000s(TL=150s set) 670s(TL=100s set) 400s(TL= 60s set) 80s(TL= 12s set)
0.6 0.7 1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 30 4020150.01s
0.02s
0.05s
0.1s
0.2s
0.5s
1s
2s
5s
10s
20s30s
1min
2min
4min6min
10min14min20min30min
1h
2h
5h
10h
Pre-alarmpickup current Ip
Ir x(0.70-0.75-0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10%-0.95-1.0)
Pre-alarmoperating time Tp
±20%
(at 200%)
Tp=2
TL
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
INST pickup current IIx4~x15 ±15%
(Magnification to In)Max. totalbreaking time
STD operating time Ts
STD pickup current Is
12-60-100-150s ±20%(at 200%)
Ir x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
0.3 ± 0.06s0.2 ± 0.04s
0.1 ± 0.03s0.06 ± 0.02s
LTD operating time TL
NF630-SEP
NF630-HEP
NF630-REP
Note)
Current setting
Ir: 300~630A
(Adjustable)
Rated Current
In: 630A
Type name
Rated current In (Amp.)
Number of poles
Reted insulation voltage Ui (V)
Rat
ed s
hort
-circ
uit
brea
king
cap
acity
(kA
)
690
10/10
30/30
42/42
45/45
85/85
—
690
15/15
50/50
65/65
70/70
100/100
—
690
20/15
70/35
125/63
125/63
150/75
—
43 43 3
IEC 60947-2
(Icu/Ics)
AC
DC
AC
690V
500V
440V
400V
230V
250V
NF630-SEP NF630-HEP NF630-REP
300-630adjustable
Note: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
■ External Accessories
Accessories
Operating handle
F
S
V
51
53
50
65
66
56
66
57
F6SPW
S4SP
V6SPWF, V6SPW
MI-6SP3 (*1)
HT-4SP
Term
inal c
over Large
Skeleton
Rear
Electrical operation device
TCL-6SP3 (*1)
TTC-6SP3 (*1)
BTC-6SP3 (*1)
HL-4SP
HLS-6SP
(MI)
(HT)
(TC-L)
(TTC)
(BTC)
HL
HL-S
Mechanical interlock
Auxiliary handle
Handlelock device
Type name Referencepage Accessories Type name Reference
page
(An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.) (4-pole models are provided with auxiliary handle.)■ Standard Attached Parts
Front connection
Rear connection
Mounting screw: M6 × 35 (4pcs)Insulating barrier: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
Mounting screw: M6 × 40 (4pcs)
SHT or UVTAL AX PAL TILeft-sidemounting
Right-sidemounting
Operating handleLead wiredirection
Note: (*1) Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting.Remark: (1) refer to page 41.
(*1) (*1)
(*1)(*1)
6. Characteristics and DimensionsMolded-Case Circuit Breakers
6
88
Front connection
Rear connection
Plug-in
140
210
70
210280
110
14
40
51
32 815
32
275
87
97
103
107
87
32
94.5
8
4424
8
4410
2
15
22
40
ø8.5
5
ø14
155
217
12
70
70
243
243
295
243
70
140
40
25
13
8 15
113 110
140
32
10
12.5
70
70
210
105
17251
92
R6
8
208
70
278
140
155
5656
18713
40
140
3225
815
112
243
20
301
8
126
23
Neutral pole
4-pole3-pole
Trip button
Insulating barrier (removable)Mounting hole
ø14M12 bolt
N ø8
Conductor thickness t=8 max.
(Conductor thickness t=8 max.)Conductor drilling for
direct connection
Auxiliary handle (removable) Terminal dimension
for directly connecting conductor
4-pole
3-pole
Breaker
Drilling plan
M6 tap or ø7
Breaker
Front-panel cutout
1.0mm clearance on each side of the handle frame.
ø48
4-pole3-pole
M6 tap or ø7
Breaker Groove for reducing heat by overcurrent
Drilling plan
M6 screw for mounting breaker
ø13M12 bolt
Mounting plate
Stud can be rotated 90°Connection allowance
Mounting plate
Plug-in terminal block
M8 terminal block mounting screw
Stud can be rotated 90°
Con
nect
ion
allo
wan
ce
ø13M12 bolt
3-pole 4-pole
f10
Drilling plan
Breaker
4-pole
3-pole
2424
2424
11 11
140
70
243
6-ø48
510
Boring dimensions for rear connection type barriers (3-pole)
4-M6 tap or ø7
8-M4 screw Add these tapped holes in 8 positions to standard boring.
89
NF630-UEP
■ Operating Characteristics
■ Internal Accessories ■ Temperature Characteristics
Ambient temperature (°C)
Rat
ed a
mbi
ent
80
70
90
100
110
120
130
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Con
tinuo
us lo
ad c
urre
nt (
%)
LTD operating timeat-125%
1000s(TL=150s set) 670s(TL=100s set) 400s(TL= 60s set) 80s(TL= 12s set)
Pre-alarmpickup current Ip
Ir x(0.70-0.75-0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10%-0.95-1.0)
Pre-alarmoperating time Tp
±20%
(at 200%)
Tp=2TL
INST pickup current IIx4~x15 ±15%
(Magnification to In)Max. totalbreaking time
STD operating time Ts
STD pickup current Is
12-60-100-150s ±20%(at 200%)
Ir x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
0.3 ± 0.06s0.2 ± 0.04s
0.1 ± 0.03s0.06 ± 0.02s
LTD operating time TL
0.01s
0.02s
0.05s
0.1s
0.2s
0.5s
1s
2s
5s
10s
20s30s
1min
2min
4min6min
10min14min20min30min
1h
2h
5h
10h
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
NF630-UEP
Note)
Current setting
Ir: 300~630A
(Adjustable)
Rated Current
In: 630A
Instantaneous tripping current (×100% of In)Current (×100% of Ir)
0.6 0.7 1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 30 402015
Type name
Rated current In (Amp.)
Number of poles
Reted insulation voltage Ui (V)
Rat
ed s
hort
-circ
uit
brea
king
cap
acity
(kA
)
690
35/35
170/170
200/200
200/200
200/200
—
3 4
IEC 60947-2
(Icu/Ics)
AC
DC
AC
690V
500V
440V
400V
230V
250V
NF630-UEP
300-630adjustable
■ External Accessories
Note: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
Accessories
Operating handleF
S
51
53
65
66
56
—
56
66
57
F6UPW(*1)
S4SP
MI-6SP3 (*1)
HT-4SP
Term
inal c
over Large
Skeleton
Rear
Electrical operation device
TCL-6UP3 (*1)
—
BTC-6SP3 (*1)
HL-4SP
HLS-6UP
(MI)
(HT)
(TC-L)
(TTC)
(BTC)
HL
HL-S
Mechanical interlock
Auxiliary handle Handlelock device
Type name Referencepage Accessories Type name Reference
page
(An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)■ Standard Attached Parts
Front connection
(4-pole models are provided with auxiliary handle.)
Rear connection
Mounting screw: 3P: M6 × 35, M6 × 132 (2pcs each)4P: M6 × 35 (3pcs), M6 × 132 (2pcs)Insulating barrier: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
Mounting screw: 3P: M6 × 40, M6 × 137 (2pcs each)4P: M6 × 40 (3pcs), M6 × 137 (2pcs)
Type NF630-UEP
SHT or UVTAL AX
Note: (*1) Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting.
Remark: (1) refer to page 41.
PAL TILeft-sidemounting
Right-sidemounting
Operating handleLead wiredirection
(*1) (*1)
(*1)(*1)
6. Characteristics and DimensionsMolded-Case Circuit Breakers
6
90
Front connection
Rear connection
Plug-in
140 210
70
N N
210 280
110
14
4051
815
322
87
194
141
200
204
87
32143
97
8
8
102
275
15
112
5
ø14
ø7
ø7ø14
252
314
70 70
290
210
70
3551
280
16
322
48
48 110
27.5
194
141
200
204
143
97
6.5
6.5
102
275
15
112
5
ø14
ø7
ø7ø14
252
314
27.5
22
40
ø8.5
12
290
290
342
70
140
40
25
13
8
8210 110
140
3210
12.5
70
70
210
105
172
51
92
22.5
15
290
342
2526
210 83
1020
8
20 290
322
348
25
223
23
(A)
(B)
13
40
140
190
32
25
815
112
172
202
unde
r 23
4
172
70ø10
ø10
190
Neutral pole
4-pole3-pole
Trip button
Insulating barrier (removable)Mounting hole
ø14M12 bolt
Conductor thickness t=8 max.
Conductor drilling for direct connection
(Conductor thickness t=8 max.)
Auxiliary handle(removable)
Terminal dimension for directly connecting conductor
4-pole(NF400-UEP)
4-pole(NF400-UEP)
Breaker
Mounting hole
Drilling plan
M6 tap or ø7
77.5 (ON side)121.5 (OFF side)
4-pole (5 portions)
3-pole (4 portions)
Neutral pole
Insulating barrier (removable)
ø14M12 bolt
Trip button
Conductor thickness t=8 max.
Auxiliary handle
ø13M12 bolt
Mounting plate
Stud can be rotated 90°Connection allowance
M6 screw for mounting breaker
ø48
4-pole3-pole
M6 tap or ø7 M6 tap or ø7
Breaker
Groove for reducing heat by overcurrent Mounting plate Connection
allowance
ø13M12 bolt
R6
4-pole
3-pole Breaker
Front-panel cutout
1.0mm clearance on each side of the handle frame.
Drilling plan
3-pole
Stud can be rotated 90°
Fixing plate (to be attached)
Mounting angle
Mounting angle
Plug-in terminal block
M8 terminal block mounting screw
M8 terminal block mounting screw
Con
nect
ion
allo
wan
ce
ø13M12 bolt
Mounting angle (A)Breaker
Rear view Bottom view
Mounting angle (A)
Mounting angle (B)
Stud can be rotated 90°
2424
2424
11 11
140
70
290
6-ø48
510
Boring dimensions for rear connection type barriers (3-pole)
4-M6 tap or ø7
8-M4 screw Add these tapped holes in 8 positions to standard boring.
91
NF800-CEPNF800-SEPNF800-HEPNF800-REP
Type NF800-SEP
■ Operating Characteristics
■ Internal Accessories ■ Current Reducing Curve
Ambient temperature (°C)
80
70
90
100
110
120
130
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Wor
king
cur
rent
cor
rect
ing
ratio
(%
)
Type name
Rated current In (Amp.)
Number of poles
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
Rate
d sh
ort-c
ircui
t bre
akin
g ca
pacit
y (k
A)
600
—
18/9
36/18
36/18
50/25
—
690
10/10
30/30
42/42
45/45
85/85
—
3 3 4
IEC 60947-2
(Icu/Ics)
NF800-CEP NF800-SEP
400-800adjustable
Note: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
Note: (*1) Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting.Remark: (1) refer to page 41.
■ External Accessories
Accessories
Operating handle
F
S
V
51
53
50
65
66
56
66
57
F6SPW
S4SP
V6SPWF, V6SPW
MI-6SP3 (*1)
HT-4SP
Term
inal c
over Large
Skeleton
Rear
Electrical operation device
TCL-6SP3 (*1)
TTC-6SP3 (*1)
BTC-6SP3 (*1)
HL-4SP
HLS-6SP
(MI)
(HT)
(TC-L)
(TTC)
(BTC)
HL
HL-S
Mechanical interlock
Auxiliary handle
Handlelock device
Type name Referencepage Accessories Type name Reference
page
(An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.) (4-pole models are provided with auxiliary handle.)■ Standard Attached Parts
Front connection
Rear connection
Mounting screw: M6 × 35 (4pcs)Insulating barrier: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
Mounting screw: M6 × 40 (4pcs)
Ref
eren
ceam
bien
tte
mpe
ratu
re
The rated current does not depend on temperature. However, if ambient temperature exceeds 40°C, reduce the continuous working current as left curve.
LTD operating timeat 125%
1000s(TL=150s set) 670s(TL=100s set) 400s(TL= 60s set) 80s(TL= 12s set)
Pre-alarmpickup current Ip
Ir x(0.70-0.75-0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10% -0.95-1.0)
Pre-alarmoperating time Tp
±20%
(at 200%)
Tp=2
TL
INST pickup current IIx4~x12 ±15%
(Magnification to In)Max. totalbreaking time
STD operating time Ts
STD pickup current Is
12-60-100-150s ±20%(at 200%)
Ir x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
0.3 ± 0.06s0.2 ± 0.04s
0.1 ± 0.03s0.06 ± 0.02s
LTD operating time TL
0.01s
0.02s
0.05s
0.1s
0.2s
0.5s
1s
2s
5s
10s
20s30s
1min
2min
4min6min
10min14min20min30min
1h
2h
5h
10h
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
Note)Current setting Ir: 400~800A (Adjustable)
Rated Current In: 800A
Instantaneous tripping current (×100% of In)Current (×100% of Ir)
0.6 0.7 1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 30 402015
Operating Characteristics(IEC 60947-2)NF800-CEPNF800-SEPNF800-HEPNF800-REP
SHT or UVTAL AX PAL TILeft-sidemounting
Right-sidemounting
Operating handleLead wiredirection
(*1) (*1)
(*1)(*1)
690
15/15
50/50
65/65
70/70
100/100
—
690
20/15
70/35
125/63
125/63
150/75
—
3 4 3
AC
690V
500V
440V
400V
230V
250V
NF800-HEP NF800-REP
AC
DC
6. Characteristics and DimensionsMolded-Case Circuit Breakers
6
92
Front connection
Rear connection
Plug-in
140210
70
210 280
110
14
40
51
32 815
32
275
87
97
103
107
87
32
94.5
8
4626
8
4610
2
15
22
40
ø8.5
5
ø14
155
217
12 70 70
243
243
295
243
70
140
40
25
13
8 15
113 110
14032
10
12.5
70
70
210
105
172
51
92
R6
8
208
70
278
140
155
5656
187
13
40
140
3225
815
112
243
20
301
10
126
23
Neutral pole
4-pole3-pole
Trip button
Insulating barrier (removable)Mounting hole
ø14M12 bolt
N ø8
Conductor thicknesst=12 max.
(Conductor thickness t=10 max.)Conductor drilling for direct connection
Auxiliary handle(removable)
Terminal dimension for directly connecting conductor
4-pole3-pole
Breaker
Drilling plan
M6 tapor ø7
4-pole
3-poleBreake
Front-panel cutout
1.0mm clearance on eachside of the handle frame.
ø48
4-pole3-pole
M6 tap or ø7
Breaker Groove for reducingheat by overcurrent
Drilling plan
M6 screw formounting breaker
ø13M12 bolt
Mounting plate
Stud can be rotated 90°Connection allowance
Mounting plate
Plug-in terminal block
M8 terminal block mounting screw
Stud can be rotated 90°
Con
nect
ion
allo
wan
ce
ø13M12 bolt
3-pole 4-pole
ø10
Drilling plan
Breaker
2424
2424
11 11
140
70
243
6-ø48
510
Boring dimensions for rear connection type barriers (3-pole)
4-M6 tap or ø7
8-M4 screw Add these tapped holes in 8 positions to standard boring.
93
NF800-SDP
■ Operating Characteristics
■ Internal Accessories ■ Ambient Compensating Curve
Type name
Rated current In (Amp.)
Number of poles
Reted insulationvoltage Ui (V)
Rat
ed s
hort-
circ
uit
brea
king
capa
city
(kA)
2
250
40/40
IEC 60947-2(Icu/Ics)
Time constant not larger than
10msec
DC
DC
250V
NF800-SDP
(700), 800
Ambient temperature (°C)Rated ambient 40°C
Rat
ed a
mbi
ent
80
90
100
110
120
130
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
NF800-SDP
Cur
rent
rat
ing
(%)
Note: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
■ External Accessories
Accessories
Operating handle
F
S
V
51
53
50
65
66
56
66
57
F6SPW
S4SP
V6SPWF, V6SPW
MI-6SP3 (*1)
HT-4SP
Term
inal c
over Large
Skeleton
Rear
Electrical operation device
TCL-6SP3 (*1)
TTC-6SP3 (*1)
BTC-6SP3 (*1)
HL-4SP
HLS-6SP
(MI)
(HT)
(TC-L)
(TTC)
(BTC)
HL
HL-S
Mechanical interlock
Auxiliary handle
Handlelock device
Type name Referencepage Accessories Type name Reference
page
(An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.) (4-pole models are provided with auxiliary handle.)■ Standard Attached Parts
Front connection
Rear connection
Mounting screw: M6 × 35 (4pcs)Insulating barrier: (2P: 1pc, 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
Mounting screw: M6 × 40 (4pcs)
Type NF800-SDP
Time-delay trip Inst trip
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
Min.
Max.
NF800-SDP
0.01s
1min.
1h
0.02s
0.05s
0.1s
0.2s
0.5s
1s
2s
5s
10s
20s30s
2min
4min6min
10min14min20min30min
2h
4h
Max. totalinterrupting time
Inst. trip adjustmentrange (4 steps)
Controlsetting
Inst tripcurrent (A)
Lo23Hi
2600±5203900±7805200±10406500±1300
700A,800ADC
Adjustmentrange700A
Adjustmentrange800A
×100% of rated current
1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
SHT or UVTAL AX PAL TILeft-sidemounting
Right-sidemounting
Operating handleLead wiredirection
Note: (*1) Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting.Remark: (1) refer to page 41.
(*1) (*1)
(*1)(*1)
6. Characteristics and DimensionsMolded-Case Circuit Breakers
6
94
Front connection
Rear connection
Plug-in
Remarks: (1) Standard specification of NF800-SDP is 2-pole model. 3-pole and 4-pole models are available for DC special voltage.(2) 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
140210
70
N
210 280
110
14
40
51
32
815
32
275
87
97
103
107
87
32
94.5
8
4626
8
4610
2
15
22
40
ø8.5
5
ø14
155
217
12
70
70
243
243
295
243
70
140
40
25
13
8 15
113 110
14032
10
12.5
70
70
210
105
17251
92
R6
8
208
70
278
140
155
5656
18713
40
140
3225
815
112
243
20
301
126
23
Neutral pole
4-pole3-pole
Trip button
Insulating barrier (removable)Mounting hole
ø14M12 bolt
ø8
Conductor thicknesst=12 max.
Conductor drilling for direct connection
(Conductor thickness t=10 max.)
Auxiliary handle(removable) Terminal dimension for
directly connectingconductor
4-pole
3-pole
Breaker
Drilling plan
M6 tap or ø7
4-pole
3-poleBreaker
Front-panel cutout
1.0mm clearance on eachside of the handle frame.
ø48
4-pole3-pole
M6 tap or ø7
Breaker Groove for reducing heatby overcurrent
Drilling plan
M6 screw formounting breaker
ø13M12 bolt
Mounting plate
Stud can be rotated 90°Connection allowance
Mounting plate
Plug-in terminal block
M8 terminal block mounting screw
Stud can be rotated 90°
Con
nect
ion
allo
wan
ce
ø13M12 bolt
3-pole 4-pole
ø10
Drilling plan
Breaker
2424
2424
11 11
140
70
243
6-ø48
510
Boring dimensions for rear connection type barriers (3-pole)
4-M6 tap or ø7
8-M4 screwAdd these tapped holes in 8 positions to standard boring.
95
NF800-UEP
■ Operating Characteristics
■ Internal Accessories ■ Current reducing curve
Ambient temperature (°C)
Rat
ed a
mbi
ent
80
70
90
100
110
120
130
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Con
tinuo
us lo
ad c
urre
nt (
%)
Type name
Rated current In (Amp.)
Number of poles
Reted insulation voltage Ui (V)
Rat
ed s
hort
-circ
uit
brea
king
cap
acity
(kA
)
690
35/35
170/170
200/200
200/200
200/200
—
3 4
IEC 60947-2
(Icu/Ics)
AC
DC
AC
690V
500V
440V
400V
230V
250V
NF800-UEP
400-800adjustable
LTD operating timeat-125%
1000s(TL=150s set) 670s(TL=100s set) 400s(TL= 60s set) 80s(TL= 12s set)
Pre-alarmpickup current Ip
Ir x(0.70-0.75-0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10%-0.95-1.0)
Pre-alarmoperating time Tp
±20%
(at 200%)
Tp=2TL
INST pickup current IIx4~x12 ±15%
(Magnification to In)Max. totalbreaking time
STD operating time Ts
STD pickup current Is
12-60-100-150s ±20%(at 200%)
Ir x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
0.3 ± 0.06s0.2 ± 0.04s
0.1 ± 0.03s0.06 ± 0.02s
LTD operating time TL
0.01s
0.02s
0.05s
0.1s
0.2s
0.5s
1s
2s
5s
10s
20s30s
1min
2min
4min6min
10min14min20min30min
1h
2h
5h
10h
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
NF800-UEP
Note)
Current setting
Ir: 400~800A
(Adjustable)
Rated Current
In: 800A
Instantaneous tripping current (×100% of In)Current (×100% of Ir)
0.6 0.7 1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 30 402015
Note: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
■ External Accessories
Accessories
Operating handle
F
S
V
51
53
—
65
66
56
—
56
66
57
F6UPW(*1)
S4SP
—
MI-6SP3 (*1)
HT-4SP
Term
inal c
over Large
Skeleton
Rear
Electrical operation device
TCL-6UP3 (*1)
—
BTC-6SP3 (*1)
HL-4SP
HLS-6UP
(MI)
(HT)
(TC-L)
(TTC)
(BTC)
HL
HL-S
Mechanical interlock
Auxiliary handle
Handlelock device
Type name Referencepage Accessories Type name Reference
page
(An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.) (4-pole models are provided with auxiliary handle.)■ Standard Attached Parts
Front connection
Rear connection
Mounting screw: 3P:4P:
Insulating barrier:
M6 × 35, M6 × 132 (2pcs each)M6 × 35 (3pcs), M6 × 132 (2pcs)
(3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
Mounting screw: 3P:4P:
M6 × 40, M6 × 137 (2pcs each)M6 × 40 (3pcs), M6 × 137 (2pcs)
Type NF800-UEP
SHT or UVTAL AX PAL TILeft-sidemounting
Note: (*1) Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting.Remark: (1) refer to page 41.
Right-sidemounting
Operating handleLead wiredirection
(*1) (*1)
(*1)(*1)
6. Characteristics and DimensionsMolded-Case Circuit Breakers
6
96
Front connection
Rear connection
140 210
70
N
210 280
110
14
40
51
815
322
87
194
143
200
204
87
32
143
64
8
810
2
275
15
112
5
ø14
ø7
ø7ø14
252
314
70
70
70
290
27.5
22
40
ø8.5
12
290
290
342
70
140
40
25
13
810
210 110 140
3210
12.5
70
70
210
105
172
51
92
22.5
15
Neutral pole
4-pole3-pole
4-pole
3-pole
Trip button
Insulating barrier (removable)Mounting hole
ø14M12 bolt
Conductor thicknesst=12 max.
Conductor drilling fordirect connection
(Conductor thickness t=10 max.)
Auxiliary handle(removable)
Terminal dimension fordirectly connectingconductor
Breaker
M6 screw or ø7
44 (ON side)123.5 (OFF side)
ø13M12 bolt
Mounting plate
Standard direction of stud is horizontalon power side, and vertical on load side.Otherwise, specify the direction.
Connectionallowance
M6 screw formounting breaker
ø48
4-pole3-pole
M6 tap or ø7
Breaker Groove for reducingheat by overcurrent
R6
4-pole
3-pole Breaker
Front-panel cutout
Drilling plan
Drilling plan
1.0mm clearance on eachside of the handle frame.
2424
2424
11 11
140
70
290
6-ø48
510
Boring dimensions for rear connection type barriers (3-pole)
4-M6 tap or ø7
8-M4 screwAdd these tapped holes in 8 positions to standard boring.
97
NF1000-SSNF1250-SS
■ Operating Characteristics
■ Internal Accessories ■ Current reduction curve
Ambient temperature (°C)
Rat
ed a
mbi
ent
80
70
90
100
110
120
130
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Con
tinuo
us lo
ad c
urre
nt (
%)
Type NF1000-SS
Type name
Rated current In (Amp.)
Number of poles
Reted insulation voltage Ui (V)
Rat
ed s
hort
-circ
uit
brea
king
cap
acity
(kA
)
660
—
25/13
65/33
85/43
85/43
125/63
—
660
—
25/13
65/33
85/43
85/43
125/63
—
3 4
IEC 60947-2
(Icu/Ics)
AC
DC
AC
DC
690V
500V
440V
400V
230V
250V
NF1000-SS NF1250-SS
Adjustable 500 600700 800 900 1000
Adjustable 600 700 800 1000 1200 1250
Note: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
■ External Accessories ■ Rated current set available value (A)(An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
■ Standard Attached Parts
Front connection
Rated current can be set to 6 steps and 5 steps with screw method.
Rear connection
Mounting screw: M8 × 40 (4pcs)Insulating barrier: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)Auxiliary handle: (1pc)
Mounting screw: M8 × 40 (4pcs)Insulating barrier: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)Auxiliary handle: (1pc)
Accessories
Operating handleF
S
51
53
65
66
56
57
F100 (*1)
S100
MI-10SS3 (*1)
Auxiliary handle
Handle lock
Large terminal cover
Electrical operation device
HT-10SS
TCL-10SS3 (*1)(MI)
(HL)
(TC-L)Mechanical interlock
Type name Referencepage Accessories Type name Reference
page
NF1000-SS
NF1250-SS
500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000
600, 700, 800, 1000, 1200, 1250
3 4
40s
1min
2min
4min6min
10min
20min
Maximum
Short-time pickup currentajustment range
For 1000A rated current
For 500Arated current
Minimum
Unlatching time
30min
20s
10s
6s
4s
2s
1s
0.6s
0.4s
0.2s
0.1s
0.06s
0.04s
0.02s
0.01s
30s
40min1h
2h
3h
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
Current (×100% of rated current)
1 1.25 2 3 5 10 4020
Max. total interrupting time
Rated current 500,600,700,800,900,1000A adjustableShort-time pickupcurrent adjustable
500% ± 50% 750% ± 75%1000% ± 100%
inst, pickup current
20KA Fixed
TypeNF1000-SS
AC
+4kA-2kA
40s
1min
2min
4min
6min
10min
20min
Maximum
Short-time pickup currentajustment range
For 1250A rated current
For 600A ratedcurrent
Minimum
Unlatching time
30min
20s
10s
6s
4s
2s
1s
0.6s
0.4s
0.2s
0.1s
0.06s
0.04s
0.02s
0.01s
30s
40min1h
2h
3h
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
Current (×100% of rated current)
1 1.25 2 3 5 10 4020
Max. total interrupting time
Rated current 600, 700,800, 1000, 1200A, 1250adjustableShort-time pickupcurrent adjustable
500% ± 50% 750% ± 75%1000% ± 100%
inst, pickup current
20KA Fixed
TypeNF1250-SS
AC
+4kA-2kA
Remark: (*1) refer to page 41.
SHT or UVTAL AXLeft-sidemounting
Right-sidemounting
Operating handleLead wiredirection
6. Characteristics and DimensionsMolded-Case Circuit Breakers
6
98
Front connection
Rear connection
Plug-in
Draw-out
Remark: (1) Draw-out is available only for 3-pole models of NF1000-SS and NF1250-SS.
417376
464
232
257
514
387 25
7
97
464
232
257
1210
5
269
911.5
13 1532
8
43
140
376
320 min.
1210
526
9
208 134
140
158
32 104
68
25.5
225
70204
140
136
100.
513
628
.5
269
28.5
274
30
43
13
ø13
140140 230
8686
97
35.5
39.5
81.5
269
300
70 70 80
R11.5
978
13
273
109
15
12
22
18
32
ø13
45
110
832 80
15
13
43140210
21070
280
375
ø17
.5
18.5
280190
14017
15 44
4015
70 70
133.5
406
346
Neutral pole
4-pole3-pole
4-pole3-pole
Insulating barrier (removable)
Mountinghole
ø13 M12 bolt
ø9.
5
Conductor thickness t=8 × 2pcs max.
Bolt M12 × 50
Conductor thicknesst=6 × 2pcs max.
Conductor thicknesst=6 × 2pcs max.
Bolt M12 × 45
Bolt M12 × 45
Insulation cover(removable)
Insulatingbarrier
Lever for plug-in and draw-out
Lifting hole ø22
Mounting hole ø14
886(Draw-out position)
1026(Draw-out position)
Rail fordraw-out
269(Breaking position)216(Connecting position)
Auxiliary circuit terminalThis is a standard direction of stud.Specify in case of mounting vertically.
Auxiliary circuit lead wire
190.5
Center line of breaker
4-pole3-pole
4-pole
3-pole
Breaker
Breaker
BreakerBreaker
M8 tap or ø10
M8 tap or ø10
ø12
ø13
ø14
Mounting angle
* In case of mounting vertically, insulation cover (removable) is attached to central pole.
Drilling plan
Drilling plan
4-pole3-poleDrilling plan
Mounting plate
Connectionallowance
Connectionallowance
M8 screw for mounting breaker
Stud can be rotated 90°
Front-panel cutout
1.0mm clearance on eachside of the handle frame.
Mounting platePlug-in terminal block
M10 terminal block mounting screw
Stud can be rotated 90°
Auxiliary handle(removable)
356(Connecting position)
409(Breaking position)
99
6. Characteristics and DimensionsMolded-Case Circuit Breakers
NF1000-SSDNF1250-SSD
■ Operating Characteristics (page 000)
■ Internal Accessories ■ Ambient Compensating Curve
Type NF1000-SSD
Ambient temperature (°C)
Cur
rent
rat
ing
(%)
1080
90
100
110
120
130
20 30 40 50 605
Rat
ed a
mbi
ent1000A
1200A
Type name
Rated current In (Amp.)
Number of poles
Rated insulationvoltage Ui (V)
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA)IEC 60947-2
(Icu/Ics)Time constant not larger than
10msec
DC
DC
250V
NF1000-SSD
1000
2
250
40/20
NF1250-SSD
1250
2
250
40/20
Notes: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the referenc page.
■ External Accessories ■ Standard Attached Parts(An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
Front connection
Rear connection
Mounting screw: M8 × 40 (4pcs)Insulating barrier: (2P: 1pcs, 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)Auxiliary handle: (1pc)
Mounting screw: M8 × 40 (4pcs)Insulating cover (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)Auxiliary handle: (1pc)
Accessories
Operating handleF
S
51
53
65
66
56
57
F100 (*1)
S100
MI-10SS3 (*1)
Auxiliary handle
Handle lock
Large terminal cover
Electrical operation device
HT-10SS
TCL-10SS3 (*1)(MI)
(HL)
(TC-L)Mechanical interlock
Type name Referencepage Accessories Type name Reference
page
6s
4s
2s
1s
3h2h
1h
40min
20min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
40s30s20s
10s
0.6s
0.4s
0.2s
0.1s
0.06s
0.0.4s
0.02s
0.01s
Type NF1000-SSD 1000A DC
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
Current (×100% of rated current)
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 5040 70
Maximum
Inst. trip adjustment range(4 steps)
Max. totalinterrupting time
Controlsetting
L0
2
3
Hi
Inst. tripcurrent(A)
Minimum
2800 ± 700
4200 ± 700
5600 ± 700
7000 ± 700
Time
delay trip Inst. trip
6s
4s
2s
1s
3h2h
1h
40min
20min
10min
6min4min
2min
1min
40s30s20s
10s
0.6s
0.4s
0.2s
0.1s
0.06s
0.0.4s
0.02s
0.01s
Type NF1250-SSD 1250A DC
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
Current (×100% of rated current)
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 5040 70
Maximum
Inst. trip adjustment range(4 steps)
Max. totalinterrupting time
Controlsetting
L0
2
3
Hi
Inst. tripcurrent(A)
Minimum
2800 ± 700
4200 ± 700
5600 ± 700
7000 ± 700
Timedelay trip Inst. trip
SHT or UVTAL AXLeft-sidemounting
Right-sidemounting
Operating handleLead wiredirection
Remark: (1) refer to page 41.
6
100
Front connection
Rear connection
Plug-in
140
140 230
8686
20.5
97
35.5
375
187.
5
300
70 7080
R11.5
97
8
13
233
109
15
12
22
18
18
32
ø13
45
110
832 80
15
13
140210
21070
280
ø9.
5
375
ø17
.5
18.5
280190
14017
15 44
4015
70 70
133.5
406
346
43
208
68 25.5
134
1224
8
Conductor thicknesst=6 × 2pcs max.
Bolt M12 × 45
Mounting platePlug-in terminal block M10 terminal block mounting screw
Stud can be rotated 90˚
140
158
32 10430
43
13
ø13
Insulating barrier
Connection allowance
70
204
140
375
48 318
274
Breaker
ø124-pole3-pole
Drilling plan
4-pole3-pole
Insulating barrier(removable)
Mounting hole
ø13 M12 bolt
Conductor thicknesst=8 × 2pcs max.
Bolt M12 × 50
Auxiliary handle(removable)
4-pole3-pole
Breaker
M8 screw or ø10
Drilling plan
Conductor thicknesst=6 × 2pcs max.
Bolt M12 × 45
Insulation cover(removable)
Mounting plate
Connection allowance
M8 screw for mounting breaker
Stud can be rotated 90˚
4-pole3-pole
Breaker
M8 screw or ø10
Drilling plan
4-pole3-pole Breaker
Front-panel cutout
1.0mm clearance on each sideof the handle frame.
Remarks: (1) Standard specifications of NF1000-SSD and NF1250-SSD are 2-pole models. 3-pole and 4-pole models are for DC special voltage.(2) 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
Outside dimensions are same as those of NF1000-SS and NF1250-SS.
Outside dimensions are different from those of NF1000-SS and NF1250-SS.
Outside dimensions are different from those of NF1000-SS and NF1250-SS.
101
6. Characteristics and DimensionsMolded-Case Circuit Breakers
NF1250-UR
■ Operating Characteristics
■ Internal Accessories ■ Current reducing curve
Type name
Rated current In (Amp.)
Number of poles
Reted insulation voltage Ui (V)
Rat
ed s
hort
-circ
uit
brea
king
cap
acity
(kA
)
690
—
85/42
125/65
125/65
170/85
—
3 4
IEC 60947-2
(Icu/Ics)
AC
DC
AC
690V
500V
440V
400V
230V
250V
NF1250-UR
Adjustable600, 700, 800, 1000, 1200, 1250
Notes: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
■ External Accessories
■ Standard Attached Parts
(An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
Front connection
Rear connection
Mounting screw: M8 × 45 (4pcs)Insulating barrier: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)Auxiliary handle: (1pc)
Mounting screw: M8 × 45 (4pcs)Insulating cover: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)Auxiliary handle: (1pc)
Accessories
Operating handleF
S
51
53
65
66
56
57
F120UR (*1)
S100
MI-12UR3 (*1)
Auxiliary handle
Handle lock
Large terminal cover
Electrical operation device
HT-10SS
TCL-12UR3 (*1)(MI)
(HL)
(TC-L)Mechanical interlock
Type name Referencepage Accessories Type name Reference
page
■ Rated current set available value (A)
Rated current can be set to 5 steps with screw method.
NF1250-UR 600, 700, 800, 1000, 1250
Type NF1250-UR
Ambient temperature (°C)
Rat
ed a
mbi
ent
80
70
90
100
110
120
130
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Con
tinuo
us lo
ad c
urre
nt (
%)
3h2h
1h
Current (×100% of rated current)
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 6040
40min
20min30min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
40s30s20s
10s
0.6s
0.4s
0.2s
0.1s
0.06s
0.0.4s
0.02s
0.01s
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
6s
4s
2s
1s
Maximum
Minimum
Unlatching timeMaximum total interrupting time
For 1250A rated current
For 600A rated current
Rated current 600,700,800,1000,1200,1250A adjustableShort-time pickupcurrent adjustable
500% ± 50% 750% ± 75%1000% ± 100%
inst. pickup current adjustable
20kA Fixed
TypeNF1250-UR
+4kA-2kA
SHT or UVTAL AXLeft-sidemounting
Right-sidemounting
Operating handleLead wiredirection
Short-time pickup currentadjustment range
Remark: (1) refer to page 41.
6
102
Front connection
Rear connection
Plug-in
375
284194
15
346
51
22.5
1544
144137.5
17
70 70
32
8
8040
6
106
566
13
43
80
15
13
43 70210
310140240
ø17
.5
ø9.
5
ø13
ø17
.5
ø9.
5
28419414417 185
32137.522.5 8
8112
140 260 330 8070 70
8686
39.5
35.5
81.5
269
15
88
22
18
13 4510
9
273
120
97
R11.5
ø9.
5
ø13
ø12
13
30
158
32 104
ø17
.5
352
262
212
137.5 68 134140
204
70
136
100.
513
628
.5
28.5
269
22.5
25.5
225
12
269
105
22.5
17
43
Neutral pole
4-pole3-pole
Insulating barrierInsulating barrier
Mounting hole
Center line of breaker
Mounting hole
Terminal block
Terminal block
ø13 M12 bolt
ø13 M12 bolt
Conductor thicknesst=8 × 2pcs max.
Conductor thicknesst=6 × 2pcs max.
Bolt M12 × 50
Bolt M12 × 45
Auxiliary handle(removable)
Auxiliary handle(removable)
Auxiliary handle(removable)
4-pole3-pole
Breaker
M8 screw or ø10
Drilling plan
4-pole3-pole
Breaker
M8 tap or ø10
Drilling plan
3-pole Drilling plan
Mounting plate
Terminal block
Connectionallowance
M8 screw formounting breaker
Insulation cover(removable)
4-pole3-pole Breaker
Front-panel cutout
1.0mm clearance on each sideof the handle frame.
Conductor thicknesst=6 × 2pcs max.
Bolt M12 × 45
Mounting platePlug-in terminal block
M10 terminal block mounting screw
Stud can be rotated 90˚
Insulating barrier
Connection allowance
Breaker
Standard direction of stud is horizontal on power side, and vertical on load side. Otherwise, specify the direction.
103
NF1600-SS
■ Operating Characteristics
■ Internal Accessories ■ Current reducing curve
Type name
Rated current In (Amp.)
Number of poles
Reted insulation voltage Ui (V)
Rat
ed s
hort
-circ
uit
brea
king
cap
acity
(kA
)
660
—
25/13
65/33
85/43
85/43
125/63
—
3 4
IEC 60947-2
(Icu/Ics)
AC
DC
AC
DC
690V
500V
440V
400V
230V
250V
NF1600-SS
Adjustable800, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1500, 1600
Type NF1600-SS
Rated current can be set to 6 steps with screw method.
NF1600-SSNF1600-PAL
800, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1500, 1600
Notes: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
■ Standard Attached Parts
Front connection
Rear connection
Mounting screw: M8 × 40 (4pcs)Insulating barrier: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)Auxiliary handle: (1pc)
Mounting screw: M8 × 40 (4pcs)Auxiliary handle: (1pc)
■ External Accessories(An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
Accessories
Operating handleF
S
51
53
65
66
57
F100 (*1)
S100
MI-16SS3 (*1)
Auxiliary handle
Handle lock
Electrical operation device
HT-10SS
(MI)
(HL)
Mechanical interlock
Type name Referencepage Accessories Type name Reference
page
■ Rated current set available value (A)
40s
1min
2min
4min
6min
10min
20min
Maximum
Short-time pickup currentadjustment range
For 1600A rated current
For 800A rated current
Minimum
Unlatching time
30min
20s
10s
6s
4s
2s
1s
0.6s
0.4s
0.2s
0.1s
0.06s
0.04s
0.02s
0.01s
30s
40min1h
2h
3h
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
Current (×100% of rated current)
1 2 3 4 5 7 10 6030 4020
Max. total interrupting time
Rated current 800, 1000,
1200, 1400, 1500, 1600A
adjustable
Short-time pickup
current adjustable
300% ± 30%
450% ± 45%
600% ± 60%inst, pickup current
20kA Fixed
TypeNF1600-SS
AC
+4kA-2kA
Ambient temperature (°C)
Rat
ed a
mbi
ent
80
70
90
100
110
120
130
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Con
tinuo
us lo
ad c
urre
nt (
%)
SHT or UVTAL AXLeft-sidemounting
Right-sidemounting
Operating handleLead wiredirection
Only SHT can be mounted onright-side of NF1600-PAL.
Remark: (1) refer to page 41.
6. Characteristics and DimensionsMolded-Case Circuit Breakers
6
104
Front connection
Rear connection
Draw-out
490
416212
466
430
217
ø11
ø17.
5
ø9.
5
210 280
N
203
263364.5
280190
140
133.5
17
20
20 35
70 7080
97
49.5
18.5
304.5
101.5
6038
38
(185
.5)
(185
.5)15
406
130
346
375
115
R11.5
212
273
3660 5418
20
318
106
106
603818
273
269
160
min
.10
0 m
ax.
81.5
109
38
15
15
140 125
70
70
210
140
1515 38
70
109
20
38 38125 15
200140
4-pole3-pole
4-pole3-pole
Insulating barrier(removable)
Insulating barrier(removable)
Mounting hole
Conductor thickness t=6 × W75 max.
Bolt M10 × 65
Auxiliary handle(removable)
Neutral pole 4-pole3-pole
Breaker
Drilling plan
M8 tap or ø10
4-pole3-pole Breaker
Front-panel cutout
1.0mm clearance on each sideof the handle frame.
Stud can be rotated 90˚ Stud can be rotated 90˚
Mounting angle Mounting angle
Mounting angle
ø11BM10 × 50 bolt
ø11M10 × 50 bolt
Connectionallowance
Connectionallowance
Conductor thicknesst=6 × W75 max.
Conductor thicknesst=6 × W75 max.
4-pole3-pole
Breaker
M8 tap or ø10
Drilling plan
ø14
Drilling plan
798 Draw-out position
216 127
28
397
424 Breaking position362 Connecting position
938 Draw-out position
412 Connecting position 101
38 19
20203
150
395
Con
nect
ing
posi
tion
25
3863
.516
827
3
802502 Connecting position
917 Connecting position
Auxiliary handle(removable)
Center line of breaker
Center line of breaker
60 min. 320 min.416
Rotating diameter
Mounting hole ø14
R163
158
217
430
287
550
Rail for draw-out(removable)
Handle for plug-inand draw-out
Liftingholeø30
Auxiliary circuitterminal
ø11M10 bolt
This is a standard direction of stud.Specify in case of mounting vertically.
Remarks: (1) Draw-out is only for 3-pole models of NF1600-SS.
105
NF1600-SSD
■ Operating Characteristics
Type name
Rated current In (Amp.)
Number of poles
Reted insulation voltage Ui (V)
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA)
IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics)
Time constant not larger than
10msec
1600
2
250
40/20DC
DC
250V
NF1600-SSD
Note: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
■ Standard Attached Parts
Front connection
Rear connection
Mounting screw: M8 × 40 (4pcs)Insulating barrier: (2P: 1pc, 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)Auxiliary handle: (1pc)
Mounting screw: M8 × 40 (4pcs)Auxiliary handle: (1pc)
■ External Accessories(An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
Accessories
Operating handleF
S
51
53
65
66
57
F100 (*1)
S100
MI-16SS3 (*1)
Auxiliary handle
Handle lock
Electrical operation device
HT-10SS
(MI)
(HL)
Mechanical interlock
Type name Referencepage Accessories Type name Reference
page
■ Internal Accessories
Type NF1600-SSD
SHT or UVTAL AXLeft-sidemounting
Right-sidemounting
Operating handleLead wiredirection
Remark: (1) refer to page 41.
Max. allowable time of Overcurrent
Inst.trip
Inst. trip adjustmentrange (4 steps)
Controsettingl
Inst. tripcurrent(A)
Lo23Hi
3200±8004800±8006400±8008000±800
Max. totalinterrupting time
×100% of rated current
100 135 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
TypeNF1600-SSDfor MAG-ONLY1600ADC
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
0.02s
0.01s
0.05s
0.1s
0.2s
0.5s
1s
2s
5s
10s
20s
30s
1min
2min
4min
6min
10min14min20min30min
1h
2h
4h
6. Characteristics and DimensionsMolded-Case Circuit Breakers
6
106
Front connection
Rear connection
ø17
.5
ø9.
5
60ø1138
203263
364.5
18.5
280190
140133.5
20 70 70 80
R11.5
97
17
49.5
304.5101.5
20 35
210 280
(185
.5)
(185
.5)15
3811
5
406
130
346
375
140
140 200125
38 15
15
140
70 70
125
36 38 60
233
212 10
631
823
3
37510
920
106
1838 60
109
20
15
38
15 1538
Insulating barrier(removable)
Mounting hole
4-pole3-pole
Conductor thickness t=6 × W75 max.
Bolt M10 × 65
Auxiliary handle(removable)
4-pole3-pole
Breaker
Drilling plan
M8 tap or ø10
4-pole
3-pole Breaker
Front-panel cutout
1.0mm clearance on each sideof the handle frame.
4-pole3-pole
Stud is in horizontal direction.Stud can not be rotated 90˚
Stud can be rotated 90˚
Mounting angle Mounting angle
ø11M10 × 50 bolt
ø11M10 × 50 bolt
Connection allowance
Connection allowance
Conductor thicknesst=6 × W75 max. Conductor thickness
t=6 × W75 max.
160
min
.17
5 m
in.
Mounting angle
4-pole3-pole
Breaker
M8 tap or ø10
Drilling plan
Outside dimensions are same as those of NF1600-SS.
Outside dimensions are different from those of NF1600-SS.
Remarks: (1) Standard specification of NF1600-SSD is 2-pole model. 3-pole and 4-pole models are for DC special voltage.(2) 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
107
6. Characteristics and DimensionsEarth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
NV30-CS
■ Operating Characteristics
■ Internal Accessories
■ Earth-Leakage Tripping Characteristics
■ Temperature Characteristics
Remark: (1) Standard lead wire is drawn from side. However, lead wire drawn by load can be producedupon request.
(2) refer to page 40.
Leakage current(% of rated current sensitivity)
25
0.01s0.02
0.05
0.1
0.2
0.5
1s
2
5
10
2030
1min
2
46
10
2030
1h
2
4
50 100 500
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
■ Standard Attached Parts (Front connection)NV30-CS
Mounting screw: M4 × 0.7 × 20 (2pcs)
■ External Accessories
Term
inal
cov
er
Accessories
66
66
6656
(LC) (TC-S)
(TC-L)
(BTC)
(TTC)
Lock cover
Rail mounting adapter
Handle lock device
LC03CS
DIN-03CS
HL-05FH
TCS-03CS3W
TCL-03CS3W
BTC-03CS
TTC-03CS
Small
Large
Rear
Skeleton
Type name Referencepage Accessories Type name Reference
page
Type NV30-CS
Rated breaking capacity (kA)IEC60947-2Icu/Ics
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC)
Number of poles
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max.operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max.operating time at 2I∆n (s)
Inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s)
AC
Rated current In (A) at ambient temperature 30°C
High-speedtype
Time-delaytype
Earth-leakage indication system
Type name NV30-CS
3
230
5, 10, 15, 20, 30
30
0.04
—
—
—
Button
—
—
2.5/2
440V
400V
230V
×100% of rated current
Min.
Max.
Type NV30-CS
Operating Characteristics
10.01s
0.02s
0.06s
0.04s
0.1s
0.2s
0.6s
0.4s
1s
2s
4s
6s
10s
20s30s40s
1min
2min
4min
6min
10min
20min
40min
1h
2h
3h
1.3 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 50 70 1004030
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
-5 0
7080
100
150
200
250300
10 20 30 40 50
Ambient temperature (°C)
Ope
ratin
g tim
e ch
ange
rat
e (%
)
Rat
ed a
mbi
ent
Rat
ed n
on-o
pera
ting
curr
ent s
ensi
tivity
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
AL AX
MGLeft-sidemounting
Right-sidemounting
Operating handleLead wiredirection
6
108
Front connection
Rear connection
23.5
67.5
64 54 50
ø8.
5
14.5
12.5
76.5
96
Mtg. holeTest button
Leakageindicator button
M5 screw
Bus t max. =3
Bus drilling fordirect connection
Drilling plan
Drilling plan
Front-plate cutout
ø5
10
28
49
52
554
67
6
ø5.5
(max)
84
23.5
Breaker
M4 ✕ 0.7taps or ø5
8476.5
23.5
BreakerBreaker
R1
ø14
M4 ✕ 0.7 tapsor ø5
55
76.5
Mtg plat t max =3.2
Insulating tube
5
38.5
58.5
8
45 (
min
)
25 (
min
)
Breaker mtgM4 ✕ 0.7 screw
M6 screw
47
65
52
109
Test button
Leakageindication button
Senstivityselector
ZCT
NV32-SWNV63-SW
NV63-CWNV63-HW
AL AX
MG EAL
TBM
■ Earth-Leakage Tripping Characteristics
UVT
Type name NV32-SW NV63-CW NV63-SW NV63-HW
Number of poles 3 3 3 3
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC)
High-speed type
230–400–440Multi-voltage type
230–400–440Multi-voltage type
230–400–440Multi-voltage type
230–400–440Multi-voltage type
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
30 • 100 • 500Selectable
30 • 100 • 500Selectable
30 • 100 • 500Selectable
30 • 100 • 500Selectable
0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04
Earth-leakage indication system
Standard Attached Parts (Front connection)
Rated breaking capacity (kA)IEC60947-2 (Icu/Ics)
AC440V
AC400V
AC380V
AC230V
Button
5/2
5/2
5/2
10/5
Button
2.5/1
5/2
5/2
7.5/4
Button
7.5/4
7.5/4
7.5/4
15/8
Button
10/5
10/5
10/5
25/13
Rated current In (Amp.) 6 10 1620 25 32
16 20 25 3240 50 63
16 20 25 3240 50 63
16 20 25 3240 50 63
■ Operating Characteristics
■ Internal Accessories ■ Temperature Characteristics
■ External Accessories ■ Internal Wiring Diagram
Line
sid
e
Load
sid
e
Left-sidemounting
Right-sidemounting
Operating handle
Lead wiredirection
Min.
Max.
×100% of Rated current
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
NV63-CW NV63-SW NV63-HW NV32-SW
4h
2h
1h
30min 20min 14min 10min 6min 4min
2min
1min
30s20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 400.01s
Rate
d am
bien
t
Ambient temperature (°C)Ope
ratin
g tim
e ch
ange
rat
e (%
)
300250
200
150
100
8070
6050403020100
300250
200
150
100
8070
6050403020100–10
Magneticdevice
Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (2pcs)Insulation barrier: (3P: 2pcs) excluding models of NV63-CW
Remark: (1) refer to page 40.
Type nameType name
F05SW F 51
53
50
Ml Ml-05SW3 (*1) 65S S05SW
V V05SWF
—R —
Small TC-S TCS-05SW3W
56
Large TC-L TCL-05SW3W
Skeleton TTC TTC-05SW3
Rear BTC BTC-05SW3W
LC LC-05SW
Plug-in PTC PTC-05SW3W(*1)HL HLN-05SW
HLF-05SW66
DIN-05SW 66
HL-S HLS-05SW
Note: (*1) HLF and HLS types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.
Ter
min
al c
over
Accessories Accessories
Mechanicalinterlock
IEC 35mm railmounting adapters
Referencepage
Referencepage
Operating handle
Handle lock device
High-speedtype
Ground-fault current(% of rated current sensitivity)
0.04s
1h
2h
4h
30min
10min
4min
2min
1min
30s
2s
10s
5s
0.2s
1s
0.02s
0.01s
0.1s
0.5s
50025 10050
Rate
d no
nope
ratin
g cu
rrent
Rate
d cu
rrent
sen
sitivi
ty
Type NV32-SW
6. Characteristics and DimensionsEarth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
6
110
Front connection
Rear connection
Plug-in
Leakageindicaton button
Sensitivity currentselector
Test button
Drilling plan
M4×0.7 tapsor 5mm dia.hole
Breaker
Conductor drillingfor direct connection
(Conductor thickness t=5 max.)
φ5.5
(6.5mm-diameter for 63A)
Screw terminal
Applicablewire size:1.6mm-dia.to 22mm2
M5×0.8 screw(M6 for 63A)Insulation barrier
(removable)
Mounting hole
Trip button
50111
130
111
22
50
75
84
24
45
φ4.5
φ8.5
61
68
724
90
12.5 max.
6
25
M4×0.7 tapsor 5mm-dia.hole
Breaker
Drilling plan
M4×0.7 screwfor mounting breaker
M6 screw
Insulation tube
Mounting panelt=3.2max
φ14
111
25
50
50
6
111
42
68
72
8
27 min.
Front-panel cutout
1.0mm clearance on each side ofthe handle frame.
Breaker
70
52
R1
Conductor drilling cutoutfor direct connection
Cutout and drilling plan
6mm-dia.hole orM5×0.8 taps
Breaker (plug-in terminal block)
Center line ofbreaker body
M5×0.8 terminal block mounting screw
M6 screw
Details of terminal
Plug-in terminal block
Mounting panel
φ6.5
11
54
5454
80
82
25
50
80
111
16.5 max.
7
3
180
83.5
85
30
21
89
5.5
15.5
10
111
ZCT
AL AX
MG EAL TBM
UVT
F F1SW 51
53
50
54
Ml Ml-05SW3 (*4) 65S S1SW
V V1SW (*1)
R R1SW
Small TC-S TCS-1SW3W (*4)
56
Large TC-L TCL-1SW3W (*4)
Skeleton TTC TTC-1SW3(*4)
Rear BTC BTC-1SW3W (*4)
MDS-NV1SWE (*3)
LC LC-1SW
Plug-in PTC PTC-1SW3W (*4)
(*2)HL
HLF-1SW66
DIN-1SW (*4) 66
57
HLN-1SW
HL-S HLS-1SW
NV125-CWNV125-HW
NV125-SW
*1: 3P onlyNote: The time-delayed types will be produced when they have the current specifications of 20A or more.
Type name NV125-CW NV125-SW NV125-HW
Number of poles 3 3 34 4
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC)
High-speed type
Time-delay type
230–400–440Multi-voltage type
230–400–440Multi-voltage type
230–400–440Multi-voltage type
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
30 • 100 • 500Selectable
30 • 100 • 500Selectable
30 • 100 • 500Selectable
0.04 0.04 0.04
100 • 300 • 500Selectable
100 • 300 • 500Selectable
100 • 300 • 500Selectable
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s)
Earth-leakage indication system
Rated breaking capacity (kA)IEC60947-2 (Icu/Ics)
AC440V
AC400V
AC230V
0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0Selectable
0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0Selectable
0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0Selectable
0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0
Button
10/5
10/5
30/15
0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0
Button
25/13
30/15
50/25
0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0
Button
50/25
50/25
100/50
Rated current In (Amp.) 63 80100 125
16 20 3240 50 63
80 100 (125)*1
16 20 3240 50 63
80 100
Ter
min
al c
over
Test button
Leakageindication button
Senstivityselector
Line
sid
e
Load
sid
e
Magneticdevice
■ External Accessories ■ Internal Wiring Diagram
Left-sidemounting
Right-sidemounting
Operating handle
Lead wiredirection
■ Internal Accessories ■ Temperature Characteristics
■ Operating Characteristics
Min.
Max.
Max. (60A~100A)
(40A~50A)
(IEC 60947-2)NV125-HW 40A~100ANV125-SW 40A~100ANV125-CW 63A~100ATypes
breaking timeMax. total
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip
×100% of Rated current
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
30s20s
10s
5s
0.01s
0.02s
0.05s
0.1s
0.2s
0.5s
1s
2s
1min
2min
4min6min
4h
2h
1h
30min20min14min10min
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 501.3
Min.
Max.
(IEC 60947-2)NV125-SW 125ANV125-CW 125ATypes
breaking timeMax. total
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip
×100% of Rated current
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
30s20s
10s
5s
0.01s
0.02s
0.05s
0.1s
0.2s
0.5s
1s
2s
1min
2min
4min6min
4h
2h
1h
30min20min14min10min
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 501.3
×100% of Rated current
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 501.3
4h
2h
1h
30min20min
10min14min
6min4min
2min
1min
30s20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s70601 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 501.3
×100% of Rated current
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
–10
130
120
110
100
90
800 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
Rat
ed a
mbi
ent
Cur
rent
rat
ing
(%)
Standard Attached Parts (Front connection)Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)
Insulation barrier: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)excluding models of NV125-CW
Remark: (1) refer to page 40.
Type nameAccessories
Mechanicalinterlock
IEC 35mm railmounting adapters
Referencepage
Type nameAccessories Referencepage
Operatinghandle
Handle lockdevice
Electricaloperation device
Notes: (*1) Attach the letter "F" to the end of designation for a fixed type.(*2) HLF and HLS types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.(*3) Specify the working voltage. (*4) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
■ Earth-Leakage Tripping Characteristics
typespeedHigh-
0.45s(MAX)Time-delay type
1s(MAX)Time-delay type
2s(MAX)Time-delay type
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
Ground-fault current (% of rated current sensitivity)
0.04s
1h2h4h
30min
10min
4min2min1min30s
2s
10s5s
0.2s
1s
0.02s0.01s
0.1s
0.5s
50 100010025 50050 100010025 50050 100010025 50050025 10050
nonoperating timeInertial
nonoperating timeInertial
nonoperating timeInertial
Rate
d no
nope
ratin
g cu
rrent
Rate
d cu
rrent
sen
sitivi
ty
Rate
d no
nope
ratin
g cu
rrent
Rate
d no
nope
ratin
g cu
rrent
Rate
d no
nope
ratin
g cu
rrent
Rate
d cu
rrent
sen
sitivi
ty
Rate
d cu
rrent
sen
sitivi
ty
Rate
d cu
rrent
sen
sitivi
ty
Instantaneous tripTime-delay trip
Max. totalbreaking time
TypesNV125-SW 32ANV125-HW 32A(IEC 60947-2)
Max.
Min.O
pera
ting
time
30s20s
10s
5s
0.01s
0.02s
0.05s
0.1s
0.2s
0.5s
1s
2s
1min
2min
4min6min
4h
2h
1h
30min20min14min10min
Max.
Min.
timebreakingMax. total
(IEC 60947-2)NV125-HW 16A~20ANV125-SW 16A~20ATypes
Instantaneous tripTime-delay trip
Type NV125-CW
6. Characteristics and DimensionsEarth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
6
112
Front connection
Rear connection
Plug-in
Remark: NV125-CW is available in 3-pole only.
30
8
90
4 72
45
61
68
5084
24
22
60
90
50
112
130
Operating timeselector(time-delay type)
Sensitivity currentselector
Test button
Leakageindication button
19 max.120
90
30
110-
111
30
Sensitivity currentselector
Operating timeselector(time-delay type)
Leakageindication button
Test button
M8 screw
M4×0.7 tapsor 5mm-dia. hole
Breaker
(Conductor thickness
t=5 max.)
Conductor drillingfor direct connection
Mounting hole
Insulation barrier(removable)
Tripbutton
ø8.5
Neutral poleTripbutton
Drilling plan4-pole
4-pole3-pole
3-pole
Solderless terminalfor wire size14~2/0AWG CU/AL
Wire connectionCL CL
CLCL
CL
CL
4-pole
R1
28
52
3-pole
86
1.0mm clearance on each sideof the handle frame.
Front-panel cutout
BreakerLC
LC
LC
30
605
60
112
16
2.5
15
104.5
54.5
15
2.5
8.5
68
72
15
52
102
6
30
30
90
112
90
4-pole
3-pole
110-
111
M4×0.7
breakermounting screw
φ18
Mounting base
Mounting platet=3.2 max. Stud rotatable
by 90°
Connection
allowance
M8 bolt
Insulationtube
M4×0.7 taps or5mm-dia. hole
Breaker
Drilling plan
4-pole3-pole
LC
LC
LC LC
89
12.5
30
54 9456
56
127
6030
97
98 190
11
21
30
5.5 20
125
90
16.5 max.
12
134
60
95
CL CL
φ8.5
Plug-in terminal block
Mounting plate
M8 screw
Details of terminal
Conductor drillingfor direct connection
6mm-dia. holeor M5×0.8 taps
Breaker (plug-in terminal block)
4-pole
Drilling plan
4-pole
3-pole
3-pole
M5×0.8Terminal block mounting screw
CL LC
113
NV100-SEPNV100-HEP
■ Operating Characteristics
■ Internal Accessories
■ External Accessories ■ Standard Attached Parts(Front connection)
■ Earth-Leakage Tripping Characteristics
■ Temperature Characteristics
Mounting screw M4x0.7x35 (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)Insulation barrier (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
Leakage current(% of rated current sensitivity)
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
42
1h30
1420
10642
1min
302010
1s0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.020.01s
5
2
25 50 100 500500 10000 500 10000 500 10000
100025 50 100100025 50 10025 50100 1000
Note: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles.(*2) Details will be available upon reguest.
Accessories
Operating handle
F
S
V
LC
HL
HL-S
F1SP
S1SP
V1SP
LC-1SP
HL-1SP
HLS-1SP
Handle lock device Te
rmin
al c
over Small
Large
Skeleton
Rear
Plug-in
Mechanical interlock
IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters
Electrical operation device
MI-05SP3 (*1)
TCS-1SP3 (*1)
TCL-1SP3 (*1)
TTC-1SP3 (*1)
BTC-1SP3 (*1)
PTC-1SP3 (*1)
DIN-1SP3
MD-NV1SP
(MI)
(TC-S)
(TC-L)
(TTC)
(BTC)
(PTC)
Type name Accessories Type name
Remark: (1) refer to page 40.
Type NV100-SEP
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC)
Number of poles
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max.operating time at 5I∆n (S)
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max.operating time at 2I∆n (S)
Inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (S)
AC
Rated current In (A) at ambient temperature 30°C
High-speedtype
Time-delaytype
Earth-leakage indication system
Type name
440V
400V
230V
3 4 3 4
NV100-SEP NV100-HEP
25/13
30/15
50/25
50/25
50/25
100/50
230-400-440 Multi-voltage type
15~20, 30~50, 60~100 Adjustable
30 · 100 · 500 Selectable
0.04
100 · 300 · 500 Selectable
0.45 · 1.0 · 2.0 Selectable
0.1 · 0.5 · 1.0
Button
0.6 0.7 1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 30 4020150.01s
0.02s
0.05s
0.1s
0.2s
0.5s
1s
2s
5s
10s
20s
30s
1min
2min
4min
6min
10min14min20min30min
1h
2h
4h
Pre-alarmpickup current Ip
Ir x (0.70-0.75-0.8-0.85-0.9-0.95-1.0) ±10%
Pre-alarmoperating time Tp
±20%
(at 200%)
Tp=2TL
Current setting (×100% of Ir)×100% of rated current
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
Instantaneous tripping current (×100% of In)
INST pickup current Iix 4 ~ x16 ±15% (Magnification to Rated current)
Max. total breaking time
STD operating time Ts
STD pickup current Is
Ir x (2-2.5-3-3.5-4- 5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
0.3 ± 0.06 s0.2 ± 0.04 s
0.1 ± 0.03 s0.06 ± 0.02 s
NV 100-SEP NV 100-HEP
Note )
Current setting Ir Rated current In
12-60-80-100s ±20%(at 200%)
LTD operating time TL
Note
20A
50A
100A
15~20A
30~50A
60~100A
(Adjustable)
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
High-speedtype
Rat
ed n
on-o
pera
ting
curr
ent s
ensi
tivity
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
Time-delaytype 2s(MAX.)
Rate
d n
on-o
pera
ting c
urr
ent se
nsi
tivity
Inertialnonoperating-time
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
Time-delaytype 1s(MAX.)
Rat
ed n
on-o
pera
ting
curr
ent s
ensi
tivity
Inertialnonoperating-time
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
Time-delaytype 0.45s(MAX.)
Rat
ed n
on-o
pera
ting
curr
ent s
ensi
tivity
Inertialnonoperating-time
Ambient temperature (°C)
80
70
90
100
110
120
130
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Con
tinuo
us lo
ad c
urre
nt (
%)
Rat
ed a
mbi
ent
AL AX
MG EAL TBM
PALLeft-sidemounting
Right-sidemounting
Operating handle
Lead wiredirection
Rated breaking capacity (kA)IEC60947-2Icu/Ics
6. Characteristics and DimensionsEarth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
6
114
Front connection
Rear connection
Flush plate
Plug-in
30
Trip button Trip button
Mounting holeInsulation barrier(removable)
22
60
90 90
120
134
155
50
Neutral pole
Leakageindicator button
Leakageindicator button
24
27
61
68
724
90
102
50
ø8.
5
ø4.
5
8
M8 screw
ø8.5
(Conductor thickness t = 5 max.)
Conductor drilling for direct connection 3-pole
Drilling plan
4-pole
16.5 max.30 30
Breaker
M4 ✕ 0.7taps or 5 mm-dia. hole
132
3-pole 4-pole
Solderless terminalfor wire size15~75A ø1.6~38mm2
80~100A 22~50mm2
Wire connection
Test buttonTestbutton
Sensitivity currentselector
Sensitivity currentselector
Operating timeselector(time-delay type)
Operating timeselector(time-delay type)
68 52
134
15
15
16
10272
15 ø8.5M8 bolt
Connectionallowance
Insulation tube
Mounting panelt = 3.2 max.
Stud rotatableby 90°
3-pole4-pole
5
60
90
M4 ✕ 0.7 screwfor breakermounting
Insulation tube
6
Breaker Breaker
ø1830
60
M4 ✕ 0.7 taps or5 mm-dia. hole
3-pole 4-pole13
2
134
30
30
90
28
86
52
R1
3-pole
4-pole
1.0 mm clearance on each sideof the handle frame.
Front-panel cutout
60
152
3-pole
Terminal cover
Stud6mm-dia.mounting hole
4-pole
181
66
30
90
187
196
Insulation tube (provided forintermediate pole for 3-pole orfor intermediate and neutralpoles for 4-pole)
126
136
161
171
Flush plate
3-pole 4-pole
Cutout and drilling plan
ø6
(Intermediate pole for 3-pole andintermediate and neutral polesfor 4-pole)
(Right and left poles forboth 3- and 4-poles)
35
15 107.5
134
15
15
16
157.5
15
ø8.5M8 bolt
Connectionallowance
Stud rotatableby 90°
Flush plate panel
5
11
205.5
98 134
190
89 30
21
Plug-in terminal block
Details of terminal
Mounting panel
M8 screw
M5 ✕ 0.8 screw Terminal blockto be fixed using terminal boardmounting nuts or to be directlyscrewing it in.
Center lineof breaker body
Conductor drillingfor direct connection
12.5
6095
3090
125
3-pole
4-pole
12
16.5 max.
ø8.5
3-pole 4-pole
97
30
127
60
Breaker (plug-in terminal block)
6 mm-dia. hole orM5 ✕ 0.8 taps
Cutout and drilling plan
54 9456
56
115
AL AX
MG EAL TBM
UVT
F F2SW 51
53
50
54
MlMechanical
interlock Ml-05SW3 (*3) 65S S2SW
V V2SW (*1)
R R2SW
Small TC-S TCS-2SW3W (*3)
56
57
66
Large TC-L TCL-2SW3W (*3)
Skeleton TTC TTC-2SW3 (*3)
Rear BTC BTC-2SW3W (*3)
LC LC-2SW
Plug-in PTC PTC-2SW3W (*3)
(*2)HL
HLF-2SW
MDS-NV2SWE (*4)
HLN-2SW
HL-S HLS-2SW
(*1)
NV250-CWNV250-HW
NV250-SW Type name NV250-CW NV250-SW NV250-HW
Number of poles 3 3 34 4
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC)
High-speed type
Time-delay type
230–400–440Multi-voltage type
230–400–440Multi-voltage type
230–400–440Multi-voltage type
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
30 • 100 • 500Selectable
30 • 100 • 500Selectable
30 • 100 • 500Selectable
0.04 0.04 0.04
100 • 300 • 500Selectable
100 • 300 • 500Selectable
100 • 300 • 500Selectable
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s)
Earth-leakage indication system
Rated breaking capacity (kA)IEC60947-2 (Icu/Ics)
AC440V
AC400V
AC230V
0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0Selectable
0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0Selectable
0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0Selectable
0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0
Button
15/8
18/9
35/18
0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0
Button
25/13
30/15
50/25
0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0
Button
50/13
50/13
100/25
Rated current In (Amp.) 125 150 175200 225 250
125 150 175200 225
125 150 175200 225 250
125 150 175200 225
ZCT
Test button
Leakageindication button
Senstivityselector
Line
sid
e
Load
sid
e
Magneticdevice
Ter
min
al c
over
Left-sidemounting
Right-sidemounting
Operating handle
Lead wiredirection
■ External Accessories
■ Internal Accessories ■ Temperature Characteristics
■ Earth-Leakage Tripping Characteristics■ Operating Characteristics
Rat
ed a
mbi
ent
Cur
reny
rat
ing
(%)
–10 10 20 30 40 50 6080
90
100
110
120
130
Ambient temperature (°C)(rated ambient 40°C)
0
Standard Attached Parts (Front connection) Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)Insulation barrier: (3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
Remark: (*1) refer to page 40.
■ Internal Wiring Diagram
Type nameAccessories Referencepage
Type nameAccessories Referencepage
Operatinghandle
Handle lockdevice
Electricaloperation device
Notes: (*1) Attach the letter "F" to the end of designation for a fixed type.(*2) HLF types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.(*3) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.(*4) Specify the working voltage. (*5) NV250-HW model cannot be produced.
Type NV250-CW
Time-delay trip
Min.
Max.totalbreaking time
Instantaneous trip
NV250-CWNV250-SWNV250-HW
Max.
250A
125~225A
×100% of rated current
10.01s
0.05s
0.02s
1.3
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
2s
1s
32 4
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
4min
30s20s
10s
5s
2min
1min
30min20min
6min10min14min
2h
1h
4h
3075 6 10 15 20 40
High-speedtype
Time-delay type0.45s(MAX)
Time-delay type1s(MAX)
Time-delay type2s(MAX)
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
Ground-fault current (% of rated current sensitivity)
0.04s
1h
2h
4h
30min
10min
4min
2min
1min
30s
2s
10s
5s
0.2s
1s
0.02s
0.01s
0.1s
0.5s
50 100010025 50050 100010025 50050 100010025 50050025 10050
Inertialnonoperating timeInertial
nonoperating time
Inertialnonoperating time
Rat
ed n
onop
erat
ing
curr
ent
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
Rat
ed n
onop
erat
ing
curr
ent
Rat
ed n
onop
erat
ing
curr
ent
Rat
ed n
onop
erat
ing
curr
ent
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
6. Characteristics and DimensionsEarth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
6
116
Front connection
Rear connection
Plug-in
Remark: NV250-CW are available in 3-pole only.
LC
CL LC
LC
CL
CL125~175A 14~95mm2
200~250A 70~125mm2
30
Solderless terminalfor wire size
Wire connection
Test button
Leakageindicationbutton
Sensitivityselector
Operating timeselector(for time-delay type)
3-poleφ8
.5
φ4.5
M4×0.7 screwor φ5
Breaker
M8 bolt(Hex-soket)
(Bus t max.=7)
Bus drilling fordirect connection
Trip button
Mounting holeInsulating barrier(removable)
35
φ8.5
10
23 max.
22
70
24
92
4 72
45
68
61
50102
105 140
105
35
100
100
165
144
4-pole
Neutralpole
35
126
3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
LC CL
LCLC
106
71
72
68
φ9M8 bolt
Connectionallowance
Insulating tubeStud can berotated 90°Mounting plate
t max.=3.2
144
2022
15
15
70
35
M4×0.7breakermounting screw ø24
Drilling plan
M4×0.7screwor φ5
Insulatingtube
4-pole
3-pole
8
6
105
70
35
105
35
126
144
3-pole 4-pole
Breaker
LC
LC CL
CL LC
φ9M8 bolt
Stud attachable in thisdirection only
Con
nect
ion
allo
wan
ce
Mounting plate
Insulating barrier
M6Terminal blockmounting screw
Plug-in terminal block
22
15
70
14
6
153
70
20
2834
.514
4
32
18
200
86
70
107
φ7
Breaker (Terminal block)
Drilling plan
58.5
58.5
8054
142
105
3-pole 4-pole
LC
CL
CL
Front-plate cutout
1mm clearanceon each sideof handle
Breaker
32.5
R1
52
100
4-pole
3-pole
117
■ Internal Accessories ■ Temperature Characteristics
■ External Accessories
AL AX
MG EAL TBM
UVT
(*1)
Left-sidemounting
Right-sidemounting
Operating handle
Lead wiredirection
Ambient temperature (°C)
Der
atin
g of
Loa
d cu
rren
t (%
)
90
80
70
100
110
120
130
0 605040302010-10
Rat
ed a
mbi
ent
■ Earth-Leakage Tripping Characteristics■ Operating Characteristics
NV250-SEW NV250-HEW Type name NV250-SEW NV250-HEW
Number of poles 3 34 4
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC)
High-speed type
Time-delay type
230–400–440Multi-voltage type
230–400–440Multi-voltage type
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
30 • 100 • 500Selectable
30 • 100 • 500Selectable
0.04 0.04
100 • 300 • 500Selectable
100 • 300 • 500Selectable
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s)
Earth-leakage indication system
Rated breaking capacity (kA)IEC60947-2 (Icu/Ics)
AC440V
AC400V
AC230V
0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0Selectable
0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0Selectable
0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0
Button
25/13
30/15
50/25
0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0
Button
50/13
50/13
100/25
Rated current In (Amp.) 125–225Adjustable
125–225Adjustable
Standard Attached Parts (Front connection)Mounting screw:
M4×0.7×55 (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)Insulation barrier: (3P: 4pc, 4P: 6pcs)
Remark: (*1) refer to page 40.
F F2SW 51
53
50
54
Ml Ml-05SW3 (*3) 65S S2SW
V V2SW (*1)
R R2SW
Small TC-S TCS-2SW3W (*3)
56
57
Large TC-L TCL-2SW3W (*3)
Skeleton TTC TTC-2SW3 (*3)
Rear BTC BTC-2SW3W (*3)
LC LC-2SW
Plug-in PTC PTC-2SW3W (*3)
(*2)HL
HLF-2SW66
MDS-NVE2SWE (*4)
HLN-2SW
HL-S HLS-2SW
Ter
min
al c
over
Type nameAccessories Referencepage
Type nameAccessories Referencepage
Operatinghandle
Handle lockdevice
Electricaloperation device
Notes: (*1) Attach the letter “F” to the end of designation for a fixed type.(*2) HLF types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.(*3) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.(*4) Specify the working voltage. (*5) NV250-HEW model cannot be produced.
■ Internal Wiring Diagram
Characteristicsetting part
Sensitivityselector
Magneticdevice
CT
CT
CT
Leakageindication button
Test button
ZCT
Line
sid
e
Load
sid
e
Magneticdevice
Mechanicalinterlock
Type NV250-SEW
High-speedtype
Time-delay type0.45s(MAX)
Time-delay type1s(MAX)
Time-delay type2s(MAX)
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
Ground-fault current (% of rated current sensitivity)
0.04s
1h
2h
4h
30min
10min
4min
2min
1min
30s
2s
10s
5s
0.2s
1s
0.02s
0.01s
0.1s
0.5s
50 100010025 50050 100010025 50050 100010025 50050025 10050
Inertialnonoperating timeInertial
nonoperating time
Inertialnonoperating time
Rat
ed n
onop
erat
ing
curr
ent
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
Rat
ed n
onop
erat
ing
curr
ent
Rat
ed n
onop
erat
ing
curr
ent
Rat
ed n
onop
erat
ing
curr
ent
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
12-60-80-100s ±20%
(at 200%)
±20%2
TP =TL
Pre-alarm operating time TP
Ir ×(0.70-0.75-0.8-0.85-0.9-0.95-1.0) ±10%
Pre-alarmpickup current IP
0.3 ± 0.06s
0.2 ± 0.04s
0.1 ± 0.03s0.06 ± 0.02s
LTD operating time TL
(at 200%)
Ir ×(2-2.5-3-3.5-4-5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
STD operating time Ts
INST pickup current Il
STD pickup current Is
In×(4~16) ±15%
Max.total breaking time
NV250-SEW NV250-HEW
1 1.3 32 4
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
3075 6 10 15 20 400.70.6
×100% of Current setting
Note)Current setting Ir Rated current In125~225A 225A(Adjustable)
0.01s
0.05s
0.02s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
2s
1s
4min
30s20s
10s
5s
2min
1min
30min20min
6min10min14min
2h
1h
4h
Note) Instantaneous tripping current (×100% of In)
PAL
6. Characteristics and DimensionsEarth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
6
118
Front connection
Rear connection
Plug-in
30
125 175A 14 95mm2
200 225A 70 125mm2
Solderless terminalfor wire size
Wire connection
ø8.5
144
165
100
100
35
105
140
126
35
φ8.5 ø4.
5
35
10
23max.
22
70
24
92
4 72
45
68
61
50
102
(upp
er c
over
)
105
Tripbutton
Operatingcharacteristicsselector
Operatingtime selector(for time-delay type)
Sensitivity selector
Leakage indicatorbutton
Insulating barrier(removable)
Mounting hole
Neutralpole
(Hex-soket)
(Bus t max.=7)
Bus drilling fordirect connection
3-pole
M4×0.7 taps or φ5
4-pole
Drilling plan
M8 bolt
3-pole 4-pole
Breaker
Testcover
Test button
Current indication LED OVER PAL 70%
Note: The setting of selector is available by openning the upper cover.
144
126
35
105
35
70
105
6
8
3-pole
4-pole
106
71
72
68
ø24
35
70
144
2022
15
15
Mounting plate t max.=3.2
Insulatingtube Stud can be
rotated 90°
Connectionallowance
φ9M8 bolt
M4×0.7breakermounting screw
Insulatingtube
3-pole
Drilling plan
4-pole
M4×0.7 taps
or φ5
Breaker
3-pole
4-pole
100
52
32.5
Breaker
1mm clearanceon each sideof handle
Front-plate cutoutR1
105
142
54 8058
.558
.5
φ7
22
15
70
107
70
14
6
153
70
20
2834
.514
4
32
18
200
86
Mounting platePlug-in terminalblock
M6Terminal blockmounting screw
Con
nect
ion
allo
wan
ce
Stud attachable in thisderection only
Insulating barrier
φ9M8 bolt
Breaker (Terminal block)
Drilling plan
3-pole 4-pole
119
6. Characteristics and DimensionsEarth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
F 51
53S
V 50
65
Small TC-S
56
Large TC-L
Rear BTC
—
Skeleton TTC
Plug-in PTC
LC
(*2)HL
HL-S
MI
66
TCS-1SW3W (*1)
TCL-1SW3W (*1)
BTC-1SW3W (*1)
TTC-1SW3 (*1)
PTC-1SW3W (*1)
LC-1SW
HLN-1SW
HLF-1SW
HLS-1SW
F1UW
S1SW
V1UW
R 54R1UW
—
MI-05SW3 (*1)
UVTAL AX
MG EAL TBM
ZCT
Test button
Leakageindication button
Senstivityselector
Line
sid
e
Load
sid
e
Magneticdevice
Ter
min
al c
over
■ External Accessories
Left-sidemounting
Right-sidemounting
Operating handle
Lead wiredirection
■ Internal Accessories ■ Temperature Characteristics
NV125-RW Type name NV125-RW
Number of poles 3
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC)
Note : The Time-delayed types will be produced when they have the current specifications of 20A or more.
High-speed type
Time-delay type
230–400–440Multi-voltage type
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
30 • 100 • 500Selectable
0.04
100 • 300 • 500Selectable
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s)
Earth-leakage indication system
Rated breaking capacity (kA)IEC60947-2 (Icu/Ics)
Standard Attached Parts(Front connection)
AC440V
AC400V
AC230V
0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0Selectable
Mounting screw : M4×0.7×73 (4pcs)Insulation barrier : (3P:4pcs, 4P:6pcs)
0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0
Button
125/125
125/125
125/125
Rated current In (Amp.) 16 20 32 4050 63 80 100
■ Operating Characteristics
Remark: (1) refer to page 40.
■ Internal Wiring Diagram
Type nameAccessories Referencepage
Type nameAccessories Referencepage
Operating handle
Mechanical interlock
Electrical operation device
Handle lockdevice
Notes: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.(*2) HLF and HLS types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.
Cur
rent
rat
ing
(%)
Rat
ed a
mbi
ent
Ambient temperature (°C)
605040302010080
90
100
110
120
130
–10
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
30s20s
10s
5s
0.01s
0.02s
0.05s
0.1s
0.2s
0.5s
1s
2s
1min
2min
4min6min
4h
2h
1h
30min20min14min10min
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
30s20s
10s
5s
0.01s
0.02s
0.05s
0.1s
0.2s
0.5s
1s
2s
1min
2min
4min6min
4h
2h
1h
30min20min14min10min
■ Earth-Leakage Tripping Characteristics
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 501.3
TypesNV125-RW 40A~100A(IEC 60947-2)
Min.
Instantaneous tripTime-delay trip
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 501.3
TypesNV125-RW 32A(IEC 60947-2)
Max.
Min.
×100% of Rated current ×100% of Rated current
Type NV125-RW
High-speedtype
Time-delay type0.45s(MAX)
Time-delay type1s(MAX)
Time-delay type2s(MAX)
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
Ground-fault current (% of rated current sensitivity)
0.04s
1h2h4h
30min
10min
4min2min1min30s
2s
10s5s
0.2s
1s
0.02s0.01s
0.1s
0.5s
50 100010025 50050 100010025 50050 100010025 50050025 10050
Inertialnonoperating timeInertial
nonoperating time
Inertialnonoperating time
Rat
ed n
onop
erat
ing
curr
ent
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
Rat
ed n
onop
erat
ing
curr
ent
Rat
ed n
onop
erat
ing
curr
ent
Rat
ed n
onop
erat
ing
curr
ent
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
Min.
Max.
TypesNV125-RW 16A~32A(IEC 60947-2)
Max. totalbreakingtime
4h
2h
1h
30min20min
10min14min
6min4min
2min
1min
30s20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s70601 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 501.3
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip
Max.
Max.(60A~100A)
(40A~50A)
Max. totalbreaking time
Max. totalbreaking time
×100% of Rated current
6
120
Front connection
Rear connection
Plug-in
Operating timeselector(time-delay type)
Sensitivity currentselector
Test button
Leakageindication button
17319
1
6113
0
3019 max.
171-
172
90
60
22
24
84 5068
61
45
724
90
φ8.5
8
Tripbutton
M4×7 taps or5mm-dia. hole
Mounting hole
(Conductor thickness t=5 max.)
Conductor drilling for direct connection
Breaker
Drilling plan
M8 screw
CL CL
CL LC
171-
172
173
6
M4×7 taps or5mm-dia. hole
30
173
102
52
15
72
68
8.5
2.5
15
54.5
104.5
15
2.5
16
60
5 60
Mounting platet=3.2 max.
Stud rotatbleby 90°
Mounting base
Connectionallowance
M8 bolt
Insulationtube
M4×0.7breakermounting screw
Breaker
Drilling plan
φ18
CL
CL
CL
CL
4.5
52
Front-panel cutout
1.0mm clearance on eachside of the handle frame.
R1
86
BreakerLC
LC
M5×0.8Terminal block mounting screw
6mm-dia. holeor M5×0.8 taps
Drilling plan
Breaker(plug-in terminal block)
Details of terminal Conductor drillingfor direct connection
Plug-in terminalblock
Mounting plate
M8 screw
251
159LC LC
φ8.5
12
16.5 max.205.5
30
21
11
97
30
5656
12.5
LC
60
95
155
115
195 LC
89
CL
121
F F2UW 51
5350
MI MI-05SW3 (*1)S S2SW
V V2UW54R R2UW
Small TC-S TCS-2SW3W (*1)
65
56
— —
66
Large TC-L TCL-2SW3W (*1)
Rear BTC BTC-2SW3W (*1)
Skeleton TTC TTC-2SW3 (*1)LC LC-2SW
Plug-in PTC PTC-2SW3W (*1)
(*2)HL
HLF-2SW
HLN-2SW
HL-S HLS-2SW
UVTAL AX MG EAL TBM
Left-sidemounting
Right-sidemounting
Operating handle
Lead wiredirection
■ Internal Accessories
NV250-RW Type name NV250-RW
Number of poles 3
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC)
High-speed type
Time-delay type
230–400–440Multi-voltage type
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
30 • 100 • 500Selectable
0.04
100 • 300 • 500Selectable
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s)
Earth-leakage indication system
Standard Attached Parts (Front connection)
Rated breaking capacity (kA)IEC60947-2 (Icu/Ics)
Mounting screw : M4 × 0.7 × 55 (2pcs),M4 × 0.7 × 73 (2pcs)
Insulation barrier : (4pcs)
AC440V
AC400V
AC230V
0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0Selectable
0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0
Button
125/125
125/125
125/125
Rated current In (Amp.) 125 150 175200 225
Max.
NV250-RW
Instantaneous trip
breaking timeMax.total
Min.
Time-delay trip
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
4h
2h
1h
30min 20min 14min 10min 6min 4min
2min
1min
30s20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
×100% of Rated current
1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
■ Earth-Leakage Tripping Characteristics■ Operating Characteristics
ZCT
Test button
Leakageindication button
Senstivityselector
Line
sid
e
Load
sid
e
Magneticdevice
■ External Accessories
Ter
min
al c
over
Rat
ed a
mbi
ent
Cur
reny
rat
ing
(%)
–10 10 20 30 40 50 6080
90
100
110
120
130
Ambient temperature (°C)(rated ambient 40°C)
0
■ Ambient Compensating Curve
Remark: (1) refer to page 40.
■ Internal Wiring Diagram
Mechanicalinterlock
Type nameAccessories Referencepage
Type nameAccessories Referencepage
Operating handle
Handle lock device
Electricaloperation device
Notes: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.(*2) HLF types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.
Type NV250-RW
High-speedtype
Time-delay type0.45s(MAX)
Time-delay type1s(MAX)
Time-delay type2s(MAX)
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
Ground-fault current (% of rated current sensitivity)
0.04s
1h2h4h
30min
10min
4min2min1min30s
2s
10s5s
0.2s
1s
0.02s0.01s
0.1s
0.5s
50 100010025 50050 100010025 50050 100010025 50050025 10050
Inertialnonoperating timeInertial
nonoperating time
Inertialnonoperating time
Rat
ed n
onop
erat
ing
curre
nt
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
Rat
ed n
onop
erat
ing
curre
nt
Rat
ed n
onop
erat
ing
curre
nt
Rat
ed n
onop
erat
ing
curre
nt
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
6. Characteristics and DimensionsEarth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
6
122
Front connection
Rear connection
Plug-in
Test button
Leakage indicationbutton
Operating time selector(for time-delay type)
Sensitivity selector
100
100
240
165
75
219
165
75
28
φ8.5
(Bus t max.=7)
Bus drilling fordirect connection
φ8.5
10
23 maxTrip
Button
Mounting holeInsulating barrier(removable)
M8 bolt(Hex-socket)
22
70
105
24
102
50
φ4.5
45
61
68
724
92
M4×0.7 screwor φ5
Drilling plan
Breaker
201
35
125~175A 14~95mm2
200~225A 70~125mm2
Solderless terminalfor wire size
Wire connection
CLC
LC
L
CL
8
72
68
Breaker
Drilling plan
M4×0.7screwor φ5
Insulatingtube
M4×0.7breakermounting screw
φ9M8 bolt
Connection
allowance
Stud can berotated 90°
201
219
35
70
ø24
108
73
219
15
15
22 20
70
6
Mounting platet max.=3.2
Insulatingtube
71
106
LC
CL
CL
CL
11.5
R1
100
Front-plate cutout
1mm clearanceon each sideof handle
Breaker
52
LC
CL
Drilling plan
Con
nect
ion
allo
wan
ce
Breaker (Terminal block)
Insulatingbarrier
φ9M8 bolt
Stud attachable in thisdirection only
M6Terminal blockmounting screw
Plug-in terminalblockMounting plate
70
153
70
15
22
219
275
34.5
86 32
28
6
14
1820
φ770
107
129
155
58.5
58.5
LC
CL
L
L
C
C
123
6. Characteristics and DimensionsEarth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
NV400-CPNV400-SP
■ Operating Characteristics
■ Internal Accessories
■ External Accessories ■ Internal Wiring Diagram
■ Earth-Leakage Tripping Characteristics
■ Ambient Compensating Curve
ZCT
Sensitivityselector
Line
sid
e Load side
Test button
Leakage indication button
1000.01s
1min
1h
0.02s
0.05s
0.1s
0.2s
0.5s
1s
2s
5s
10s
20s
30s
2min
4min6min
10min14min20min30min
2h
4h
130 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
Current (×100% of rated current)
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
Min.
Max.
Operating Characteristics(IEC 60947-2)
NV400-CPNV400-SP
NV400-CP
Max. total breaking time
Instantaneous tripTime-delay trip
NV400-SP
25 2550Ground-fault current
(×100% of rated current sensitivity)Ground-fault current
(×100% of rated current sensitivity)Ground-fault current
(×100% of rated current sensitivity)Ground-fault current
(×100% of rated current sensitivity)
50500100
4h
2h
1h
30min
10min
4min
2min
1min
30s
10s5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.04s0.02s
0.01s
100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
(IEC 60947-2)
EALSHT or UVTRight-sidemounting
Left-sidemounting
Operating handle
AL AX MGLead wiredirection
TBM
Ambient temperature (°C)
605040302010080
90
100
110
120
130
Cur
rent
rat
ing
(%) Reference ambient
temperature
Accessories
Operating handle
F
S
V
51
53
50
65
66
56
66
57
F4SPWNV
S4CP, S4SP
V4SPWNV,V4SPWFNV
MI-4SP3 (*1)
HT-4CP, HT-4SP
Term
inal c
over Large
Skeleton
Rear
Electrical operation device
TCL-4SP3W
TTC-4SP3
BTC-4SP3W
HL-4CP, HL-4SP
HLS-4SP
(MI)
(HT)
(TC-L)
(TTC)
(BTC)
HL
HL-S
Mechanical interlock
Auxiliary handle
Handlelock device
Type name Referencepage Accessories Type name Reference
page
(An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
Rat
ed n
onop
erat
ing
curr
ent
Rat
ed n
onop
erat
ing
curr
ent
Rat
ed n
onop
erat
ing
curr
ent
Rat
ed n
onop
erat
ing
curr
ent
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
Ope
ratin
g tim
eHigh-speedtype
Time-delay type0.45s. (MAX)
Time-delay type1s. (MAX)
Time-delay type2s. (MAX)
Inertialnonoperating timeInertial
nonoperating time
Inertialnonoperating time
Magneticdevice
Type NV400-SP
Rated breaking capacity (kA)IEC60947-2(lcu/lcs)
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC)
Number of poles
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max. operating time at 2I∆n (s)
Inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s)
AC
Rated current In (Amp.)
High-speedtype
Time-delaytype
Earth-leakage indication system
Standard Attached Parts(Front connection)
Type name
440V
400V
230V
NV400-CP NV400-SP
25/13
36/18
50/25
42/42
45/45
85/85
3
230-400-440 Multi-voltage type
250 300 350 400
30 · 100 · 500 Selectable
0.04
100 · 300 · 500 Selectable
0.45 · 1.0 · 2.0 Selectable
0.1 · 0.5 · 1.0
Button
Mounting screw: M6×60 (4pcs)
Insulation barrier: (4pcs)
Remark: (1) refer to page 42 and 43.
Notes: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
6
124
Front connection
Rear connection
Plug-in
44
1075
155(NV400-SP)134(NV400-CP)
103
9744
ø12
.5
ø7
25
844
94.5
47102
39
43
16
257
3951
112140
194
110
12
Mounting hole
Insulating barrier (removable)
Sensitivity current selectorOperating time selector(Time-delay type)
Leakage indication button
Test buttonTrip button
ø10.5
Conductor thickness t=8 max.Conductor drilling for direct connection
Conductor thicknesst=8 max.
Breaker
M6 tap or ø7
M6 tap or ø7
M6 screw formounting breaker
M8 terminal blockmounting screw
Drilling plan
LC
LC
LC
121
18
225
280
3528
8
44
13687
28
163
5555
135
24
Plug-in terminal block Mounting plateBreaker
Drilling plan
LC
LCLC
LC
ø10
25 20 20
113
10
225
265
128 8326
14
87
8
118
44
87
92
Mounting plate
Connectionallowance
Connection allowance
79
160
24
15
ø13 M12 bolt
ø14M12 bolt
ø13 M12 bolt
Stud attachable inthis direction only
Insulating barrier
Insulation tube
ø35
Groove for reducing heat by overcurrentBreaker
Drilling plan
Breaker
1.0mm clearance on eachside of the handle frame.
Front-panel cutout
LC LC
LC
LC
LC
28
Stud can be rotated 90°C
R6
194
225
8
248
194
225
2424
24
11 11
6-ø35
87
44
Load side
Note:
Line side
Boring dimensions for rear connection type barriers (3-pole)
The bore dimensional drawing shows the breaker viewed from the rear.
4-M6 tap or ø7
8-M4 screw Add these tapped holes in 8 positions to standard boring.
125
6. Characteristics and DimensionsEarth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
NV400-SEPNV400-HEPNV400-REP
■ Operating Characteristics
■ Internal Accessories
■ External Accessories ■ Internal Wiring Diagram
■ Earth-Leakage Tripping Characteristics
■ Current reducing curve
NV400-SEP NV400-HEP NV400-REP
3 4 3 4 3
42/42
45/45
85/85
65/65
70/70
100/100
125/63
125/63
150/75
230-400-440 Multi-voltage type
200-400 adjustable
30 · 100 · 500 Selectable
0.1
(100 · 300 · 500 Selectable)
(0.45 · 1.0 · 2.0 Selectable)
(0.1 · 0.5 · 1.1)
Button
Mounting screw: M6×60 (4pcs)
Insulation barrier: (3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
Rated breaking capacity (kA)IEC60947-2(Icu/Ics)
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC)
Number of poles
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Max. inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s)
AC
Rated current In (Amp.)
High-speedtype
Time-delaytype
Earth-leakage indication system
Standard Attached Parts(Front connection)
Note: (1) Rated operational voltage of time-delay type is for both 200V and 415V.
Type name
440V
400V
230V
0.6 0.7 1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 30 4020150.01s
0.02s
0.05s
0.1s
0.2s
0.5s
1s
2s
5s
10s
20s 30s
1min
2min
4min6min
10min14min20min30min
1h
2h
5h
10h
Pre-alarmpickup current IpIr x (0.70-0.75-0.8-0.85-0.9-0.95-1.0) ±10%
Pre-alarmoperating time Tp
±20%
(at 200%)
Tp=2TL
Current setting (×100% of Ir)×100% of rated current
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
Instantaneous tripping current (×100% of In)
INST pickup current IIx 4 ~ x16 ±15%
(Magnification to In)Max. totalbreaking time
STD operating time Ts
STD pickup current Is
Ir x (2-2.5-3-3.5-4- 5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
0.3 ± 0.06 s0.2 ± 0.04 s
0.1 ± 0.03 s0.06 ± 0.02 s
NV400-SEPNV400-HEPNV400-REP
Note )
Rated current In: 400A
12-60-100-150s ±20%(at 200%)
1000s (TL=150s set)670s (TL=100s set)
400s (TL= 60s set)80s (TL= 12s set)
LTD operating time TL
LTD operating time at 125%
(Adjustable)
Current setting Ir: 200-400A
Ambient temperature (°C)
Rat
ed a
mbi
ent
80
70
90
100
110
120
130
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Con
tinuo
us lo
ad c
urre
nt (
%)
Leakage current(% of rated current sensitivity)
25
0.01s
0.02s
0.04s
0.1s
0.2s
0.5s
1s
2s
5s
10s
30s
1min
2min
4min
10min
30min
1h
2h
4h
50 100 500 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
Ope
ratin
g tim
eHigh-speedtype
Time-delay type0.45s. (MAX)
Time-delay type1s. (MAX)
Inertialnonoperating time
Inertialnonoperating time
25 50 100 500 1000
Time-delay type2s. (MAX)
Inertialnonoperating time
SHT or UVTAL AX MG EAL TBM
PAL TILeft-sidemounting
Right-sidemounting
Operating handle Lead wiredirection
Note: (*1) This is for NV400-SEP.(*2) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
Accessories
Operating handle
F
S
V
51
53
50
65
66
56
66
57
F4SPWNV
S4SP
V4SPWNV,V4SPWFNV
MI-4SP3 (*2)
HT-4SP
Term
inal c
over Large
Skeleton
Rear
Electrical operation device
TCL-4SP3W (*1) (*2)
TTC-4SP3 (*2)
BTC-4SP3W (*1) (*2)
HL-4SP
HLS-4SP
(MI)
(HT)
(TC-L)
(TTC)
(BTC)
HL
HL-S
Mechanical interlock
Auxiliary handle
Handlelock device
Type name Referencepage Accessories Type name Reference
page
(An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
ZCT In case of 4P
Leakage indication button
Sensitivityselector
Test button
Load sideLine
sid
e
Characteristicsetting part
CT
CT
CT
CT
N
Remark: (1) Instead of EAL and TBM, pre-alarm module (PAL) or trip indicator (TI) can be attached.(2) refer to page 42 and 43.
Magneticdevice
Magneticdevice
Type NV400-SEP
Rat
ed n
onop
erat
ing
curr
ent
Rat
ed n
onop
erat
ing
curr
ent
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
Rat
ed n
onop
erat
ing
curr
ent
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
Rat
ed n
onop
erat
ing
curr
ent
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
6
126
Front connection
Rear connection
Plug-in
4444
1075
155
103
9744
ø12
.5
ø7
25
844
94.5
47102
39
43
16
257
39
51
112140
194
110
12
Mounting hole
Insulating barrier (removable)
Sensitivity currentselector
Operating time selector(Time-delay type)Leakage indicationbutton
Test button
Neutral pole
Trip button
ø10.5Conductor thickness t=8 max.
Conductor drilling for direct connection
Conductor thicknesst=8 max.
Breaker
M6 tap or ø7
M6 tap or ø7
M6 screw formounting breaker
M8 terminal blockmounting screw
Drilling plan
3-pole
3-pole 4-pole
4-pole
3-pole
4-pole3-pole
4-pole3-pole
3-pole
4-pole
4-pole
3-pole
4-pole
LC
LC
LCLC
LC
121
18
225
280
3528
8
44 87
136
130.5
87
28
181
163
5555
135
24
Plug-in terminal block Mounting plateBreaker
Drilling plan
LC
LCLCLC
LC
ø10
25 20 20
113
10
225
265
128 8326
14
87
130.5
8
118
44 44
43.5
130.5
87
92
Mounting plate
Connectionallowance
Connectionallowance
79
160
24
15
ø13M12 bolt
ø14M12 bolt
ø13M12 bolt
Stud attachablein this direction only
Insulating barrier
Insulation tube
ø35
Groove for reducingheat by overcurrent
Breaker
Drilling plan
Breaker
1.0mm clearance on eachside of the handle frame.
Front-panel cutout
LC LC
LC LC
LC
LC
56
28
168
185
196
Stud can berotated 90°C
R6
194
225
8
248
194
225
2424
24
11 11
6-ø35
87
44
Load side
Note:
Line side
Boring dimensions for rear connection type barriers (3-pole)
The bore dimensional drawing shows the breaker viewed from the rear.
4-M6 tap or ø7
8-M4 screwAdd these tapped holes in 8 positions to standard boring.
127
6. Characteristics and DimensionsEarth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
NV630-CPNV630-SP
■ Operating Characteristics
■ Internal Accessories
■ External Accessories ■ Internal Wiring Diagram
■ Earth-Leakage Tripping Characteristics
■ Ambient Compensating Curve
25 2550 50500100
4h
2h
1h
30min
10min
4min
2min
1min
30s
10s5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.04s0.02s
0.01s
100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
(IEC 60947-2)
Accessories
Operating handle
F
S
V
51
53
50
65
66
56
66
57
F6SPWNV
S4SP
V6SPW, V6SPWF
MI-6SP3
HT-4SP
Term
inal c
over Large
Skeleton
Rear
Electrical operation device
TCL-6SP3
TTC-6SP3
BTC-6SP3
HL-4SP
HLS-6SP
(MI)
(HT)
(TC-L)
(TTC)
(BTC)
HL
HL-S
Mechanical interlock
Auxiliary handle
Handlelock device
Type name Referencepage Accessories Type name Reference
page
External Accessories (An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
Ground-fault current(×100% of rated current sensitivity)
Ground-fault current(×100% of rated current sensitivity)
Ground-fault current(×100% of rated current sensitivity)
Ground-fault current(×100% of rated current sensitivity)
Rat
ed n
onop
erat
ing
curr
ent
Rat
ed n
onop
erat
ing
curr
ent
Rat
ed n
onop
erat
ing
curr
ent
Rat
ed n
onop
erat
ing
curr
ent
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
Ope
ratin
g tim
eHigh-speedtype
Time-delay type0.45s. (MAX)
Time-delay type1s. (MAX)
Time-delay type2s. (MAX)
Inertialnonoperating timeInertial
nonoperating time
Inertialnonoperating time
Rated breaking capacity (kA)IEC60947-2(Icu/Ics)
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC)
Number of poles
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Max. inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s)
AC
Rated current In (Amp.)
High-speedtype
Time-delaytype
Earth-leakage indication system
Standard Attached Parts(Front connection)
Type name
440V
400V
230V
NV630-CP NV630-SP
36/18
36/18
50/25
42/42
45/45
85/85
3
230-400-440 Multi-voltage type
500 600 630
—
—
100 · 300 · 500 Selectable
0.45 · 1.0 · 2.0 Selectable
0.1 · 0.5 · 1.0
Button
Mounting screw: M6×35 (4pcs)
Insulation barrier: (2pcs)
ZCT
Sensitivityselector
Line
sid
e Load side
Test button
Leakage indication button
EALSHT or UVTRight-sidemounting
Left-sidemounting
Operating handle
AL AX MGLead wiredirectionTBM
Ambient temperature (°C)
605040302010080
90
100
110
120
130
1000.01s
1min
1h
0.02s
0.05s
0.1s
0.2s
0.5s
1s
2s
5s
10s
20s
30s
2min
4min6min
10min14min20min30min
2h
4h
130 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
Current (×100% of rated current)
Min.
Max.
Operating Characteristics(IEC 60947-2)
NV630-CPNV630-SP
500A, 600A, 630A
NV630-CP
Max. total breaking time
Instantaneous tripTime-delay trip
NV630-SPAdjustable range
Instantaneous trip current valueadjustable range (4 steps)
Instantaneous trip currentstandard value (%)NV630-SP
Position ofadjustinghandle
Lo
2
3
Hi
400±80
600
800
1000±200
Reference ambienttemperature
Cur
rent
rat
ing
(%)
Magneticdevice
Remark: (1) refer to page 42 and 43.
Type NV630-SP
6
128
Front connection
Rear connection
Plug-in
ø14M12 bolt
Mounting hole
Trip button
243
Breaker
M6 tap or ø770
Drilling plan
Drilling plan
Drilling plan
Front-panel cutout(Conductor thickness t=8 max.)Conductor drilling for direct connection
22
40
ø8.5
12
97
103107
94.5 24
Terminal dimension fordirectly connecting conductor
8
44
8
44
102
15
ø14
ø8
155
5
140210
14
40
51
110
8727
587
832
15
32
32
Insulating barrier (removable)
Sensitivity current selector
Operating time selector(Time-delay type)
Leakage indication button
Test button
Conductor thicknesst=8 max.
295
243
Stud can be rotated 90°CConnectionallowance
Mounting plate25
4013
8 15
113 110
3210
ø13M12 bolt
140
8
M6 screw for mounting breaker
12.5
Groove for reducing heat by overcurrent
M6 tap or ø7
Breaker
ø48
70
140
172
92
Breaker
1.0mm clearance on eachside of the handle frame.
R6
208
70 ø10
Breaker
328
15
112
ø13M12 bolt
40
140
13
Con
nect
ion
allo
wan
ce
25
Mounting plate
Plug-in terminal block
243
301
8
M8 terminal block mounting screw
20
126
23
Stud can be rotated 90°
243
105
155
5656
187
2424
2424
11 11
140
70
243
6-ø48
510
Note: The bore dimensional drawing shows the breaker viewed from the rear.
Boring dimensions for rear connection type barriers (3-pole)
4-M6 tap or ø7
8-M4 screw Add these tapped holes in 8 positions to standard boring.
129
6. Characteristics and DimensionsEarth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
NV630-SEPNV630-HEP
■ Operating Characteristics
■ Internal Accessories
■ External Accessories ■ Internal Wiring Diagram
■ Earth-Leakage Tripping Characteristics
■ Current reducing curve
Notes: (*1) Rated operational voltage of time-delay type is for both 200V and 415V.(*2) Auxiliary handle is attached to 4-pole models.
Leakage current(% of rated current sensitivity)
25
0.01s
0.02s
0.04s
0.1s
0.2s
0.5s
1s
2s
5s
10s
30s
1min
2min
4min
10min
30min
1h
2h
4h
50 100 500 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
Ope
ratin
g tim
eHigh-speedtype
Time-delay type0.45s. (MAX)
Time-delay type1s. (MAX)
Inertialnonoperating time
Inertialnonoperating time
25 50 100 500 1000
Time-delay type2s. (MAX)
Inertialnonoperating time
SHT or UVTAL AX MG EAL TBM
PAL TILeft-sidemounting
Right-sidemounting
Operating handle Lead wiredirection
Note: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
Accessories
Operating handle
F
S
V
51
53
50
65
66
56
66
57
F6SPWNV
S4SP
V6SPWF, V6SPW
MI-6SP3 (*1)
HT-4SP
Term
inal c
over Large
Skeleton
Rear
Electrical operation device
TCL-6SP3 (*1)
TTC-6SP3 (*1)
BTC-6SP3 (*1)
HL-4SP
HLS-6SP
(MI)
(HT)
(TC-L)
(TTC)
(BTC)
HL
HL-S
Mechanical interlock
Auxiliary handle
Handlelock device
Type name Referencepage Accessories Type name Reference
page
(An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
Remark: (1) Instead of EAL and TBM, pre-alarm module (PAL) or trip indicator (TI) can be attached.(2) refer to page 42 and 43.
ZCT In case of 4P
Leakage indication button
Sensitivityselector
Test button
Load sideLine
sid
e
Characteristicsetting part
CT
CT
CT
CT
N
Rated breaking capacity (kA)IEC60947-2(Icu/Ics)
3 4 3
NV630-SEP NV630-HEP
42/42
45/45
85/85
65/65
70/70
100/100
230-400-440 Multi-voltage type
300-630 adjustable
––
––
(100 · 300 · 500 Selectable)
(0.45 · 1.0 · 2.0 Selectable)
(0.1 · 0.5 · 1.0)
Button
Mounting screw: M6×35 (4pcs)
Insulation barrier: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) (*1)
Number of poles
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Max. inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s)
AC
Rated current In (Amp.)
High-speedtype
Time-delaytype
Earth-leakage indication system
Standard Attached Parts (*2)(Front connection)
Type name
440V
400V
230V
Ambient temperature (°C)
Rat
ed a
mbi
ent
80
70
90
100
110
120
130
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Con
tinuo
us lo
ad c
urre
nt (
%)
LTD operating timeat-125%
1000s(TL=150s set) 670s(TL=100s set) 400s(TL= 60s set) 80s(TL= 12s set)
0.01s
0.02s
0.05s
0.1s
0.2s
0.5s
1s
2s
5s
10s
20s30s
1min
2min
4min6min
10min14min20min30min
1h
2h
5h
10h
Pre-alarmpickup current IpIr x(0.70-0.75-0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10% -0.95-1.0)
Pre-alarmoperating time Tp
±20%
(at 200%)
Tp=2TL
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
INST pickup current IIx4~x10 ±15%
(Magnification to In)
Max. totalbreaking time
STD operating time Ts
STD pickup current Is
12-60-100-150s ±20%(at 200%)
Ir x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
0.3 ± 0.06s0.2 ± 0.04s
0.1 ± 0.03s0.06 ± 0.02s
LTD operating time TL
NV630-SEPNV630-HEP
Note)Current setting Ir: 300~630A (Adjustable)
Rated Current In: 630A
Instantaneous tripping current (×100% of In)Current (×100% of Ir)
0.6 0.7 1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 30 402015
Magneticdevice
Magneticdevice
Type NV630-SEP
Rat
ed n
onop
erat
ing
curr
ent
Rat
ed n
onop
erat
ing
curr
ent
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
Rat
ed n
onop
erat
ing
curr
ent
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
Rat
ed n
onop
erat
ing
curr
ent
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
6
130
Front connection
Rear connection
Plug-in
4-pole3-pole
Trip button
Mounting hole
243
Breaker
M6 tap or ø770
70
4-pole
3-pole
Drilling plan
4-pole3-pole
4-pole3-pole
Drilling plan
Drilling plan
Front-panel cutout(Conductor thickness t=8 max.)Conductor drilling for direct connection
22
40
ø8.5
12
97
103
107
94.5
44 24
Terminal dimension for directlyconnecting conductor
8
8
44
102
15
ø14
155
217
275
8787
815
32
5
210
70
280ø14M12 bolt
3232
140210
14
40
51
110
Insulating barrier (removable)
Sensitivitycurrent selector
Operating timeselector(Time-delay type)
Leakageindicationbutton
Test button
Neutral pole
Conductor thicknesst=8 max.
Auxiliary handle(removable)
295
243
Stud can be rotated 90°CConnectionallowance
Mounting plate25
4013
8 15
113 110
32
10
ø13M12 bolt
140
8
M6 screw formounting breaker
12.5
Groove for reducingheat by overcurrent
M6 tap or ø7
Breaker
ø48
70
140
243
70
70
210
105
172
51
92
4-pole
3-poleBreaker
1.0mm clearance on eachside of the handle frame.
R6
155
5656
187
278
140
208
70
ø10
Breaker
328
15
112
ø13M12 bolt
40
140
13
Con
nect
ion
allo
wan
ce
25
Mounting plate
Plug-in terminal block
243
301
8
M8 terminal block mounting screw
20
126
23
Stud can be rotated 90°C
ø8
2424
2424
11 11
140
70
243
6-ø48
510
Note: The bore dimensional drawing shows the breaker viewed from the rear.
Boring dimensions for rear connection type barriers (3-pole)
4-M6 tap or ø7
8-M4 screw Add these tapped holes in 8 positions to standard boring.
131
NV800-SEPNV800-HEP
■ Operating Characteristics
■ Internal Accessories
■ External Accessories
■ Internal Wiring Diagram
■ Earth-Leakage Tripping Characteristics
■ Current reducing curve
Ground-fault current(×100% of rated current sensitivity)
Ground-fault current(×100% of rated current sensitivity)
Ground-fault current(×100% of rated current sensitivity)
Ground-fault current(×100% of rated current sensitivity)
SHT or UVTAL AX MG EAL TBM
PAL TILeft-sidemounting
Remark: (1) Instead of EAL and TBM, pre-alarm module (PAL) or trip indicator (TI) can be attached.(2) refer to page 42 and 43.
Right-sidemounting
Operating handle Lead wiredirection
(An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
Ambient temperature (°C)Wor
king
cur
rent
cor
rect
ing
ratio
(%
)
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
Current (×100% of rated current In)Instantaneous trip current (×100% of reference current In)
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC)
Number of poles
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Max. inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s)
AC
Rated current In (Amp.)
High-speedtype
Time-delaytype
Earth-leakage indication system
Standard Attached Parts(Front connection)
Type name
440V
400V
230V
Rated breaking capacity (kA)IEC60947-2(Icu/Ics)
NV800-SEP
42/42
45/45
85/85
3
230-400-440 Multi-voltage type
400-800 adjustable
—
—
100 · 300 · 500 Selectable
0.45 · 1.0 · 2.0 Selectable
0.1 · 0.5 · 1.0
Button
Mounting screw: M6×35 (4pcs)
Insulation barrier: (2pcs)
Line
sid
e Load side
Leakage indication button
Test button
ZCT
CT
CT
CT
Characteristicsetting part
Sensitivityselector
80
70
90
100
110
120
130
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Reference ambient temperature
Rated current does not depend on temperature. However, if ambient temperature exceeds 40°C, reduce the continuous working current as left curve.
25 2550 50500100
4h
2h
1h
30min
10min
4min
2min
1min
30s
10s5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.04s
0.02s
0.01s
100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
(IEC 60947-2)O
pera
ting
time
Rat
ed n
onop
erat
ing
curr
ent
Rat
ed n
onop
erat
ing
curr
ent
Rat
ed n
onop
erat
ing
curr
ent
Rat
ed n
onop
erat
ing
curr
ent
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
High-speedtype
Time-delay type0.45s. (MAX)
Time-delay type1s. (MAX)
Time-delay type2s. (MAX)
Inertialnonoperating time
Inertialnonoperating time
Inertialnonoperating time
0.01s
0.02s
0.05s
0.1s
0.2s
0.5s
1s
2s
5s
10s
20s30s
1min
2min
4min
6min
10min14min20min30min
1h
2h
5h
10h
60 70 100 130 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 3000 400020001500
INST Pickup current Ii × 4~ × 10 ±15%(Scale factor to In) Max. total breaking time
0.3 ± 0.06s0.2 ± 0.04s
0.1 ± 0.03s0.06 ± 0.02s
STD operating time Ts
STD pickup current IsIr × (2 – 2.5 – 3 – 3.5 – 4 – 5 – 6 – 7 – 8 – 10) ±15%
LTD operating time TL
12 – 60 – 100 – 150s ±20%(at 200%)
Operating Characteristics(IEC 60947-2)
NV800-SEPNV800-HEP
Note) Rated current Ir Reference current In400~800A 800A(continuously adjustable)
LDT operating time TL (at 130%)
790s(TL=150s set)
530s(TL=100s set)
315s(TL= 60s set)
Pre-alarm operating time TpTL
2Tp= ±20%
(at 200%)
±10%
Pre-alarm pickup current Ip
Ir × (0.70 – 0.75
– 0.8 – 0.85 – 0.9
– 0.95 – 1.0)
65s(TL=12s set)
Accessories
Operating handle
F
S
V
51
53
50
65
66
56
66
57
F6SPWNV
S4SP
V6SPWF, V6SPW
MI-6SP3
HT-4SP
Term
inal c
over Large
Skeleton
Rear
Electrical operation device
TCL-6SP3
TTC-6SP3
BTC-6SP3
HL-4SP
HLS-6SP(MI)
(HT)
(TC-L)
(TTC)
(BTC)
HL
HL-SMechanical interlock
Auxiliary handle
Handlelock device
Type name Referencepage Accessories Type name Reference
page
Magneticdevice
Magneticdevice
NV800-HEP
65/65
70/70
100/100
Type NV800-SEP
6. Characteristics and DimensionsEarth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
6
132
Front connection
Rear connection
Plug-in
Trip button
Mounting holeBreaker
M6 tap or ø770
Drilling plan
Drilling plan
Drilling plan
Front-panel cutout(Conductor thickness t=10 max.)
Conductor drilling for direct connection
22
40
ø8.5
12
97
103
107
94.5
26
Terminal dimension for directlyconnecting conductor
8
46
8
46
102
15ø
14
155
275
8787
815
32
5
3232
140
210
14
40
51
110
Insulating barrier (removable)
Sensitivity current selector
Operating time selector(Time-delay type)
Leakage indication button
Test button
Conductor thicknesst=12 max.
295
243
Stud can be rotated 90°
Connectionallowance
Mounting plate25
4013
8 15
113 110
32
10
ø13M12 bolt
140
8M6 screw formounting breaker
12.5
Groove for reducing heat by overcurrentM6 tap or ø7
Breaker
ø4870
140
172
92
Breaker
1.0mm clearance on eachside of the handle frame.
R6
155
5656
187
208
70ø10
Breaker
328
15
112
ø13M12 bolt
40
140
13
Con
nect
ion
allo
wan
ce
25
Mounting plate
Plug-in terminal block
243
301
10
M8 terminal block mounting screw
20
126
23
Stud can be rotated 90°
243
243
105
ø8
2424
2424
11 11
140
70
243
6-ø48
510
Note: The bore dimensional drawing shows the breaker viewed from the rear.
Boring dimensions for rear connection type barriers (3-pole)
4-M6 tap or ø7
8-M4 screw Add these tapped holes in 8 positions to standard boring.
133
6. Characteristics and DimensionsUL489 Listed Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
SHT or UVTAL AX
FF05SWU2PF05SWU Ml Ml-05SWU
S S05SWU
V V05SWUF (*1) Large TC-L TCL-05SWU2TCL-05SWU3
HL HLF-05SWU
■ External Accessories
Left-sidemounting
Right-sidemounting
Operating handle
2-pole
3-pole
Lead wiredirection
NF50-SWU
Rat
ed b
raki
ngca
paci
ty (
kA)
Rated current In (Amp.)
Number of poles 32
IEC60947-2JIS C 8201-2(Icu/Ics)
UL489Rated voltage (AC V)
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
Standard attached parts
240
14
600
7.5/4
7.5/4
7.5/4
15/8
Type name NF50-SWU
5 10 15 2030 40 50
240VAC
500V
440V
400V
230V
AC
Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (2pcs)Insulation barrier: (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs),
Insulation board: (1pc)
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
300
250
200
150
100
8070
Ope
ratin
g tim
e ch
ange
rat
e (%
)
Ambient temperature (°C)
Rate
d am
bien
t
7080
100
150
200
250
300
■ Internal Accessories ■ Temperature Characteristics
(UL489)
NF50-SWU
Operating Characteristics
Max.
Min.
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
4h
2h
1h
30min 20min 14min 10min
6min 4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
×100% of Rated current
1 1.35 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
■ Operating Characteristics
Type nameAccessories Type nameAccessories
Operating handle
Handle lock device
Terminalcover
Mechanical interlock
Note: (*1) Adjustable types can be produced upon request.
Type NF50-SWU
6
134
Front connection
φ8.5
50
45
φ4.5
72
90
68
61
24
150
LCφ5.5
6
12.5 max.
111
50
75
5050
25 22
CL
CL
84 50
4
Conductor drilling
for direct connection
2-pole 3-poleScrew terminal
Applicablewire size: 1.6mm-dia. to 22mm2
(Conductor thickness t=5 max.)
Trip button
Insulation barrier(removable)
Mounting hole
M5×0.8 screw(M6 for 63A)
3098.5
130
111
25
52
7050
LC LC
LC
LCLC
LC
R1
(Line)
(Insulation plate)
CAUTION:
Breaker
2-pole 3-pole 2-pole 3-pole
Drilling plan Front-panel cutout
1.0mm clearance on each side ofthe handle frame.
Breaker
M4×0.7 taps or 5mm dia.hole
When mounted in steel or cast boxcover must be insulated as shown.30mm air gap to cover or 0.8mmfibre insulating plate extending12.7mm out from each side of breaker.
135
6. Characteristics and DimensionsUL489 Listed Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
F F1SWU2PF1SWU Ml Ml-05SWU
S S1SWU
V V1SWU (*1) Large TC-LTCL-1SWU2TCL-1SWU3
HL HLF-1SWU
SHT or UVTAL AXLeft-sidemounting
Right-sidemounting
Operating handle
2-pole
3-pole
Lead wiredirection
■ Internal Accessories
–10
130
120
110
100
90
800 10 20 30 40 50 60
Cur
rent
rat
ing
(%)
Rat
ed a
mbi
ent
Ambient temperature (°C)
■ External Accessories
■ Operating Characteristics
NF100-CWUNF100-SWU
Rat
ed s
hort
-circ
uit b
reak
ing
capa
citie
s (k
A)
Rated current In (Amp.)at ambient temperature 40°C (IEC30°C)
Number of poles 3 32
IEC60947-2JIS C 8201-2(Icu/Ics)
UL489
Rated voltage (AC V)
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
Standard attached parts
240
–
10
600
–
7.5/4
10/5
10/5
30/15
7.5/4
Type name NF100-CWU
50 6075 100
2
480Y/277
22
35
690
8/4
18/9
25/13
30/15
50/25
15/8
NF100-SWU
15 20 30 4050 60
75 100
480Y/277V
240VAC
690V
500V
440V
400V
230V
250V
AC
DC
Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (2pcs)Insulation barrier: (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs),
Insulation board: (1pc)
Min.
NF100-SWU 40A~100ANF100-CWU 50A~100ATypes
Max. (60A~100A)
Max. (40A,50A)
Instantaneous tripTime-delay trip
×100% of Rated current
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
30s20s
10s
5s
0.01s
0.02s
0.05s
0.1s
0.2s
0.5s
1s
2s
1min
2min
4min6min
4h
2h
1h
30min20min14min10min
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 401.35
Min.
NF100-SWU 15A~30A
Type
Max.
4h
2h
1h
30min20min
10min14min
6min4min
2min
1min
30s20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
0.01sInstantaneous tripTime-delay trip
1.35 5040302015107654321 6070
×100% of rated current
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
■ Ambient Compensating Curve
Type nameAccessories Type nameAccessories
Operating handle
Handle lock device
Terminalcover
Mechanical interlock
Note: (*1) Attach the letter “F” to the end of designation for a fixed type.
Type NF100-SWU
6
136
Front connection
3-pole2-pole
CL
LC
CL CL
30
22
60
Tripbutton
Insulation barrier(removable)
Mountinghole
5084
4 72
61
68
906090
150
50
112
45
M8 screw
Conductor drillingfor direct connection
(Conductor thickness t=5 max)
8
φ8.5
19 max.
24
Drilling plan
2-pole 3-pole
R1
52
3-pole
LC
LCCL
2-pole
CLCL LC
110-
111
CL CL
86
30
M4×0.7 taps or5mm-dia. hole
Front-panel cutout
Breaker
30
1.0mm clearance on eachside of the handle frame.
(Line)
(Insulation plate)
Breaker
130
98.5
57
CAUTION:When mounted in steel or cast boxcover must be insulated as shown.30mm air gap to cover or0.8mm fibre insulating plateextending 12.7mm out fromeach side of breaker.
Hexagon socket set screw
Solderless terminal
5.03
3-pole2-pole
LCLC
CL
14~1/0AWG CU/AL
wire size
LC
(Standard)
(Option)Front connection (Solderless terminal)
137
SHT or UVTAL AX
F F2SWUMl MI-05SWU
S S2SWU
V V2SWU (*1)Large TC-L TCL-2SWU3
HL HLF-2SWU
■ External Accessories
Left-sidemounting
Right-sidemounting
Operating handleLead wiredirection
■ Internal Accessories
■ Operating Characteristics
NF225-CWU
Rat
ed s
hort
-circ
uit b
reak
ing
capa
citie
s (k
A)
Rated current In (Amp.)at ambient temperature 40°C (IEC30°C)
Number of poles 3
IEC60947-2JIS C 8201-2(Icu/Ics)
UL489Rated voltage (AC V)
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
Standard attached parts
Type name
240
35
600
10/5
15/8
18/9
35/18
10/5
NF225-CWU
125 150 175200 225
240VAC
500V
440V
400V
230V
250V
AC
DC
Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (2pcs)Insulation barrier: (4pcs),Terminal cover: (1 set),
Insulation board: (1pc)
–10
(rated ambient 40°C)Ambient temperature (°C)
130
120
110
100
90
80605040302010
Rat
ed a
mbi
ent
Cur
reny
rat
ing
(%)
0
(*1)
(*2)
Notes: (*1) Use either two poles. When wired as shown at the bottom of page 26, the models can be used for up to 400 V DC.
(*2) The standard configuration contains a protection cover and adopts the IP20 (finger protection) structure.
4020151065 7 3042 31 1.35
NF225-CWU
time
Max.
Max. total
Instantaneous trip
breaking
Min.
Time-delay trip
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
30s20s
10s
5s
0.01s
0.02s
0.05s
0.1s
0.2s
0.5s
1s
2s
1min
2min
4min6min
4h
2h
1h
30min
20min14min10min
×100% of Rated current
Type nameAccessories Type nameAccessories
Operating handle
Handle lock device
Terminalcover
Mechanical interlock
Note: (*1) Attach the letter “F” to the end of designation for a fixed type.
■ Ambient Compensating Curve
Type NF225-CWU
6. Characteristics and DimensionsUL489 Listed Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
6
138
Front connection
M8 bolt(Hex-soket)
22 max.CAUTION:
When mounted in steel or cast box cover must be insulated as shown.30mm air gap to cover or t0.8 fibre insulating plate extending 12.7mm out from each side of breaker.
30
130
100
(Insulating plate)
(Line side)
100
126
100
100
165
144
35
Drilling plan
M4×0.7 screwor φ5
92
4 72
45
68
61
50102
φ8.5
φ4.5
R1
52
Front cover cutout1mm clearance oneach side of handle
70
105
CL
LC
CL
CL
22
LC
Mounting hole
Insulating barrier
Trip button
Breaker Breaker
Bus drilling fordirect connection
Bus t max.=7
φ8.5
10
LC
24
139
6. Characteristics and DimensionsUL489 Listed Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
SHT or UVT
AL AX
F F2GSWUMl Ml-05SWU
S S2GSWU
V V2GSWU (*1)
Large TC-L TCL-2GSWU3HL HLF-2GSWU
■ External Accessories
Left-sidemounting
Right-sidemounting
Operating handle
Lead wiredirection
–10
Cur
rent
rat
ing
(%)
Rat
ed a
mbi
ent
Ambient temperature (°C)(rated ambient 40°C)
605040302010080
90
100
110
120
130
■ Internal Accessories
NF-SFWNF-SJWNF-HJW
Rat
ed s
hort
-circ
uit b
reak
ing
capa
citie
s (k
A)
IEC60947-2JIS C 8201-2(Icu/Ics)
UL489
Rated voltage (AC V)
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
Standard attached parts
600Y/347143565
6908/8
30/3036/3636/3685/8520/20
600Y/347143565
6908/8
30/3036/3636/3685/8520/20
Rated current In (Amp.)at ambient temperature 40°C (IEC30°C)
15 20 30 4050 60 70 8090 100 110
125 150
(125) (150) 175200 225 250
125 150 175200 225 250
Number of poles 3 3 3600Y/347
1850
100690
15/1536/3650/5050/50
100/10020/20
Type name NF-SFW NF-SJW NF-HJW
600Y/347V480V240V
AC
690V500V440V400V230V250V
AC
DCMounting screw: M4×0.7×73 (4pcs)
Insulation barrier: (4pcs), Insulation board: (1pc)
Note: (*1) Use either two poles. When wired as shown at the bottom of page 26, the models can be used for up to 500 V DC.
(*1)
×100% of Rated current ×100% of Rated current ×100% of Rated current
■ Operating Characteristics
■ Ambient Compensating Curve
Type nameAccessories Type nameAccessories
Operatinghandle
Handlelock device
Terminalcover
Mechanical interlock
Note: (*1) Attach the letter “F” to the end of designation for a fixed type.
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
30s20s
10s
5s
0.01s
0.02s
0.05s
0.1s
0.2s
0.5s
1s
2s
1min
2min
4min6min
4h
2h
1h
30min20min14min10min
(UL489)
Max. totalbreakingtime
Instantaneous tripTime-delay trip
Max.(40A)
Max.(15A~30A)
Min.
NF-SFW15A~40A
Operating Characteristics
1 4020151065 7 3042 31.35
(UL489)
(60A~150A)
(50A)
Max.(50A)
Max.(60A~150A)
Min.
breaking
Instantaneous tripTime-delay trip
50A~150ANF-SFW
Max. total
time
Operating Characteristics
4020151065 7 3042 31.351
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
30s20s
10s
5s
0.01s
0.02s
0.05s
0.1s
0.2s
0.5s
1s
2s
1min
2min
4min6min
4h
2h
1h
30min20min14min10min
AC x In (%)
1000±200800600400±80
10864
Positionof notch
Instantaneous tripadjustment range
NF-SJW/HJW125A~250A
Adjustable rangeMax. totalbreakingtime
Instantaneous tripTime-delay trip
Min.
(UL489)
Max.
Operating Characteristics
4020151065 7 3042 31 1.35
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
30s20s
10s
5s
0.01s
0.02s
0.05s
0.1s
0.2s
0.5s
1s
2s
1min
2min
4min6min
4h
2h
1h
30min20min14min10min
Type NF-SFW
Remark: The reference ambient temperature for IEC models is 30°C.
6
140
Front connection (Standard)
(Option)Front connection (Solderless terminal)
10
6.1
No.14AWG250MCM CU/AL
(2.5~120mm2)
Front-panel cutout
Breaker
100
52
R1
1.0mm clearance
on each side of
the handle frame.
105
Mounting hole
Trip button
22
70
144
4
50
35
ø8.
5
φ4.5
Hexagon socket set screw
24
105
φ8.5
24 max.
(Conductor thickness t=7max.)
185
83
133
63
83
86
90
110
79
5018
550
133
CAUTION:
Insulating barriers must be used
with uninsulated bus bars or
climp on terminals.
95
22
Insulating barrier
(removable)
22
70
144
63
90
110
4
50
35
ø8.
5
φ4.5
126
35
Mounting hole
Trip button
Drilling plan
M4×0.7 taps or
5mm-dia. hole
Breaker
Outline and dimensions (mm (inch))
Type NF-SFW,NF-SJW,NF-HJW
30
130
Insulation plate(Line)
CAUTION:
When mounted in steel or cast box cover
must be insulated as shown.
30mm air gap to cover or extending 12.7mm
out fromeach side of breaker.
79
Wire size
Hex.socket head
M8 bolt
Bus bar drilling for
direct connection
3-FRONT
4-FRONT
5-RIGHT
112
112
86
LC
LC
LC
LC
LC LC
LCLC
141
BHBH-P
■ Operating Characteristics
■ Outside Dimension Diagram•BH •BH-P
■ Ambient Compensating Curve
Type BH
1
230/400
125
BH-P
Number of poles
Rated current (A)at ambient temperature 40°C
Rated voltage (V)
Breakingcapacity(kA) sym.
AC
DC
AC230/400V
AC400V
DC125V
IEC60898
—
1
70
3
—
—
3
2
70, 100
3
70, 100
1
230/400
125
1
70
3
—
—
3
2
70, 100
3
70, 100
Type BH Type BH-P
1.131 21.45 3 4 5 6 7 10 30 4020150.01s
0.02s
0.05s
0.1s
0.2s
0.5s
1s
2s
5s
10s
20s
30s
1min
2min
4min
6min
10min14min
20min
30min
1h
2h
4h
×100% of rated current
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
Operating Characteristics
Type:BH, BH-P
Rated Current:70, 100A
Amb. temp.:40°C
Min.
Max.
Ambient temperature (°C)
Cur
rent
rat
ing
(%)
85
95
105
115
125
135
90
100
110
120
130
140
0 10 30 4020 50 60
70, 100A
Rat
ed a
mbi
ent
25
22
1-pole
50
25
75
50
95 9557 113
100
73
Breakercenter
Mtg hole ø4.5
Mtg bracketM5 × 0.8 screw
(line side & load side)
32
57.5
63.5
77.547
2-pole
47
3-pole 13.5
5.5
6
12
ø5.5
Bus t max. =4
Bus drilling
Note: Two mounting brackets are used for single-pole breakers. and four for two-pole and three-pole breakers.
25 50
25 25
20.5
1-pole
75
25
71.5
7457.5
7.5
M5 x 0.8screw
Mtg slot
Plug-in terminal(line side)
60.5
65.5
7945.5
2-pole
70.5
3-pole 14
4.5
6. Characteristics and DimensionsMiniature Circuit Breakers
6
142
BH-S
■ Operating Characteristics
■ Outside Dimension Diagram
■ Ambient Compensating Curve
Type BH-S M3
1 —
230/400
—
3
—
—
400
125
400
—
BH-S M6
Number of poles
Rated current (A)at ambient temperature 40°C
Rated voltage (V)
Breakingcapacity(kA) sym.
AC
DC
AC230/400V
AC400V
DC125V
IEC60898
—
1
—
3
2 35, 10, 15,
20, (25), 30,40, 50, 60
10, 15, 20, (25), 30, 40,
50, 60
15, 20, (25), 30,40, 50,
60
1 —
230/400
—
6
—
—
400
125
400
—
1
—
6
2 35, 10, 15,
20, (25), 30,40, 50, 60
10, 15, 20, (25), 30, 40,
50, 60
15, 20, (25), 30,40, 50,
60
•BH-S
Type BH-S
Type CType B Type D
1.131 21.45 3 4 5 6 7 10 30 4020150.01s
0.02s
0.05s
0.1s
0.2s
0.5s
1s
2s
5s
10s
20s
30s
1min
2min
4min
6min
10min14min
20min
30min
1h
2h
4h
×100% of rated current
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
Operating Characteristics
Type:BH-S
Rated Current:5~60A
Amb. temp.:40°C
Min.
Max.
Ambient temperature (°C)
Cur
rent
rat
ing
(%)
85
95
105
115
125
135
90
80
100
110
120
130
140
0 10 30 4020 50 60
40-60A5A
10A
15-25A
30A
Rat
ed a
mbi
ent
Mtg bracket
25
1-pole
50
25
95 9557 113
100
73
Mtg holeø4.5
M5 × 0.8 screw(line side & load side)
32
57.5
63.5
76
2-pole 3-pole
5.5
6
12
ø5.5
Bus t max. =4
Bus drilling
Note: Two mounting brackets are used for single-pole breakers. and four for two-pole and three-pole breakers.
75
50
13.5
143
6. Characteristics and DimensionsMiniature Circuit Breakers
BH-PS
■ Operating Characteristics
■ Outside Dimension Diagram
■ Ambient Compensating Curve
Type BH-PS M3
1 —
230/400
—
3
—
—
400
125
400
—
BH-PS M9
Number of poles
Rated current (A)at ambient temperature 40°C
Rated voltage (V)
Breakingcapacity(kA) sym.
AC
DC
AC230/400V
AC400V
DC125V
IEC60898
—
1
—
3
2 310, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50,
60
10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50,
60
15, 20, 30,40, 50, 60
—
230/400
9
—
400
—
400
1
—
9
2 36, 10, 16,
20, (25), 32,40, 50, 60
10, 16, 20, (25), 30, 40,
50, 60
10, 16, 20, (25), 32, 40,
50, 60
•BH-PS
Type BH-PS
Type CType B Type D
1.131 21.45 3 4 5 6 7 10 30 4020150.01s
0.02s
0.05s
0.1s
0.2s
0.5s
1s
2s
5s
10s
20s
30s
1min
2min
4min
6min
10min14min
20min
30min
1h
2h
4h
×100% of rated current
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
Operating Characteristics
Type:BH-PS
Rated Current:5~60A
Amb. temp.:40°C
Min.
Max.
Ambient temperature (°C)
Cur
rent
rat
ing
(%)
85
95
105
115
125
135
90
80
100
110
120
130
140
0 10 30 4020 50 60
6A, 30A, 32A50A, 60A
10A
15-20A, 40A
Rat
ed a
mbi
ent
25
1-pole 2-pole 3-pole
71.5
81.5
57.5
7.5
M5 x 0.8screw
Plug-in terminal(line side)
Mtg slot
60.5
65.5
79
4.5
50
25
75
25 25
22 47 72
14
6
144
BH-D6
■ Operating Characteristics
■ Outside Dimension Diagram■ Ambient Compensating Curve
MCB BH-D6 (IEC60898)
6
Number of poles
Rated current (A)at ambient temperature 30°C
Rated voltage (VAC)
Breaking capacity (kA) sym. (IEC60898)
1
230/400
6, 10, 13, 16, 20,25, 32, 40, 50, 63
2
400
6, 10, 13, 16, 20,25, 32, 40, 50, 63
3
400
6, 10, 13, 16, 20,25, 32, 40, 50, 63
4 (3+N) 2 (1+N)
400 230
6, 10, 13, 16, 20,25, 32, 40, 50, 63
6, 10, 13, 16, 20,25, 32, 40
•BH-D6
Type BH-D6
Min.
Max.
Max totaltripping time
Tripping Characteristics
Type:BH-D6
Rated Current:6A-63A
Amb. temp.:30°C
0.60.01
0.02
0.05
0.1
0.2
0.5
1
2
5
10
203050
100
200
500
1000
2000
5000
10000
sMin
0.7 1 1.13 1.45 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30
1
2
5
10
203050
100
200
×100% of rated current
Trip
ping
tim
e
B C
-10 -5 0
90
85
95
100
105
110
115
120
125
130
135
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
Ambient temperature (°C)
Cur
rent
rat
ings
(%
)
Rat
edam
bien
t
70 maximum
17 44 6
InsulationBarrier(Option)
87
44.5
45 92
54 72
54
1836
Neutral Pole
1-pole 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole
Solderless terminal
18
M5 screw
36
18
N
N
1+N-pole
36
18
N
N
Min.
Max.
6-10A
13-63A
Tripping Characteristics
Type:BH-D6
Rated Current:6A-63A
Amb. temp.:30°C
0.60.01
0.02
0.05
0.1
0.2
0.5
1
2
5
10
203050
100
200
500
1000
2000
5000
10000
sMin
0.7 1 1.13 1.45 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30
1
2
5
10
203050
100
200
×100% of rated current
Trip
ping
tim
e
D
6. Characteristics and DimensionsDIN Series
145
6. Characteristics and DimensionsDIN Series
BH-DN
■ Operating Characteristics
■ Outside Dimension Diagram
MCB BH-DN (IEC60898)
Number of poles
Rated current (A)at ambient temperature 30°C
Rated voltage (VAC)
Breaking capacity (kA) sym. (IEC60898)
2 (1+N)
230
4.5
6, 10, 16, 20
Type : BH-DN
Amb.temp. : 30°CRated current : 6A~20A
1.451.13
Trip
ping
tim
e
× Rated current
CharacteristicsTripping
Min Sec200
100
50
5
5000
500
50
2000
200
1000
10000
100
0.6 0.7 20151065 7 3042 31
3020
10
2
30
1
20
10
5
2
1
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
88
45
644
17
70 m
axim
um
45
M4 SCREW
18
8.4
•BH-DN
NN
Type BH-DN
Min
Max
Max.totaltripping time
Solderless Terminal
6
146
BV-D
■ Operating Characteristics
■ Outside Dimension Diagram
RCCB BV-D (IEC61008)
30, 300
0.04
Type AC
6
Number of poles
Rated current (A)at ambient temperature 30°C
Rated voltage (VAC)
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max. operating time (sec) at 5I∆
Pulsating current sensitivity
Rated conditional short-cirrent (kA)
2 (1+N) 4 (3+N)
230 230/400
25, 40, 63
•BV-D
Type BV-D
Ground fault current (% of rated current sensitivity)
250.01s
0.02s
0.05s
0.1s
0.2s
0.5s
1s
2s
5s
10s
30s20s
1min
2min
4min
10min6min
30min20min
1h
2h
50 100 500
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
Rat
ed n
onop
erat
ing
curr
ent s
ensi
tivity
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
70 maximum
17 44 6
85
42.5
45
18
36
54
18
72
M5 screw Test button Neutral poleResidual indicator
2-pole 4-pole
Solderless terminal
N
N
147
6. Characteristics and DimensionsDIN Series
BV-DN
■ Operating Characteristics ■ Leakage Tripping characteristics
■ Outside Dimension Diagram
RCBO BV-DN (IEC61009)
230
30, 100, 300
0.04
Type AC
4.5
Number of poles
Rated current (A)at ambient temperature 30°C
Rated voltage (VAC)
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max. operating time (sec) at 5I∆n
Pulsating current sensitivity
Breaking capacity (kA) sym (IEC61009)
2 (1+N)
6, 10, 16, 20
88
45
8.4
36
M4 Screw
45
1744
6
70 m
axim
um
Test button
Residual indicator
Solderlessterminal
Type : BV-DN
Amb.temp. : 30°CRated current : 6A~20A
1.451.13
Trip
ping
tim
e
× Rated current
CharacteristicsTripping
Min Sec200
100
50
5
5000
500
50
2000
200
1000
10000
100
0.6 0.7 20151065 7 3042 31
3020
10
2
30
1
20
10
5
2
1
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
Min
Max
Max.totaltripping time
•BV-DN
NN
Type BV-DN
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
Ground-fault current(% of rated current sensitivity)
0.04s
1h
2h
4h
30min
10min
4min
2min
1min
30s
2s
10s
5s
0.2s
1s
0.02s
0.01s
0.1s
0.5s
50025 10050
Rat
ed n
onop
erat
ing
curr
ent
Rat
ed c
urre
nt s
ensi
tivity
6
148
KB-D
■ Outside Dimension Diagram
Isolating switch KB-D (IEC60947-3)
20 × In, 1s
20 × In
AC22A class
Number of poles
Utilization category
Rated current (A)at ambient temperature 30°C
Rated voltage (VAC)
Shot time withstand current (A)
Shot-circuit making capacity (A)
1 2 3 4 (3+N)
230 400
32, 63
•KB-D
N
N
Type KB-D
70 maximum
17 44 6
87
44.5
45 92
18 36 54 72
54
1818 36
M5 screwNeutral Pole
1-pole 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole
InsulationBarrier(Option)
Solderless terminal
149
6. Characteristics and DimensionsCircuit Protectors
CP30-BA
■ Operating Characteristics
■ Outside Dimension Diagram ■ Temperature Characteristics
Frame (A) 30
Type CP30-BA
AC-DC common use
2.5
—
2500
—
0.1, 0.25, 0.3, 0.5,1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10,15, 20, 30
Instantaneous type (I)Medium-speed type (M),(MD) Slow type (S)
Instantaneous type (I): magnetic onlyOther type (M, MD, S):hydraulic magnetic
Number of poles
Rated impulse voltage Uimp (kV)
Rated voltage (V)
AC
DC
Rated current (A)
Operating characteristics
Tripping system
Short circuitrating (A)
125V
240V
250V
60V
120V
1
AC 250DC 65
AC 250DC 125
2500
—
—
—
—
2500
AC 250
2 3
Ratedambient
(Rated ambient 40°C)
Ope
ratin
g tim
e va
riatio
n (%
)
-10
60708090
100
150
200
250
300
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Instantaneous type (I) Medium-speed type (M) Slow type (S) Medium-speed type with inertial delay (MD)
•CP30-BA
Type CP30-BA
ON
19.5
9.5 9.5
12
56 56 56
137
17.5 17.517.5
29.5 1
Terminal cover
Terminal cover
Terminal cover
ON ON
54.5
9.5
47
54
1
Mounting holeø4.5
33
635
IEC 35mm rail
Terminal cover
9065
67
14
9.5
39
Terminal cover for attached terminal block
6365 3
Alarm or auxiliary switch terminal block (Ic contact)Attachable on right-side only
35 5.5
52.5
22.5
5
Alarm or auxiliary switch terminal M3.5(Plus minus self-up screw)(The figure shows auxiliary switch.Example: Alarms are ALa, ALb and ALc.)
AXb
AXa
AXc
3-pole
AXb
AXa
AXc
35
2-pole
AXb
AXa
AXc
17.5
1-pole
12 29.5 47
1-pole2-M tap
Mounting dimension
2-pole 3-pole
54
17.5 17.5
2-M tap2-M4 tapTightening torque 1~1.4 (N-m)
DC
AC
10.01s
0.02s
0.05s
0.1s
0.2s
0.5s
1s
2s
5s
10s
20s30s
1min
2min
4min6min
10min
20min
30min1h
2h
1.25 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 50 100
Current (×100% of rated current)
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
DC
AC
10.01s
0.02s
0.05s
0.1s
0.2s
0.5s
1s
2s
5s
10s
20s30s
1min
2min
4min6min
10min
20min
40min1h
2h
1.251.5 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 50 100
Current (×100% of rated current)
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
DC
AC
10.01s
0.02s
0.05s
0.1s
0.2s
0.5s
1s
2s
5s
10s
20s30s
1min
2min
4min6min
10min
20min
30min1h
2h
1.25 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 50 100
Current (×100% of rated current)
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
AC
10.01s
0.02s
0.05s
0.1s
0.2s
0.5s
1s
2s
5s
10s
20s30s
1min
2min
4min6min
10min
20min
30min1h
2h
1.25 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 50 100
Current (×100% of rated current)
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
Main terminal(Plus minus self-up screw)M4·····20A max.M5·····30A
6
150
CP-BCP-S
■ Operating Characteristics
■ Outside Dimension Diagram
Front connection mounting · IEC rail mounting With auxiliary switch and alarm switch
20.5
8290100
6989
5363
645
Front connection fixtureø4.5 elongated hole
46.5
35
71.5 max.56.5
7.3
IEC 35mm rail
Holder19
1-pole
38
2-pole
57
3-pole
5363
Alarm-auxiliary switch terminal blockIn case of 2-pole and 3-pole, left-side mounting is reference.
39.5
26
Alarm-auxiliary switch terminalM3.5 screw
53
9.5
45
8.5
32.5
19 38
LORD
LINE
Single pole 2-pole 3-pole
Alarm · auxiliary switch terminalTab terminal nominal 110(2.8W × 0.5L)
Main terminalMail tab terminal nominal 250(8.35W × 0.8L)
40
49.5
55 18
3.3
7.3
8.8
11.5
39
19
26.5
42 51
M3 × 0.5 tap(Depth 5)
ø15
38
42 51
M3 × 0.5 tap(Depth 5)
M3 × 0.5 tap(Depth 5)
57
26.5
42 51
26.5
19 19 19
ø15 ø15
10080
0.01s
0.02s
0.05s
0.1s
0.2s
0.5s
1s
2s
5s10s
20s30s
1min
2min
4min6min8min
10min14min20min30min
1h2h
125150
200 300400
500 700600 1000
15002000
3000
Current(×100% of instantaneous tripping current set value)
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
Ope
ratin
g tim
e
Instantaneous type (1)CP-B CP-S
•CP-B
•CP-SSeries <With auxiliary switch (AX), With series alarm switch (AL)>Switch <With switch type auxiliary switch (AX)>
100125
200 300400
500700
1000 20003000
40005000
700010000
Current(×100% of rated current)
Current(×100% of rated current)
Current(×100% of rated current)
Current(×100% of rated current)
0.01s
0.02s0.04s0.06s0.1s0.2s
0.4s0.6s
1s
2s4s6s
10s
20s30s
1min
2min
4min6min
10min
20min
40min1h
3h2h
High-speed type (F)CP-B Reference ambient temperature 40°CCP-S Reference ambient temperature 25°C
100125
200 300400
500700
1000 20003000
40005000
700010000
0.01s
0.02s0.04s0.06s0.1s0.2s
0.4s0.6s
1s
2s4s6s
10s
20s30s
1min
2min
4min6min
10min
20min
40min1h
3h2h
Middle-speed type (M)CP-B Reference ambient temperature 40°CCP-S Reference ambient temperature 25°C
100125
200 300400
500700
1000 20003000
40005000
700010000
0.01s
0.02s0.04s0.06s0.1s0.2s
0.4s0.6s
1s
2s4s6s
10s
20s30s
1min
2min
4min6min
10min
20min
40min1h
3h2h
Low-speed type (S)CP-B Reference ambient temperature 40°CCP-S Reference ambient temperature 25°C
100125
200 300400
500700
1000 20003000
40005000
700010000
0.01s
0.02s0.04s0.06s0.1s0.2s
0.4s0.6s
1s
2s4s6s
10s
20s30s
1min
2min
4min6min
10min
20min
40min1h
3h2h
Middle-speed type (MD)CP-B Reference ambient temperature 40°CCP-S Reference ambient temperature 25°C
*1. Specify if for DC use when ordering.
parts denote CP-B type.
lines denote CP-S type.
Type CP-B Type CP-S
Frame (A) 30
Type CP-B
2.5
2500
—
1500
1000 (DC65V)
0.1, 0.25, 0.3, 0.5,1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10,15, 20, 30
Instantaneous type (I) Fast type (F), (FD)Medium-speed type (M),(MD) Slow type (S), (SD)
AC 250DC 65, DC125 (for 2-pole breakers series type only) *1
Instantaneous type (I): magnetic onlyOther type (M, MD, FD, S, SD):hydraulic magnetic
Number of poles
Rated impulse voltage Uimp (kV)
Rated voltage (V)
AC
DC
Rated current (A)
Operating characteristics
Tripping system
short circuitrating (A)
125V
240V
250V
60V
120V
1 2 3
— 1000 (DC125V) —
CP-S
2.5
2500
—
1500
1000 (DC65V)
0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.3, 0.5, 0.75,1, 2, 2.5, 3, 5, 7, 7.5, 10,15, 20, 25, 30
1 2 3
— 1000 (DC125V) —
151
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
Type name
NF250-SW
Number of poles
3P
Rated current
200A
Quantity
10
B
Rated voltage
Standard
Connectionmethod
B
Connectionmethod
AL, SHT (AC110V)
Internalaccessories
Externalaccessories
Quantity
10
AX, SLT, TBM
Internalaccessories
Externalaccessories
Type name
NV250-SW
Number of poles
3P
Rated current
200A
Rated voltage
AC230-400-440V
Rated sensitivitycurrent
100 • 300 • 500mA
Type of residualcarrent protection
C
S
H
U
Economy type
Standard type
High-performance type
Ultra current-limiting type
Motor braker
NF
MB
C
S
H
U
Economy type
Standard type
High-performance type
Ultra current-limiting type
NV
2P, 3P, 4P
3P
NF
MB
NV
NV
NV
1ø2W
1ø2W1ø3W3ø3W
3ø4W
2P
3P
4P
Front connection
Solderless (box) terminal
Rear connection
Pulg-in
F
SL
B
PM
PAL
Built-inAccessories
Pre-alarm (contact output)
Overcurrent alarm
Cylinder keylock
PAL
OAL
CYL
High-speed type
Time-delay type
Blank
Specify
Alarm switch
Auxiliary switch
Shunt trip(Specify rated coil voltage.)
Under voltage trip(Specify rated coil voltage.)
Lead-wire terminal block
Internal terminal type
AL
AX
SHT
UVT
SLT
INT
Electrical operation device
Operating handle
Enclosure box
Mechanical interlock
Terminal cover(TC-L, TC-S, TTC, BTC)
Handle lock device
Card holder
MD
F • S • V
S • I • W
MI
TC
LC • HLHL-S
CH
Even for adjustable rated current models, the working current should be specified.
Specify the applicable marine standards
∗ “CE” is standard.
Secify DC voltage when for use inDC circuit
AC230-400-440V
30 • 100 • 500mA
100 • 300 • 500mA
Alarm switch
Auxiliary switch
Under voltage trip(Specity rated coil voltage)
Lead-wire terminal block
AL
AX
UVT
SLT
Electrical operation device
Operating handle
Enclosure box
Mechanical interlock
Terminal cover(TC-L, TC-S, TTC, BTC)
Handle lock device
Card holder
MD
F • S • V
S • I • W
MI
TC
LC • HLHL-S
CH
Even for adjustable rated current models, the working current should be specified.
Front connection
Solderless (box) terminal
Rear connection
Pulg-in
F
SL
B
PM
MG
Built-inAccessories
Insulation switch
Earth-leakage circuit alarm switch
Test button module
Pre-alarm module
MG
EAL
TBM
PAL
7. Ordering Information
7
8
152
● Contents of a softwareThe program's menu allows not only short-circuit current calculations but also the examination of various protection coordination.
● Preparation of single-line connection diagrams.● Short-circuit calculations.● Automatic selection of breaker type.● Selection of breaker type for cascade interruption combination.● Selection of breaker type for selective interruption combination.● Examination of coordination between high-voltage protection
equipments.● Protection coordination with motor start current.
● Improvement of selection efficiencyBecause the coordination between various protection systems can be examined and breakers can be selected interactively using the personal computer screen, simple, accurate and speedy operation is ensured.
● Maintenance of a softwareThe user can download the latest software updates by accessing Mitsubishi's LVS home page on the Internet.
http://www.fukuyama.melco.co.jp/ lvs
Advantages
Preparation of single-line diagram
Short-circuit current calculation
Examination of cascade interruption combination
Coodination between high-voltage protection equipments
Examination of selective interraption
A more rational and easier breakers selectionsThis software program ensures the easy selection of low-voltage circuit breakers according to the required rated breaking capacity and the related equipments
Calculation and selection softwarefor low-voltage circuit breakers
Operating system: Windows 95/98/NT4.0/2000CPU: 166 MHz or fasterRAM memory size: min 32 MBFree hard disk capacity: min 50 MB Display resolution: min 640 × 480 dotsCD-ROM Drive:Double speed or higher
■ Personal computer specifications
Low-voltage circuit breaker: MCCBs, ELCBs, ACBs, MCBs, Contactors, Thermal relays, High-voltage OCRs
■ Selectable products menu
8. Melshort 2
AdvantagesAdvantages
Model menuModel menu
Since 1933, when Japan's first molded case circuit breaker was released, we have continuously provided circuit breakers with monitors to ensure uninterrupted power supplies, the world's first harmonics current proof and surge proof IC earth leakage circuit breakers, and other new products as needed. We have completed a 21st Century progressive super services for the circuit breaker. In doing so, we have focused on urgently required advanced technology and futuristic ease of use.
Compact, high-performance protectors against short-circuit and overload, and for control circuit operation for electronic equipment, office machinery, and machine tools.
All models have electronic tripping relays ensuring high reliability and excellent performance.
······
······
·······
■ Substantial menuWide ranging technical information is classified into 6 groups.
■ Expert oriented informationIn addition to catalogs, including previous catalog editions and technical data and other information, users get answers to their technical questions.
■ Enhanced information collection efficiencyBy connecting your personal computer to the Internet, you can access the latest information simply and quickly without a need to increase storage space.
■ Molded-Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB)
■ Circuit Protectors (CP)
■ Air Circuit Breakers (ACB)
http://www.fukuyama.melco.co.jp/ lvshttp://www.fukuyama.melco.co.jp/ lvs
■ Earthleakage Circuit Breakers (ELCB)
■ Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB)
153
9. LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEARS TECHNICAL
9
■ Catalogue ● The latest catalogue and old editions are
displayed for reading as is.
■ Standard ● Access international standards
for specific types.■ Contact us at :
● Information centerOur area by area sales centers and contact sites around the world are conveniently located.
● Technical support questionsAccess information on products, handling, and maintenance of low-voltage switchgears via the Internet.
● Web problems: CommentIf you have comments on the technicalinformation service, please contact us via theInternet.
Related siteWe provide technical information on products via the Internet as well as low-voltage switch-gear technical information service.
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation M's DINER Home page···http://www.melco.co.jp/index_e.htm
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation GLOBAL Home page···http://www.mitsubishi.com/
Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V.–Germany···http://www.mitsubishi-automation.com/
■ Selection (Available soon) ● Downloading to the latest CD-ROM software
version (purchased separately) ensuring easyshort circuit current calculation of our low- voltage switchgears and type selection.
■ Technical Infomation ● Access technical and maintenance data on our
low-voltage switchgears.
Downloading is available only those who purchase CD-ROM ''MELSHORT2'' for Mitsubishi selection.
154
INFORMATION SERVICE V IA THE INTERNET
9
FACTORY AUTOMATION SYSTEM: OFFICE TOWER “Z” 14F, 8-12 1chome, Harumi CHUO-KU, TOKYO 104-6214, JAPAN
Country / Region Company Address Telephone
Australia
Belgium
Chile
China
Colombia
Denmark
Egypt
Germany
Greece
Hong Kong
Indonesia
Ireland
Italy
Kuwait
Korea
Lao PDR
Lebanon
Myanmer
Nepal
New Zealand
Norway
Pakistan
Philippines
Poland
Saudi Arabia
Singapore
Slovenia
South Africa
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
Taiwan
Thailand
The Netherlands
Turkey
U.K.
Uruguay
Venezuela
Vietnam
Mitsubishi Electric Australia Pty. Ltd
Emac S.A.
RHONA S.A.
RYODEN INTERNATIONAL (SHANGHAI) LTD.
SHANGHAI SETSUYO TRADING CO.,LTD.
Proelectrico Representaciones S.A.
Louis Poulsen CO. A/S
CAIRO ELECTRICAL GROUP
Drepanias Antonios S.A.
RYODEN AUTOMATION LIMITED
P.T.SAHABAT INDONESIA.
Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Irish Branch.
Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Italy
SALEM M AL-NISF ELECTRICAL CO.W.L.L.
Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. German Branch.
HAN NEUNG TECHNO Co., Ltd.
SOCIETE LAO IMPORT-EXPORT
COMPTOIR D'ELECTRICITEGENERALE INTERNATIONAL
PEACE MYANMAR ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
Watt & Volt House Co., Ltd.
Melco Sales (N.Z.) Ltd.
SCANELEC
Prince Electric Co.
EDISON ELECTRIC INTEGRATED, INC.
MPL Technology Sp zo.o.
CENTER OF ELECTRICAL GOODS
INEA d.o.o.
Circuit Breaker Industries LTD.
Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Spanish Branch.
Euro Energy Components AB
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ASIA PTE LTD.
Trielec A G
Setsuyo Enterprise Co., Ltd.
UNITED TRADING & IMPORT CO. LTD.
Imtech Marine & Industry
GTS
Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. UK-Branch.
Fierro Vignoli S.A.
ADESCO C.A.
Sa Giang Techno Co., Ltd.
348 Victoria Road, Rydalmere, N.S.W. 2116, Australia
Industrialaan 1, B-1702 Groot-Bijgaarden, Belgium.
Vte. Agua Santa 4211 Casilla 30-D (P.O. Box) Viña Del Mar. Chile(Shanghai) 3F, Block 5, 103Cao Bao Road, Shanghai, China
Building of Innovation Center, Room No. 406A, 680 Guiping Road Shanghai, P.R.China
Cra 53 No 29C-73 U.I.C.- Medellin. COLOMBIA.
Geminivej 32, DK-2670 Greve, Denmark.9 Rostoum Street Garden City, APT. 5,P.O. BOX: 165-11516, Cairo-Egypt.
Gothaer Strasse 8, 40880 Ratingen, Germany.
52, ArkadiasSTR.GR 121 32. Peristeri Athens Greece.
10/F Manulife Tower 169 Electric Road North Point. Hong Kong.
JL Muara Karang Selatan Blok A/Utara No.1 kav. NO.11 P.O. Box 5045/Jakarta/11050. Jakarta Indonesia.
Westgate Business Park, Ballymount, Dublin 24, Ireland.
C.D.Colleoni-P.Perseo lng.2, Via Paracelso 121-20041 Agrate Brianza (M1)
P.O. Box 4784. Safat. 13048 Kuwait.
2 Fl. Dong Seo Game Channel Bldg ., 1F 660-11 Deungchon-Dong, Kanguseo-Ku, Seoul, 157-030 Korea
43-47 Lane Xang Road P.O. BOX 2789 VTVientiane Lao PDR.
Cebaco Center-Block A. Autostrade Dora, P.O. BOX: 90-1314 Beirut-Lebanon.
NO. 137/139 Botataung Pagoda Road,Botataung Town Ship 11161, Yangon, Myanmar.
KHA 2-65, Volt House Dilli Bazar Post Box: 2108,kathmandu, Nepal
1 Parliament Street Lower Hutt. New Zealand.
Leirvikasen 43B, N5020 Bergen, Norway.
16 Brandreth Road Lahore 54000. Pakistan.
24th Fl. Galleria Corporate Center Edsa Cr, Ortigas Ave. Quezon City, Metro Manila. Philippines.
ul. Sliczna 36 31-444 Krakow, Poland.
Al-Nabhaniya Street-4Th Crossing, Al-Hassa Road, P.O. BOX: 15955, Riyadh 11454,Saudi Arabia.
307 Alexandra Road #05-01/02 MitsubishiElectric Building Singapore 159943
Ljubljanska 80, SI-61230 Domzale, Slovenia.
Private Bag 2016. Isando 1600, Johannesburg, South Africa
Caretera De Rubi 76-80, 08190 - Sant Cugat Del Valles (Barcelona) Spain
Box 103 48 S-434 24 Kungsbcka, Sweden.
Mühlentalstrasse 136, 8201 Schaffhausen, Switzerland
6F, NO. 105 Wu-Kung 3rd rd., Wu-Ku Hsiang,Taipei Hsien Taiwan
77/12 Bumrungmuang Road, Klong Mahanak, Pomprab Bangkok 10100.
Postbox 5054, NL-3008 AB-Rotterdam, Netherlands.
Fahri Gizden Sokak,Hacaloglu Apt. No.22/6TR-80280 Gayrettepe/Istanbul,Turkey.
Travellers Lane, Hatfield, Herts, AL10 8xB, U.K.
P.O. box 20022/Suc Upae, Montevideo. Uruguay.
Lle 8, Calpon Elinsu,La Urbina-EDO, Miranda P.O.BOX 78034 Caracas 1074A., Venezuela
207/4 Nguyen Van Thu St., Dist 1, Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam
612-9684, 7586
32-(0)2-4810211
(32)-320600
021-6475-3228
021-6485-6611
574-235-00-28
45-(0)43-95-95-95
20-2-7961337
49-(0)2102-4860
30(1)57 81 599 699
28878870
021-6621780
353-(0)1-4505007
965-484-5660
82-2-3668-6567
21-215043, 21-215110
961-1-240430
95-01-202589, 202449, 202590
977-1-411330
39-(0)39 60 531
644-569-7350
47-55-506000
042-7654342
02-643-8691
48-(0)12 632-28-85
966-1-4770149
65-473-2308
386-(0)17 21 80 00
27-11-928-2000
34-93-595-3131
46-(0)300-69 00 40
41-(0)52-6258425
02-2298-8889
223-4220-3
31-(0)10 487 19 11
90-(0)212-2674011
44-(0)1707-276-100
598-2-92-08-08
58-2-241-7634
848-821-6453
Revised publication, effective Sept. 2002.Specifications subject to change without notice.
This pamphlet is made from recycled paper.Y-0593A 0209 printed in Japan(MDOC)
Safety Tips : Be sure to read the instruction manual fully before using this product.